.ic; 


t%^ixi^ 


rnevitef^ 


DUKE  UNIVERSITY 


LIBRARY 


The  Glenn  Negley  Collection 
of  Utopian  Literature 


^dzj 


^^e  Kingdom  gf  Gold 


Digitized  by  the  Internet  Archive 
in  2010  with  funding  from 
Duke  University  Libraries 


http://www.archive.org/details/kingdomofgolddedOOcarp 


Kingdom  of  Gold 


Dedicated  To  ''Whomsoever", 
November  1888 

Rejected  by  the  Builders  of  Books 
FOR  A  Quarter  of  a  Century 


By^ 


BENJAMIN  FOWLER  CARPENTER 


The  Christopher  Press 

Boston,  Mass. 

1913 


Copyright ,  igij 

By  Benjamin  Fowler  Carpenter 

All  Rights  Reserved 


INDEX  TO  CHAPTERS. 

1 . — Jesse  Fleming,  a  lone  castaway     ....  7 

2. — Elnathan   Yardley,   the   aged   companion   and 

guide lo 

3. — Mystic  Island 24 

4. — The  Fleming  family  in  London,  Jesse  seen  but 

not  recognized 39 

5. — Nina  Hassen  starts  from  Mystic  Island  in  search 

of  Jesse 44 

6. — Mysterious  dreams ;  death  of  George  Fleming  .         5 1 
7. — Nina's  voyage  to  Melbourne  and  London,  her 

meeting  with  James  Fordham        ...         65 
8. — Millionaires  and  reformers,  with  Jesse  as  oracle, 

organize  "The  Kingdom  of  Gold"     .       .         79 
9. — Nina's  voyage   to   Sweden:    discovery   of   the 

name  of  Jesse's  foster-father        ...         94 
10. — The  "Kingdom  of  Gold."      Securing  and  stor- 
ing gold 110 

1  I. — The  "Temple"  in  the  South  Seas;  the  "Great 
Ships"  that  dominate  the  nations;  "mag- 
netic vibratory  telegraphy":  gold  with- 
drawn from  the  nations!        .       .       .       .      127 


12. — Nina's  pursuit  of  Jesse  after  discovery  of  his 

name,  "George  Cosgrove"    .       .       .       •       1 36 

13. — Jesse  as  oracle:  ocean  voyage  of  members  of 
"The  Kingdom  of  Gold":  Nina  discovers 
Jesse 147 

1 4. — Powders  of  the  "Kingdom  of  Gold"     .       .       .       1  65 

15. — Mrs.   Fleming  and  Howard  return  to  Mystic 

Island 175 

16. — Members  of  "The  Kingdom  of  Gold,"  Nina 

and  Jesse,  sail  for  Mystic  Island  .       .       .       1  88 

1  7. — Meeting  of  Mrs.  Fleming  and  Howard  with 
Jesse  and  Nina:  the  landing  on  Mystic 
Island 200 

1 8. — Alonzo   Parsons  proclaims  a  divine   kingdom 

and  furnishes  miraculous  demonstrations!      219 

19.— Ughtandlife 236 


THE     KINGDOM     OF     GOLD 


THE  KINGDOM  OF  GOLD 


CHAPTER   I 

JESSE  FLEMING.  A  LONE  CASTAWAY 

Upon  a  wave-polished  boulder  in  a  recess  of  the 
rocks  on  the  eastern  shore  of  Mystic  Island,  sat  a 
lad  clothed  in  the  meagre  garb  of  a  tropical  clime. 
With  his  bare  feet  resting  on  the  pliant  sand  he 
formed  little  depressions  into  which  the  spent  wave- 
lets of  the  ocean  found  momentary  rest,  and  then 
in  a  twinkling  were  displaced  by  a  new-comer,  that 
in  turn  leveled  itself  and  became  for  an  instant  a 
miniature  sea. 

Larger  waves  repeatedly  washed  away  the  works 
of  the  deft  pattering  feet,  and  newly  modeled  forms 
followed  in  rapid  succession.  There  was  a  rhythmic 
unison  of  mind  and  body.  As  a  lively  emotion 
vibrated  in  the  brain,  marked  impressions  were  in- 
dented  in    the    sand.      As    the    thought    clustered 


8  THE     KINGDOM    OF    GOLD 

around  a  controlling  sentiment,  the  outlines  were 
smoothed  into  definite  form. 

His  eyes  conveyed  his  thoughts  out  and  out  over 
the  limitless  blue;  and  his  restless  feet  recorded  the 
mental  impressions  of  the  journey.  These  records 
which  vanished  as  an  image  from  a  mirror,  were  but 
the  types  of  an  indelible  tracing  imprinted  on  the 
tablets  of  enduring  memory;  and  though  oceans  of 
thought,  calm  and  deep,  or  wild  and  tempestuous, 
ceaselessly  ebb  and  flow,  their  antitypes  can  never 
be  effaced! 

A  few  paces  distant  from  the  youth,  reclining  on 
his  staff,  stood  a  bent  form.  Long  white  silky  hair 
surrounded  a  face  beaming  with  kindly  expressions, 
as  he  watched  the  child  before  him.  By  his  side, 
and  with  one  hand  on  the  supporting  stick,  stood  a 
little  girl  of  eight  summers.  Her  dark  eyes  were 
fixed  intently  upon  the  bright  face  above,  as  she 
listened  to  the  lesson  which  was  being  imparted  by 
the  aged  companion  and  guide. 

Elnathan  Yardley,  with  his  three-score  years  and 
ten  of  experience,  realized  that  character  is  con- 
stantly being  formed;  that  each  thought  or  emotion 
etches  a  line  which  adds  to,  or  detracts  from,  its 
beauty.  He  was  endeavoring  to  impress  upon  the 
minds  of  these  companions  of  tender  years,  the  im- 
portance of  little  things ;  and  had  been  talking  about 
the  mysteries  of  the  mighty  deep;  of  the  "little 
builders  in  the  great  oceans",  how  these  minute 
creatures  had  converted  the  briny  waters  into  im- 


THE     KINGDOM     OF     GOLD  9 

mense  islands,  and  given  up  their  lives  in  producing 
monuments  which  would  outlast  the  great  pyramids 
built  by  man. 

His  companions  were  Jesse  Fleming  and  Nina 
Hassen ;  and  the  purpose  which  brought  them  to  the 
beach  was  to  take  a  sail  on  the  blue  waves  of  the 
sea.  They  had  started  a  little  in  advance  and  the 
mothers  of  the  children  were  approaching  to  wit- 
ness the  departure  and  wish  bon  voyage. 

An  opportunity  had  been  watched  for  when  the 
waves  would  admit  of  the  easy  management  of  the 
boat  through  the  line  of  breakers,  and  now  the  con- 
ditions were  favorable,  with  sufficient  breeze.  It 
was  an  hour  of  great  moment,  however,  as  it  was 
the  first  event  of  the  kind  they  had  ever  experienced. 

At  the  appointed  time,  just  at  the  ebbing  of  the 
tide,  the  boat,  which  had  been  brought  from  a  dis- 
tance by  Captain  Jones  and  Nina's  father,  appeared 
around  the  point  of  rocks  to  the  south;  and  the  chil- 
dren danced  with  delight  as  they  saw  it. 

With  kisses  and  goodbyes,  Jesse  and  Nina  were 
handed  into  the  boat,  and  cautioned  by  their  moth- 
ers not  to  approach  the  sides;  and  to  be  obedient  to 
every  command.  Elnathan  Yardley  accompanied 
them,  and  soon  the  little  vessel  with  its  five  occu- 
pants, was  plowing  through  the  breakers. 

The  young  mothers  gazed  with  rising  emotions 
as  the  distance  so  rapidly  increased  between  them 
and  those  they  loved  so  fondly.  Anxiety  took  the 
place  of  pleasurable  expectations,  as  the  reality  so 


10  THE     KINGDOM    OF    GOLD 

long  anticipated  was  now  so  vividly  realized,  and 
increased  as  the  white  sail  grew  small  and  smaller, 
until  it  became  a  mere  speck  flashing  a  ray  as  it  rose 
on  the  crest  of  a  wave,  and  hidden  from  view  as  it 
descended  into  a  trough  of  the  sea. 

With  sadness  depicted  in  their  faces,  sighing  well 
wishes  for  the  voyagers,  almost  in  silence,  they 
wended  their  way  back  to  the  cottages  in  the  valley. 
Once  within  the  seclusion  of  home,  each  gave  way 
to  repressed  mother-tears. 

Alas,  how  little  of  life  is  foreknown;  either  its 
joys  or  sorrows.  The  anxious  fears  of  the  mothers 
might  have  been  but  the  natural  result  of  inexperi- 
ence ;  there  may,  however,  have  been  foreshadowing 
of  coming  events  felt  within  their  souls. 

Before  two  hours  elapsed  a  change  came  over  the 
whole  island.  Dark,  threatening  clouds  suddenly 
appeared;  and  a  terrible  thunder  storm  was  rushing 
over  the  mighty  deep! 

Hurriedly  the  mothers  gathered  a  few  wraps  and, 
securing  the  cottages  against  the  approaching  storm, 
pale  and  frantic  they  rushed  back  to  the  beach ;  and, 
with  eyes  distended  to  the  last  extremity,  they 
scanned  the  eastern  horizon  for  some  gleam  of  the 
little  sail.  With  wild  exclamations,  wringing  their 
hands,  they  paced  to  and  fro  in  earnest  supplication 
for  the  salvation  of  their  dear  ones! 

Meantime  Jesse's  father,  hurrying  from  his  labors 
in  the  field,  finding  the  cottages  closed,  had  hastened 
to  the  shore,  and  stood  dumb  with  amazement  as  he 


THE     KINGDOM     OF     GOLD  1  1 

viewed  the  threatening  storm.  Oh,  what  anxious 
moments,  as  the  clouds  grew  darker  and  darker, 
and  the  thunders  terrific ! 

Reahzing  that  they  could  do  nothing  for  the  im- 
periled ones  by  remaining  exposed  to  the  storm,  they 
entered  a  cavern  under  an  overhanging  rock,  at  a 
slight  elevation  not  far  distant,  where  a  more  ex- 
tended view  was  possible.  But  the  thickness  of  the 
mist  had  so  increased  that  nothing  could  be  seen. 

In  a  few  moments  the  full  force  of  the  thunder 
cloud  was  upon  them,  and  they  remained  beneath 
the  shelter  for  a  full  hour ;  when  gradually  the  storm 
ceased.  Before  the  sun  had  reached  the  western 
horizon,  the  clouds  had  vanished;  and  the  ocean, 
now  in  its  fury,  was  once  more  spread  out  before 
their  vision.  No  object  was  visible  on  its  foamy 
billows ! 

As  the  darkness  came  they  repaired  to  the  Flem- 
ing cottage,  where  the  night  was  spent  in  anxious 
suspense.  They  had  decided  to  start  at  the  first 
appearance  of  dawn,  for  the  high  promontory,  about 
two  miles  distant,  from  which  the  view  of  the  ocean 
was  far  more  extensive;  and  from  which  point,  if 
any,  the  little  boat  might  be  discovered. 

They  arrived  before  an  extended  view  was  pos- 
sible. In  the  first  hues  of  the  morning  they  were 
encouraged  by  a  sight  which  remained  for  a  few 
moments  only.  Far  away  to  the  northeast  where 
the  red  sky  and  blue  ocean  commingled,  an  object 
appeared  resembling  a  small  sail,  but  it  soon  became 


12  THE    KINGDOM    OF    GOLD 

invisible  and  was  not  again  discovered,  though  they 
watched  for  hours. 

Almost  prostrated  by  grief  and  fatigue  they  re- 
turned by  way  of  the  beach  from  which  the  cast- 
aways had  gone  forth,  thinking  they  might  possibly 
discover  something  to  encourage  their  fast  waning 
hopes.  They  remained  but  a  few  moments  on  this 
historic  and  momentuous  spot;  for  this  had  formerly 
proven  an  harbor  of  safety,  and  as  it  now  seemed 
would  be  the  portal  of  death! 

How  sadly  they  retraced  their  steps  over  the 
rugged  path  where  the  little  feet  had  so  frequently 
trod,  sometimes  stumbled!  Each  projecting  root  or 
rock,  which  might  have  formed  an  obstruction  in  the 
pathway  of  innocence,  was  now  viewed  as  some- 
thing dear;  as  that  which  knew  Jesse  and  Nina. 
It  may  have  bruised  their  tender  feet,  and  caused 
pain;  but  these  were  as  joys  compared  to  this  calam- 
ity! Each  object  seemed  as  a  part  and  parcel  of 
their  lives,  and  entitled  to  tender  regard. 

As  soon  as  the  cottage  was  reached,  Mr.  Fleming 
started  to  inform  the  inhabitants  of  the  little  village 
of  Sackhaven,  about  a  mile  distant  to  the  westward- 
that  a  rescuing  party  might  be  organized  to  search 
the  shores  of  the  island,  and  be  prepared  to  render 
assistance,  and  furnish  food  for  the  famishing, 
should  the  boat  return. 

It  was  the  third  morning  after  the  storm  when  a 
messenger  arrived  from  the  extreme  northern  end  of 
the  island,  with  tidings  of  the  lost  boat  and  its  in- 


THE    KINGDOM    OF    GOLD 


13 


mates.  Oh!  how  the  mothers'  hearts  beat  with  joy! 
and  the  wife's  affections,  aroused  from  the  stupor 
of  paralysis,  came  bounding  forth  as  the  first  words 
of  "found!  they  are  found!"  reached  their  ears. 
But  with  it,  Hke  the  sudden  closing  of  a  doorway, 
shutting  out  the  hght  came  the  words,  "but  little 
Jesse  and  Mr.  Yardley  are  lost!" 

The  messenger  was  questioned  particularly  to  as- 
certain every  thread  of  information  possible,  and 
they  learned  that  the  boat  had  been  struck  by  light- 
ning. The  mast  had  been  splintered  and  Jesse  was 
so  injured  as  to  be  unconscious;  while  Mr.  Yardley 
was  paralyzed.  They  had  managed  to  outride  the 
storm,  and  endure  the  night.  The  first  morning 
found  them  far  to  the  northeast  of  the  island,  with 
shattered  mast  and  rent  sail.  The  day  was  occupied 
in  repairing  the  sail,  and  fixing  the  mast  so  as  to 
hoist  it.  Before  darkness  settled  over  the  waters 
they  were  moving  slowly  toward  the  southwest;  and 
hoped  by  morning,  to  be  in  sight  of  the  island. 

The  first  dawn  of  light  came  too  late  to  prevent 
entering  the  breakers  at  the  "dangerous  north  end". 
They  found  themselves  almost  engulfed,  being 
tossed  to  and  fro,  with  the  shore  now  growing  visi- 
ble. One  thing  appeared  to  be  in  their  favor,  the 
tide  was  setting  away  from  the  island,  but  all  efforts 
to  prevent  collision  were  unavaiHng.  When  the 
crash  came  all  but  Jesse  were  thrown  from  the  boat 
and  washed  against  and  upon  the  rocks.  By  the 
dexterous  efforts  of  Captain  Jones  and  Mr.  Hassen, 


14  THE    KINGDOM     OF    GOLD 

Nina  was  rescued,  but  Mr.  Yardley  who  was  help- 
less was  drowned. 

The  boat,  which  had  lost  its  mast,  had  righted, 
and,  floating  with  the  tide,  was  drifting  through  the 
breakers  out  on  the  boundless  waters!  Little  Jesse, 
blinded  by  the  lightning  and  unconscious,  lay  upon 
an  improvised  bed  made  of  part  of  the  torn  sail; 
with  Mr.  Hassen's  coat  as  a  cover. 

The  three  survivors  lay  exhausted,  vsdth  their  gaze 
intently  fixed  on  the  receding  boat,  with  its  precious 
freight!  too  weak  to  move,  but  realizing  that  all 
efforts  were  futile,  struck  dumb  with  fright  and 
despair  and  exhausted  For  want  of  nourishment. 

As  soon  as  Captain  Jones,  Nina  and  her  father 
had  recovered  sufficient  strength  to  proceed,  they 
sought  for  a  pathway  which  led  from  this  secluded 
and  dangerous  spot  to  the  settlement  of  Sackhaven. 
For  a  considerable  distance  this  path  extended  along 
the  precipitous  shore,  and  they  could  watch  the  dis- 
appearing boat  as  it  rose  and  fell  far  out  over  the 
waves. 

"Poor  little  Jesse!"  was  the  oft  repeated  ejacula- 
tion, as  they  slowly  crept  along  the  narrow  trail  over 
the  rugged  rocks ;  carrying  Nina,  who  was  too  weak 
to  walk,  and  was  constantly  moaning  for  Jesse. 

They  were  soon  discovered  by  one  of  the  search- 
ing party,  and  he  hurried  back  to  the  settlement  to 
inform  the  mothers,  while  others  cared  for  the  suf- 
ferers. After  partaking  of  refreshments  they  were 
assisted  over  the  cliff  to  a  path  where  a  mule  could 


THE     KINGDOM     OF     GOLD  15 

find  footing  and  Nina  was  placed  in  a  saddle  and 
carried  to  the  road  which  extended  north  and  south 
across  the  island.  Then  they  proceeded  in  a  con- 
veyance to  their  homes. 

Meanwhile  six  men  had  been  sent  to  bury  the  re- 
mains of  Elnathan  Yardley,  as  it  was  deemed  im- 
practical to  try  to  carry  his  body  such  a  great  dis- 
tance over  the  precipitous  pathways. 

Mr.  Flemming  had  remained  in  the  vicinity  of 
the  cottages,  visiting  the  shore  every  hour  of  the  day. 
As  soon  as  Mr.  and  Mrs.  Flemming  learned  of  the 
disaster  they  decided  to  go  to  the  promontory  to  see 
if  it  were  possible  to  get  even  one  more  glimpse  of 
the  boat  which  was  bearing  away  their  precious  boy. 

Both  hurried  forward,  but  such  was  the  anxiety 
of  the  father  that,  urging  the  mother  to  follow  as 
rapidly  as  possible,  he  pushed  on  like  an  antelope 
bounding  through  the  forest.  On  his  arrival  he  dis- 
covered an  object  which  appeared  like  the  boat  ris- 
ing and  falling  on  the  distant  waves.  Revived  by 
the  excitement  of  this  vision,  he  hastened  to  help 
Mrs.  Flemming  to  the  spot;  when  both  were  able 
to  discern  it.  They  knelt  and  called  upon  God  to 
change  the  wind  and  the  tide  and  restore  their  prec- 
ious boy  to  them.  Long  and  earnest  were  their 
prayers,  but  as  they  prayed  and  while  their  eyes 
were  suffused  with  tears  searching  for  the  dim  ob- 
ject far  away,  all  vision  of  it  disappeared,  and  they 
stood  in  despair,  while  the  waves,  as  they  dashed 


16  THE    KINGDOM    OF    GOLD 

against  the  rocks  below,  seemed  to  echo  back  their 
moans. 

Seated  on  the  brink  of  the  promontory  they 
watched  for  hours,  and  talked  of  their  great  loss, 
and  of  the  dear  old  friend  who  had  taken  such  an 
interest  in  Jesse,  and  who  had  been  as  a  father  to 
them  all.  Hiey  were  somewhat  reheved  when  their 
thoughts  reverted  to  the  safety  of  Nina,  her  father 
and  Captain  Jones. 

Intense  and  long  was  that  last  look  as  they  rose 
to  depart  in  deep  sorrow.  Slowly  and  hopelessly 
they  retraced  their  steps  toward  the  little  cottage, 
and  when  they  stood  within  its  silent  rooms  it  did 
not  seem  like  the  same  dwelHng;  there  remained  but 
the  form  without  the  life  of  home. 

To  that  extent  which  sympathy  and  condolence 
can  bring  relief  to  the  sorrow-stricken,  the  Flem- 
mings  were  consoled,  as  their  neighbors  and  friends 
were  without  exception  attentive  to  every  available 
means  of  relief  and  comfort.  Like  all  isolated  com- 
munities they  had  learned  to  share  in  the  joys  and 
sorrows  which  were  considered  as  belonging  to  all 
rather  than  to  a  family  or  merely  to  relatives. 

Those  who  had  gone  to  prepare  a  grave  and  bury 
the  body  of  the  aged  and  devoted  guardian  of  Jesse 
and  Nina  had  returned  and  brought  such  articles  as 
were  found  in  Elnathan  Yardley's  clothing.  These 
were  delivered  to  Mrs.  Fleming  who  deposited  them 
with  other  effects  in  a  small  escritoire  in  Mr.  Yard- 
ley's  bedroom,  which  had  also  been  shared  by  Jesse. 


THE     KINGDOM     OF     GOLD  17 

The  larger  and  the  smaller  beds  were  spread  with 
white  linen,  each  article  of  furniture  placed  in  or- 
derly arrangement  and  all  things  were  maintained 
in  their  accustomed  places.  In  the  living  room  such 
articles  as  belonged  to  either  were  in  like  manner 
arranged  as  if  for  daily  use.  The  old  order  of 
things  was  to  some  extent  carried  out,  but  as  each 
duty  was  performed  a  new  thread  was  woven  into 
the  fabric  of  life.  How  different  these  from  the  old 
familiar  ones  wherein  the  smile  of  a  child's  face  and 
curls  of  flossy  hair  were  so  often  repeated. 

The  walls  no  longer  echoed  peals  of  joyous  glee, 
all  was  sombre  and  gloomy.  Even  the  floors  an- 
swered unpleasantly  to  the  tread  of  friendly  feet. 

Gradually  as  the  lonely  days  wearily  sped  on, 
new  patterns  appeared ;  and  at  last  there  came  sweet 
smiles  and  joyous  peals  of  laughter  echoing  and  re- 
sponsive and  the  patter  on  the  floors  renewed  their 
welcome  sound.  But  there  were  unworn  parts 
which  were  growing  thinner  and  thinner  as  the  years 
passed. 

Tlie  pathway  to  the  playground  on  the  beach 
was  choked  with  weeds,  while  that  which  led  to  the 
promontory  was  worn  with  frequent  journeying. 


18  THE     KINGDOM     OF     GOLD 


CHAPTER    II 

ELNATHAN  YARDLEY.  THE  AGED  COMPANION 
AND  GUIDE 

Elnathan  Yardley  was  by  nature  a  reformer.  He 
had  formulated  a  scheme  for  harmonizing  the  dis- 
tinctions found  in  society,  and  endeavored  by  years 
of  effort  to  estabhsh  an  association  which  would 
practically  demonstrate  his  theories.  He  had  found 
human  nature  too  contentious,  unyielding,  and  in- 
dividualized. Old  traits  of  character  continually 
cropped  out  in  the  various  experiences  which  called 
for  self  sacrifice  and  concessions. 

The  power  to  reform  seemed  beyond  the  reach 
of  self  effort.  Even  when  earnest  endeavor  was 
made,  there  were  retained  desires  which  thwarted 
mere  intellectual  resolution.  Then  there  were  those 
who  were  so  positively  self-centered,  that  opposition 
seemed  the  most  active  principle  manifested. 

Long  continued  experiments  proved  unsuccessful 
and  the  reformer  found  himself  confronted  with  a 
condition  which  required  adjustment  in  his  own  men- 


THE     KINGDOM     OF     GOLD  19 

tality,  to  reconcile  his  conceptions  of  the  divine  ori- 
gin and  providential  destiny  of  mankind. 

The  struggle  was  short  but  decisive.  He  wisely 
concluded  that  there  must  be  a  mistake  in  his  meth- 
ods, not  in  the  material  he  was  dealing  with.  There 
were  individual  examples  which  demonstrated  the 
possibility;  and  if  these  were  multiplied  the  problem 
would  be  solved. 

Many  years  had  elapsed  since  the  scheme  had 
been  abandoned;  and  many  and  varied  experiences 
had  come  to  him  during  this  period;  and  now,  bent 
with  the  burdens  of  life's  struggles  and  its  accumu- 
lated years,  he  was  resting  calmly  in  this  beautiful 
valley  by  the  sea,  waiting  for  the  Angel  of  Change 
to  come. 

But  as  he  waited  he  worked;  feeling  that  he  did 
not  want  the  record  of  a  lost  day  to  stand  as  part 
of  his  Hfe-book.  He  was  well  aware  that  a  few 
days  might  be  the  measure  of  his  continuance  in  the 
company  of  the  two  lovely  children;  and  he  also 
realized  the  possibilities  of  life,  even  for  one  as  old 
and  feeble  as  himself.  So  he  planned  and  worked 
as  if  years  were  secured  to  him  for  usefulness,  look- 
ing forward  for  results  through  the  companions  he 
had  selected  as  receptacles  of  all  he  could  transfer 
of  his  knowledge  and  experience. 

He  realized  that  only  through  others  could  he 
transmit  whatever  of  truth  had  come  to  him  and  that 
if  he  neglected  to  give  to  those  about  him  the  results 
of  his  efforts,  his  life  would  end  like  a  great  tree 


20  THE     KINGDOM     OF     GOLD 

which  falls  in  the  solitudes  to  smoulder  into  dust, 
instead  of  being  secured  and  fashioned  by  the  work- 
men for  some  useful  and  valuable  purpose. 

"By  inculcating  right  precepts  I  may  save  to  these 
growing  ones  many  unnecessary  steps  in  the  journey 
of  life,  and  equip  them  with  knowledge  which  may 
serve  them  throughout  their  course;"  he  would  say 
to  himself,  as  he  joined  in  their  rambles  and  took 
part  in  their  amusements. 

His  disappointments  and  apparently  futile  efforts 
had  taught  him  the  importance  of  applying  one's 
powers  to  the  accomplishment  of  "the  available  little 
rather  than  strain  for  the  possible  much".  His  state 
was  one  of  earnest  desire  to  do  good,  with  a  feeling 
that  in  some  way  the  opportunity  and  means  would 
be  furnished. 

Here  were  two  individualized  entities,  growing 
and  developing  day  by  day;  becoming  formed, 
fashioned  and  imbued  with  enduring  powers.  The 
laws  of  transmission  had  impressed  upon  each  a 
distinct  tendency.  The  germ  of  the  future  being 
was  already  fashioned,  but  the  measure  of  each  pos- 
sibility was  subject  to  conditions,  influences,  and 
powers;  and  these  were  the  means  in  the  hands  of 
experience  which  might  be  wielded  and  directed  to 
accomplish  an  end — to  establish  habits  of  thought 
in  accord  with  the  laws  of  true  harmonious  develop- 
ment of  body  and  soul. 

Watching  with  eager  soHcitude  every  indication 
of  innate  tendency,  and  throwing  the  net  of  affection 


THE     KINGDOM     OF     GOLD  21 

and  good  will  around  it  before  it  had  plumed  itself 
for  flight,  or  carried  the  nature  captivated  into 
boundless  fields  of  experience,  he  was  able  to  direct 
the  new-born  emotion  within  the  limitations  of 
healthy  exercise,  and  assign  it  to  its  appropriate 
place  in  that  growing  accumulation  which  was  form- 
ing the  characters  of  Jesse  and  Nina. 

His  greatest  effort  was  exerted  to  inspire  them 
with  faith,  and  he  discovered  the  means  of  measur- 
ing its  growth  by  observing  the  indications  of  pa- 
tience, under  trying  circumstances.  At  first,  like  all 
children,  they  were  governed  almost  entirely  by  their 
feelings,  and  unable  to  bridge  the  apparently  great 
chasm  between  their  disappointment  and  renewed 
hope.  The  little  clouds  which  arose  above  their 
daily  horizons  seemed  veritable  mountains  of  diffi- 
culty, until  the  aged  companion  by  diversions  of 
thought,  and  the  creation  of  new  pastimes,  dispersed 
and  cast  them  into  the  sea  of  oblivion. 

The  beautiful  little  valley  in  which  the  dwellings 
were  located  was  surrounded  on  the  north  by  pre- 
cipitous hills  with  rocky  cliffs ;  east,  the  restless  ocean 
swashed  the  shores.  On  the  south  the  sloping  up- 
lands were  covered  with  woods;  westward  lay  the 
cultivated  fields  through  which  a  pathway  led  over 
a  cliff  to  the  litde  hamlet  of  Sackhaven.  This  was 
all  the  world  known  to  Jesse  and  Nina.  Their 
minds  had  not  yet  soared  beyond  these  natural  bar- 
riers which  formed  the  boundaries  of  their  paradise. 
Within  these  limits  their  fancies  had  freely  soared; 


22  THE     KINGDOM     OF     GOLD 

this  was  the  school  room  where  Elnathan  Yardley 
had  so  devoutly  directed  their  education. 

As  the  tides  rose  on  the  shores,  all  the  sandy 
beach  was  submerged,  and  when  it  receded  the  de- 
lightful playground  was  again  in  view.  Often  when 
they  approached  the  ocean  the  playground  had  dis- 
appeared, as  if  washed  away  by  the  angry  waves, 
and  the  httle  restless  feet  were  turned  aside  by  the 
ever  present  guide  into  some  interesting  nook  or  by 
the  side  of  some  rocky  cliff  where  studies  of  geology 
were  begun,  or  into  the  forest  where  lessons  of  life 
were  found  on  every  hand,  and  by  the  tutor's 
manipulations  and  descriptions,  were  made  to  reveal 
wondrous  mysteries. 

Meantime  the  opportunity  to  inculcate  a  lesson 
of  faith  was  not  lost,  as  the  wild  waves  were  danc- 
ing over  the  coveted  beach. 

"We  must  learn  to  wait,"  he  would  say,  "for 
there  is  a  right  time,  when  all  that  is  good  and  pleas- 
ant for  us  will  come;  not  when  we  would  like  to 
have  it,  but  when  it  is  best  for  us  to  have  it.  We 
will  wait,  and  while  we  wait  we  will  be  happy;  it 
will  surely  come." 

In  a  little  while  the  patience  would  be  exhausted, 
and  again  and  again,  through  the  intervening  hours, 
the  assurance  was  given  until  the  reward  came  and 
the  children  were  dancing  merrily  on  the  sands. 
Then  their  attention  was  called  to  the  fulfillment  of 
the  promise  that  the  joy  would  "surely  come". 
Many  times  did  he  recall  the  lessons  of  faith,  and 


THE     KINGDOM     OF     GOLD  23 

impress  upon  them  the  necessity  of  continually  exer- 
cising this  abiding  feeling.  Constantly  on  the  alert 
to  lengthen  out  their  patience  by  interposing  obsta- 
cles to  exhibitions  of  impatience,  and  so  bridging 
over  many  hours  which  would  otherwise  have  been 
filled  with  bitter  disappointments. 

The  cottages  in  which  the  children  dwelt  were 
noted  throughout  the  island  as  being  very  handsome 
and  modern  in  appearance.  They  were  the  only 
dwellings  which  presented  architectural  outlines  of 
beauty,  such  as  are  common  in  civilized  lands. 


24  THE     KINGDOM     OF     GOLD 


CHAPTER   III 

MYSTIC  ISLAND 

The  inhabitants  of  Mystic  Island  were  a  mixed 
race,  some  being  natives,  but  the  greater  number 
were  descendants  of  ship-wrecked  seamen  who  for 
more  than  a  century  had  consorted  with  the  natives 
and  raised  families. 

About  twenty  years  previous  to  the  arrival  of 
Mr.  Fleming  a  vessel  had  been  wrecked  and  from 
it  a  score  of  Swedes  were  added  to  the  population. 
These  were  thrifty  yeomen  who  were  on  their  way 
to  Australia.  There  were  two  families  among  the 
number  with  children;  Fred  Hassen,  wife  and  son 
John,  Samuel  Wolf,  wife  and  two  sons  and  two 
daughters. 

The  examples  of  these  thrifty  people  from  a 
northern  clime,  where  the  rigors  of  winter  made  ac- 
tivity a  necessity  during  the  summer  days,  to  lay 
up  sufficient  store  to  last  through  the  long  gloomy 
months,  became  patterns  for  the  listless  islanders 
who  had  been  influenced  more  by  the  native  popu- 


THE     KINGDOM     OF     GOLD  25 

lation,  than  by  the  habits  of  their  former  Hves.  It 
is  always  an  easy  way  to  fall  into  negligence  and  to 
disregard  civilized  modes  of  living,  and  so  the  mixed 
race  were  deteriorating  rather  than  advancing  when 
the  influences  of  the  Hassens,  Wolfs,  and  their  com- 
panions imbued  new  life  and  energy,  resuscitated 
their  lagging  efforts,  and  established  a  new  order  of 
things. 

John  Hassen  selected  a  wife  among  the  half- 
breeds,  many  of  whom  were  beautiful  brunettes, 
and  she  became  the  mother  of  Nina. 

Jesse's  father,  George  Fleming,  also  came  by 
shipwreck  and  was  cast  upon  the  island  almost  life- 
less. The  little  sandy  beach  where  his  exhausted 
body  first  found  a  resting  place,  was  the  portal  of 
entrance — a  spot  held  dear  in  the  memory  as  the 
gateway  to  rescue  from  death.  Had  he  floated 
either  to  the  right  or  left  of  this  little  stretch  of  sand, 
which  sat  as  a  gem  in  the  rugged  headlands  of  the 
island,  he  would  have  been  dashed  to  pieces  upon 
the  ragged  rocks. 

He  could  in  no  way  account  for  this  apparently 
miraculous  escape;  as  there  was  no  other  spot  for 
miles  where  a  safe  landing  could  be  made,  and  it 
seemed  as  if  the  fragment  of  boat  to  which  he  was 
strapped  had  been  guided  by  the  hand  of  Provi- 
dence into  this  narrow  gateway. 

When  discovered  he  was  limp  and  unconscious 
and  was  carried  up  the  valley,  over  the  hills  into  the 
village,  to  the  home  of  Samuel  Wolf.     It  was  sev- 


26  THE     KINGDOM     OF     GOLD 

eral  days  before  he  was  restored  to  health.  Gentle 
hands  soothed  his  aching  brow  as  he  returned  to 
consciousness,  and  he  became  acquainted  with  the 
lovely  attendant  who  seemed  to  have  raised  him 
from  the  roaring  waves,  and  laid  him  on  the  com- 
fortable cot,  where  every  want  was  being  supplied, 
and  cheery  words  of  hope  brought  back  his  wander- 
ing thoughts  to  normal  action. 

The  natural  sequence  of  this  remarkable  experi- 
ence was  the  marriage  of  George  Fleming  and  Jose- 
phine Wolf.  Young  Fleming  was  born  in  London 
and  had  been  engaged  as  shipping  clerk  in  a  large 
exporting  house.  The  firm  owned  several  vessels 
that  made  regular  trips  to  Australia  and  the  East 
Indies.  Young  Fleming  had  long  desired  to  go  out 
on  an  excursion  and  possibly  make  a  tour  around 
the  world. 

The  sailing  vessel  "Sproutwell"  on  which  he  took 
passage  was  becalmed  in  mid-ocean  and  lay  list- 
lessly floating  with  the  currents  for  weeks.  During 
this  period  the  fresh  water  became  almost  exhausted, 
and  before  proceeding  far  on  their  way,  after  the 
breezes  came,  they  set  up  a  distilling  apparatus  to 
convert  the  salt  water  for  a  supply.  Several  casks 
were  brought  up  out  of  the  hold  and  by  accident 
one  containing  naphtha.  As  the  heads  were  broken 
in  so  that  they  could  be  used  for  holding  sea  water, 
the  naphtha  was  forced  into  the  fire,  and  an  explo- 
sion followed  which  resulted  in  the  burning  of  the 
vessel.     Two  boats  carried  the  crew    and    all    on 


THE     KINGDOM     OF     GOLD  27 

board  and  for  a  few  days  they  managed  to  keep  in 
sight  of  each  other  until  a  storm  came  which  sep- 
arated them  and  resulted  in  the  destruction  of  one 
boat,  with  the  loss  of  all  but  George  Fleming.  The 
other  boat  was  picked  up  by  a  vessel  bound  for 
China  and  ultimately  these  sailors  reached  their 
homes. 

The  Hassen  and  Wolf  families  had  been  estab- 
lished long  enough  to  acquire  considerable  tillable 
land  with  improvements,  and  shortly  after  the  mar- 
riage of  George  Fleming  both  he  and  John  Hassen 
received  substantial  aid  in  the  erection  of  two  cot- 
tages that  were  so  beautifully  located  in  the  little 
valley,  which  terminated  at  the  sandy  beach. 

Here  it  was  that  little  Jesse  Fleming  played  with 
the  waves  that  had  brought  his  father  to  this  lovely 
island.  And  here  might  also  be  seen  Nina  Hassen, 
a  little  dark-eyed  girl,  his  companion  and  playmate. 

In  one  cottage  lived  the  Fleming  family,  which 
also  included  Elnathan  Yardley,  and  in  the  other 
father  and  mother  and  Nina.  This  valley  was  a 
very  attractive  spot  because  of  the  natural  beauties 
surrounding  it,  and  especially  so  to  George  Fleming 
because  of  its  nearness  to  the  beach. 

Previous  to  the  arrival  of  the  Swedes  the  island 
had  been  without  a  form  of  government.  But  very 
soon  after  these  stirring  people  had  established 
homes,  they  organized  a  primitive  form  of  rules  and 
regulations  which  included  records  of  property 
rights,  and  methods  for  united  efforts  for  improve- 


28  THE     KINGDOM     OF     GOLD 

I 

ments  of  roads,  and  for  securing  a  school  where  the 
young  could  be  taught  and  where  the  natives  could 
be  brought  together  for  council.  The  object  being 
to  secure  harmony  by  frequent  consultations  and 
understandings,  so  that  all  innovations  might  be 
known  and  comprehended  before-hand.  In  this  way 
a  new  inspiration  swept  over  the  island,  which  re- 
sulted in  general  improvements. 

News  from  the  outside  world  was  occasionally 
brought  by  the  chance  call  of  vessels  that  visited 
such  islands  to  exchange  commodities.  It  was  us- 
ually very  meagre  and  unsatisfactory  to  such  minds 
as  George  Fleming's,  for  he  had  long  entertained 
a  hope  to  learn  something  about  the  boat  with  the 
body,  or  perhaps  bones,  of  Jesse. 

Whenever  a  vessel  came  to  the  island  he  was  the 
first  to  go  to  it  and  secure  all  the  information  possi- 
ble, especially  such  newspapers  as  might  be  obtain- 
able and  any  intelligence  which  had  been  picked  up 
by  the  sailors. 

About  two  years  after  the  loss  of  Jesse  there  came 
to  the  lonely  fireside  of  the  Fleming  cottage  a  very 
promising  little  successor  who  had  secured  the  name 
of  Howard.  He  had  for  playmate  no  little  one  of 
tender  years,  as  Nina  had  grown  to  be  a  cild  of  ten 
summers  when  Howard  was  announced. 

Nina,  however,  took  great  delight  in  the  "little 
treasure"  and  spent  every  possible  moment,  when 
not  required  elsewhere,  in  tending  baby  and  later  in 
taking  him  down  to  the  litde  beach  where,  in  years 


THE     KINGDOM     OF     GOLD  29 

gone  by,  she  and  Jesse  had  found  so  much  pleasure 
in  the  company  of  their  dear  old  friend  Elnathan 
Yardley. 

Sometimes  she  would  try  to  tell  Howard  about 
those  times,  but  his  youthful  mind  was  hardly  pre- 
pared for  such  information,  or  to  realize  what  it  all 
meant,  especially  as  Nina's  tears  were  wont  to  min- 
gle with  her  words. 

Notwithstanding  the  sunshine  within  and  without 
the  Fleming  cottage,  there  always  rested  a  cloud 
over  and  around  it  which  could  not  be  dissipated. 
Years  of  isolation  from  the  busy  outside  world  grew 
irksome  to  George  Fleming,  and  he  found  his 
thoughts  continually  reverting  to  the  old  time  life  in 
London,  and  the  friends  left  behind. 

The  charms  of  Mystic  Island,  its  lovely  climate, 
his  wife's  kindred,  the  home  and  improvements, 
stood  up  in  protest  against  change  of  any  kind;  but 
an  indescribable  longing,  which  had  its  birth  in  the 
loss  of  Jesse,  drew  him  out  and  away  and  he  was 
wont  to  dwell  in  long  meditation  on  the  past,  and 
the  possibilities  of  the  future.  He  was  inclined  to 
go  over  all  the  events  in  his  life  up  to  the  present 
hour,  and  try  to  fathom  the  causes  which  had 
brought  to  him  such  experiences.  On  such  occasions 
he  would  recall  the  pleasant  associations  with  their 
lost  friend,  Elnathan  Yardley,  who  had  frequently 
discoursed  on  the  subject  of  "Providential  Care'  , 
and  the  "leading"  which  he  believed  comes  to  each 
individual  through  all  the  years  and  experiences  of 


30  THE     KINGDOM     OF     GOLD 

life.  How  he  had  endeavored  to  impress  the  lesson 
that  "God  had  definite  plans  regarding  the  manage- 
ment of  the  various  races  and  nations  of  the  earth, 
which  involve  every  human  soul;"  and  that  "the 
great  duty  of  life  is  to  seek  to  know  and  follow  the 
leadings,  which  are  the  indications  of  the  details  of 
these  plans." 

That  "because  of  man's  finite  nature,  it  is  impos- 
sible for  him  to  understand  these  complicated  mani- 
festations of  infinite  power  and  wisdom;  and  there- 
fore faith  and  trust  are  necessary  to  prevent  errotic 
courses  of  action,  which,  though  they  will  not  pre- 
vent the  accomplishment  of  each  important  part,  yet 
may  lead  the  individual  through  unnecessary  and 
circuitous  experiences  to  the  appointed  way." 

Many  conflicts  arose  between  reason  and  faith; 
and  George  Fleming  was  continually  left  in  the  re- 
gion of  doubt;  not  finding  enough  evidence  to  bring 
conviction  and  not  able  to  disregard  the  promptings 
of  hope ; — now  rising  on  a  billow  of  expectancy,  and 
now  falling  into  a  trough  of  despair!  One  day  al- 
most deciding  to  leave  the  island,  another  day  in- 
clined to  rest  beneath  the  comfortable  shelter  of  the 
cosy  cottage  the  remainder  of  his  days.  Now  ambi- 
tious to  see  more  of  the  great  world  of  which  Mys- 
tic Island  was  as  a  grain  of  sand  by  comparison; 
and  again  thankful  that  he  was  removed  far  from 
the  turmoil  and  strife,  the  attractive  pathways  of 
evil,  the  dangerous  uncertainties  of  life  among  the 


THE     KINGDOM     OF     GOLD  31 

thousands  who  are  forced  to  struggle  and  contend 
for  selfish  ends. 

Small  as  were  the  bounds  of  Mystic  Island,  they 
were  sufficient  to  furnish  all  that  was  required  for 
the  support  of  life,  and  to  bar  the  waves  of  the  sur- 
rounding deep,  and  such  reflections  always  brought 
comfort — comfort  and  consolation. 

At  last  the  spirit  of  unrest  came  so  powerfully 
upon  him,  that  he  decided  to  leave  the  island  the 
first  time  a  vessel  came  that  could  take  him  and  his 
family,  and  to  cast  once  more  his  lot  out  on  the  wide, 
wide  world,  not  knowing  where,  except  that  he 
should,  if  possible,  visit  "old  England"  again. 

As  he  had  frequently  hinted  at  such  a  course,  his 
wife  and  friends  were  in  some  degree  prepared  for 
the  announcement  of  his  intentions;  but  it  brought 
consternation  and  deep  regret  to  the  whole  com- 
munity. Fortunately  Mrs.  Fleming  through  conver- 
sation with  her  husband  and  Elnathan  Yardley,  had 
acquired  much  information  regarding  the  outside 
world,  and  had  at  times  experienced  desires  to  see 
and  learn  more  than  could  be  obtained  in  their  iso- 
lated home. 

The  great  trial  which  came  with  the  loss  of  Jesse 
had  brought  its  resulting  growth  in  submission  and 
prepared  the  way  for  enduring  changes  and  diffi- 
culties. So  trusting  and  hoping,  she  patiently 
awaited  the  event,  which  seemed  almost  as  momen- 
tuous  as  that  great  disaster. 

As  soon  as  the  determinations  of  both  were  an- 


32  THE     KINGDOM     OF     GOLD 

nounced,  the  islanders  accepted  the  inevitable  and 
joined  in  the  necessary  preparations,  which  consisted 
chiefly  in  exchanging  the  home  and  surrounding 
improvements  for  such  articles  as  would  have  value 
elsewhere.  When  all  the  arrangements  had  been 
completed  the  family  spent  the  remaining  time  visit- 
ing with  those  they  were  soon  to  be  separated  from. 

Nina's  father  purchased  the  Fleming  cottage 
which,  by  the  intelligent  efforts  of  George  Fleming, 
had  been  made  more  desirable  than  his  own.  Most 
of  the  furniture  was  also  retained  and  the  books  and 
papers  accumulated  by  the  efforts  to  discover  some 
information  relating  to  Jesse. 

One  pleasant  day  in  the  month  of  June  a  vessel 
stopped  at  the  island  to  barter  with  the  inhabitants. 
It  was  making  a  tour  visiting  several  islands  and  in- 
tending ultimately  to  go  to  Valparaiso.  This  was 
agreeable  news  for  the  Flemings,  as  George  remem- 
bered the  names  of  merchants  there  who  had  deal- 
ings with  the  house  he  had  been  employed  by  in 
London,  and  these  might  render  him  valuable  as- 
sistance in  disposing  of  his  goods  and  obtaining  a 
business  position  which,  on  account  of  his  limited 
means,  was  a  very  important  consideration. 

Rejoicing  at  the  bright  prospect,  they  hastily 
brought  their  effects  to  the  embarking  ground,  where 
nearly  all  the  inhabitants  had  collected  to  bid  them 
farewell.  It  was  a  trying  ordeal  when  they  stepped 
into  the  little  boat  which  took  them  to  the  bark  "Pe- 
tral". 


THE     KINGDOM     OF     GOLD  33 

At  the  side  of  the  ship  sat  the  two  absorbed  souls, 
looking  back  through  tears  at  the  receding  hills,  en- 
deavoring to  comfort  each  other  with  words  of  hope, 
while  little  Howard  ran  to  and  fro  on  the  deck  play- 
ing with  a  kitten  he  found  on  board.  Smaller  and 
more  indistinct  grew  the  little  isle,  and  at  last  the 
high  promontory,  the  sanctuary  where  their  sorrow- 
ing longing  hearts  had  reached  out  over  the  waves 
toward  their  firstborn,  a  hopeless  castaway!  This 
highest  elevation  seemed  to  sink  into  the  great  deep, 
and  nothing  was  left  to  the  outward  view.  But  the 
image  of  Mystic  island  was  indelibly  fixed,  never 
to  be  effaced.  A  moment  would  suffice  to  recall  the 
hills  and  dales,  the  cottages  and  paths,  great  trees, 
and  the  high  promontory.  Never  could  such  scenes 
be  either  forgotten  or  obliterated. 

TTiere  remained  only  the  wide  expanse  of  ocean, 
and  had  not  their  lives  furnished  a  sufficiency  of  such 
views?  Old  ocean  in  all  its  moods  of  storm  and 
calm  was  as  familiar  as  the  landscape  before  their 
cottage  door. 

Several  islands  were  visited  by  the  Petral;  the 
result  often  proving  a  surprise  from  a  business  stand- 
point. The  cargo  secured  proved  to  be  such  as 
would  find  more  ready  sale  in  Sidney  and  the  captain 
decided  to  go  to  that  port  instead  of  Valparaiso. 

On  the  way  to  Australia  the  Flemings  were  en- 
tertained with  scenes  as  gorgeous  and  beautiful  as 
can  be  found  anywhere  in  the  world.  Groups  of 
islands  set  as  jewels  in  the  blue  waves  of  the  sea, 


34  THE     KINGDOM     OF     GOLD 

interesting  villages,  and  many  types  of  people  vary- 
ing in  physical  characteristics  and  dress,  with  cu- 
rious implements  of  war  and  husbandry. 

TTie  world  opened  up  on  a  grand  scale  upon  their 
arrival  at  Sidney  and  Mr.  Fleming  was  soon  at 
home  in  the  city.  He  secured  a  situation  in  the  com- 
mission house  of  Clark  &  Co.,  one  of  the  firms  he 
had  corresponded  with  while  employed  in  the  ship- 
ping house  in  London. 

Clark  &  Co.  had  heard  of  the  destruction  of  the 
"Sproutwell"  which  was  burned  at  sea,  and  had 
concluded  as  nothing  had  been  heard  of  the  second 
boat  which  left  the  ship  that  all  had  perished.  They 
were  very  glad  to  render  Mr.  Fleming  assistance, 
and  promised  to  aid  him  in  returning  to  London  as 
soon  as  he  decided  to  go. 

Mrs.  Fleming  and  Howard  readily  adapted 
themselves  to  city  life,  and  were  pleased  with  the 
change  from  their  former  remote  isolation  to  one 
of  the  active  centres  of  civilized  progress. 

Mr.  Fleming  remained  in  Sidney  for  two  years, 
when  word  came  that  his  brother  Samuel,  who  was 
older  and  who  had  inherited  his  father's  property, 
had  died  and,  being  unmarried,  all  his  estate  had 
been  willed  to  his  brother  George.  Very  soon  after 
the  receipt  of  this  news,  the  family  sailed  for  Lon- 
don, and  Mr.  Fleming  succeeded  to  the  property 
left  by  his  brother,  which  he  converted  into  money 
and  joined  a  firm  of  importers  of  wool.  Their  busi- 
ness was  well  established  and  prosperous  and  the 


THE     KINGDOM     OF     GOLD  35 

Flemings  found  themselves  enjoying  the  privileges 
of  competency.  Howard,  now  thirteen  years  of  age, 
was  being  prepared  for  college. 

Quite  in  contrast  with  these  remarkable  expe- 
riences were  the  events  transpiring  on  Mystic  Island, 
where  George  Fleming  had  been  such  a  conspicuous 
and  important  individual,  upon  whom  they  had  de- 
pended as  leader.  Since  his  departure  they  had  se- 
lected John  Hassen  to  fill  his  place,  as  he  had  lived 
so  near  and  associated  so  intimately  with  Mr.  Flem- 
ing and  with  Elnathan  Yardley,  that  he  had  ac- 
quired considerable  education  through  their  kindly 
efforts.  His  daughter  Nina  had  been  instructed  so 
as  to  be  helpful,  especially  in  matters  requiring  a 
penman.  She  had  been  taught  to  execute  papers  of 
record,  pertaining  to  boundaries  of  lands,  and  trans- 
actions involving  several  persons.  She  had  also  been 
educated  by  her  grandfather  so  that  she  could  read 
the  books  he  had  brought  from  Sweden,  which 
were  saved  with  other  articles  of  value  when  they 
were  wrecked  on  the  southern  shores  of  the  island. 

Under  the  influence  and  the  start  given  by  George 
Fleming  the  island  was  fast  adopting  civilized  ways, 
and  traffic  with  traders  whose  visits  previous  to  these 
changes  had  only  been  by  chance,  was  now  subject 
to  arrangement  by  which  once  in  about  six  months 
they  were  able  to  exchange  their  products  for  such 
articles  as  were  only  obtainable  from  the  centres 
of  trade. 

Six  years  after  the  departure  of  the  Fleming  fam- 


36  THE     KINGDOM     OF     GOLD 

ily  Nina  made  a  discovery  which  created  intense 
excitement,  and  brought  together  all  the  inhabitants 
of  the  island ;  when  she  read  to  them  an  item  of  news 
which  had  been  published  in  a  Swedish  newspaper. 
This  scrap  had  been  found  in  a  package  which 
had  been  secured  by  George  Fleming  during  the 
years  he  was  searching  for  tidings  of  Jesse's  re- 
mains. 

Singular  as  it  seemed,  this  fragment  of  a  news- 
paper, the  only  one  of  its  kind,  soiled  with  tar,  con- 
tained the  mutilated  item  which  Vv^ould  have  glad- 
dened, yet  saddened,  the  hearts  of  the  father  and 
mother  of  Jesse.  Though  coming  within  their  reach 
it  was  doubly  sealed  against  discovery  as  it  was 
printed  in  a  language  Mr.  Fleming  could  not  read, 
and  so  besmeared  as  to  be  uninviting.  He  had, 
however,  retained  it  with  the  others,  and  Nina's 
eager  search  after  knowledge  led  her  to  examine 
every  item  as  she  became  acquainted  with  the  various 
phases  of  life  depicted  in  the  miscellaneous  collec- 
tion. 

Horrible  indeed  were  many  of  the  narratives,  and 
quite  beyond  her  comprehension  many  articles  on 
science,  art,  and  religion.  One  day  she  espied  the 
little  soiled  sheet  in  Swedish,  and  now  she  read  and 
translated  it  to  the  astonished  multitude. 

"Arrival  of  the  ship  South  Sea,  after  a  long  and 
tedious  voyage  among  the  islands  of  the  Pacific 
ocean.  One  very  interesting  passenger  is  a  little  boy 
about  eight  years  old,  who  was  found  floating  in  a 


THE     KINGDOM     OF     GOLD  37 

boat  in  longitude  146:  20  min.  west;  latitude  6 
south. 

"The  boy  is  blind  and  dumb;  his  clothing  identi- 
fied him  as  belonging  to  some  island  inhabited  by 
Europeans.  The  boy  was  lying  on  a  bed  made  with 
part  of  a  sail,  and  covered  with  a  man's  coat."  At 
this  point  the  paper  was  torn  and  a  small  piece  was 
missing.  The  remainder  of  the  item  was  " — rove 
who  was  a  passenger  on  the  'South  Sea'  took  great 
interest  in  the  child  and  has  adopted  him  as  a  son, 
and  taken  him  to  England." 

The  small  portion  which  was  wanted  contained 
the  most  important  part  of  the  desired  information; 
the  remainder  of  the  name  of  the  person  who  had 
adopted  Jesse.  The  paper  bore  no  name;  but  the 
date  was  either  January  or  February,  the  last  sylla- 
ble of  the  month  being  all  that  could  be  deciphered. 

The  reading  created  intense  excitement,  and  many 
opinions  were  expressed  as  to  the  probabilities  of 
Jesse's  discovery.  A  m^eeting  was  organized  to  con- 
sider what  should  be  done,  and  resulted  in  having 
Nina  prepare  several  letters  addressed  to  Valparaiso 
and  other  postmasters  in  South  American  ports  re- 
questing wide  advertisement  of  the  news,  that  the 
Flemings  might  be  informed  of  Jesse's  discovery. 

Other  letters  were  sent  to  London  and  Stock- 
holm, asking  that  any  information  relating  to  the 
boy  might  be  forwarded  to  the  island,  and  that  ad- 
vertisement be  made  for  George  Fleming.     The  first 


38  THE     KINGDOM     OF     GOLD 

vessels  to  call  after  these  letters  had  been  prepared, 
was  the  "John  Henderson"  on  the  way  to  Hawaii, 
and  it  took  this  important  mail. 


THE     KINGDOM     OF     GOLD  39 


CHAPTER  IV. 

THE  FLEMING  FAMILY  IN  LONDON.  JESSE  SEEN 
BUT  NOT  RECOGNIZED 

Life  in  London  afforded  opportunities  for  recrea- 
tion and  entertainment,  and  the  Flemings  keenly  rel- 
ished many  things  which  were  commonplace.  They 
were  not,  however,  restricted  by  the  opinions  and 
practices  of  others ;  but  sought  for  what  they  thought 
they  wanted,  with  a  freedom  which  ignored  social 
restraint.  They  had  dwelt  for  years  in  communion 
with  nature,  and  had  been  imbued  from  the  broad 
unbounded  views  which  surrounded  Mystic  Island, 
with  a  freedom  of  thinking  that  had  never  been  re- 
stricted, by  dogmatic  instruction,  to  any  particular 
realm. 

Their  tastes  were  as  pure  and  natural  as  the  at- 
mosphere of  their  tropical  home,  and,  following  the 
inclinations  of  their  own  minds,  they  were  rapidly 
acquiring  a  knowledge  of  those  things  which  are 
most  interesting  as  throwing  light  upon  "what  man 
is,  and  was,  and  will  be."     Following  in  this  line 


40  THE     KINGDOM     OF     GOLD 

of  investigation  they  were  led  to  attend  a  meeting 
where  exhibitions  of  hypnotism  were  being  presented. 

Many  and  curious  were  the  actions  and  apparent 
experiences  of  the  subjects,  and  they  became  so  in- 
tensely interested  that  they  allowed  Professor 
Greatwell  to  try  Howard,  who  proved  an  excel- 
lent subject,  and  furnished  much  amusement  for 
all  present,  and  especial  gratification  to  the  parents, 
who  felt  certain  there  were  no  deceptions  in  the 
performances  of  their  son.  The  most  remarkable 
subject  of  the  evening  was  a  blind  mute  by  the 
name  of  George  Cosgrove. 

The  professor  simply  said  in  introducing  him, 
that  the  young  man  could  not  utter  a  word  in  his 
normal  state;  but  that  while  hypnotized  he  would 
repeat  the  thoughts  which  the  professor  impressed 
upon  his  mind.  As  a  test  of  this  statement  he  had 
George  retire,  and  the  audience  selected  a  commit- 
tee who  formulated  several  disconnected  sentences, 
wrote  the  words,  and  handed  them  to  the  professor, 
who  laid  his  hand  on  George's  shoulder,  and  willed 
him  to  repeat  the  words,  which  he  did  correctly. 

While  the  preparations  were  being  made  for  a 
second  trial  Howard  was  invited  to  the  platform 
and  the  professor  experimented  with  him,  and,  hav- 
ing succeeded,  he  told  him  to  stand  while  the  second 
test  was  being  made  with  George  Cosgrove. 

Words  were  repeated  in  like  manner  as  on  the 
first  occasion,  and  to  the  satisfaction  of  the  commit- 
tees.   Then  the  professor  asked  Howard  to  advance 


THE     KINGDOM     OF     GOLD  41 

and  take  the  hand  of  George,  and  as  he  did  so, 
George,  turning  so  that  he  faced  the  parents,  said 
"Howard,  Father,  Mother!"  The  professor  ad- 
vanced quickly  and  said,  "This  is  the  first  time  this 
young  man  has  ever  spoken  a  word  except  it  were 
one  I  had  impressed  on  his  mind;  but,"  he  contin- 
ued, "he  seems  to  be  able  to  read  the  mind  of  this 
young  lad,  and  to  know  and  apparently  see  the 
boy's  father  and  mother.  He  undoubtedly  gets  the 
impression  from  the  boy,  as  he  is  totally  blind  and 
dumb  I  assure  you." 

Oh !  marvelous  revelation ! !  Had  the  parents  ears 
that  could  hear,  or  eyes  that  could  see?  for  there  be- 
fore them  stood  the  long  lost  Jesse!  He  had  ap- 
parently without  eyes  seen  them,  but  they  who  were 
not  blind  could  not  recognize  him !  Jesse,  Howard, 
Father,  Mother!  How  easy  to  understand  if  only 
the  veil  had  been  lifted!  Sometimes  it  is  best  that 
we  do  not  see,  that  a  mist  enshrouds  the  object  near- 
est and  dearest  our  hearts'  desires. 

In  his  normal  state  George  Cosgrove  seemed  to 
realize  nothing  of  the  wonderful  experiences  of  that 
eventful  evening,  and  the  father  and  mother  were 
no  more  surprised  by  his  utterances  than  other  ob- 
servers. But  Professor  Greatwell  was  greatly  stirred 
by  the  event,  realizing  that  he  had  discovered  a  new 
phase  of  the  mysterious  manifestations  of  hypnotic 
influences,  and  he  immediately  laid  plans  for  testing 
the  power  of  other  minds  than  of  the  operator  on 
the  hypnotized  subject. 


42  THE     KINGDOM     OF     GOLD 

Henry  Cosgrove,  the  foster  father  of  George,  was 
a  gentleman  of  leisure,  who  had  become  deeply  in- 
terested in  hypnotism.  He  had  attended  several 
meetings  which  were  conducted  by  Professor  Great- 
well  and  had  invited  that  gentleman  to  his  house 
that  they  might  have  a  confidential  talk  on  the  sub- 
ject. 

Among  other  interesting  incidents  the  professor 
related  an  experience  made  upon  a  deaf  mute  which 
resulted  very  unsatisfactorily,  but  he  attributed  fail- 
ure to  not  being  able  to  converse  with  the  subject  ex- 
cept through  an  assistant. 

At  this  point  Mr.  Cosgrove  suggested  that  a  trial 
be  made  with  George  to  determine  if  he  were  a  sub- 
ject, and  if  he  could  be  made  to  speak.  It  seemed 
an  absurd  thing  to  try,  but  the  thought  had  occurred 
to  him  that  it  was  possible. 

Professor  Greatwell  was  pleased  with  the  sug- 
gestion and  George  was  soon  brought  to  the  library 
where  the  experiment  was  undertaken.  They  were 
greatly  surprised  and  delighted  to  find  him  remark- 
ably sensitive,  and  later,  to  their  utter  astonishment, 
he  repeated  words  uttered  by  Professor  Greatwell 
while  he  held  George's  hands  and  willed  him  to  do 
so.  He  found  when  there  was  no  physical  contact 
there  was  no  response,  but  that  while  he  held  his 
hand,  or  touched  with  pressure  against  his  clothing, 
the  answers  were  as  prompt  as  if  George  had  heard 
every  word. 

George  had  been  educated  so  as  to  converse  with 


THE     KINGDOM     OF     GOLD  43 

Mr.  Cosgrove  by  a  system  of  signs  by  touch,  and  in 
answer  to  questions  replied  that  he  knew  nothing  of 
the  words  which  he  was  informed  had  been  spoken 
by  Professor  Greatwell,  nor  did  he  reahze  that  he 
had  repeated  them.  The  professor  asked  that  George 
might  be  exhibited  at  his  next  meeting  and  Mr.  Cos- 
grove  assented.  The  meeting  with  his  brother  was 
the  resuh. 

After  observing  the  mysterious  powers  of  other 
minds  over  George  as  shown  when  Howard  Fleming 
held  his  hand,  Mr.  Cosgrove  decided  to  continue  his 
experiments.  He  expected  to  go  to  New  York  in  a 
few  months  and  visit  a  friend  who  had  devoted  much 
time  to  this  and  kindred  subjects,  and  there  he 
thought  would  be  a  proper  place  to  conduct  such 
operations. 


44  THE     KINGDOM     OF     GOLD 


CHAPTER  V. 

NINA  HASSEN  STARTS  FROM  MYSTIC  ISLAND  IN 
SEARCH  OF  JESSE 

So  the  months  and  finally  years  passed  without 
any  reply  to  the  numerous  letters  sent  out  via  Ha- 
waii, and  the  inhabitants  of  Mystic  Island  con- 
cluded that  the  vessel  must  have  met  with  some 
disaster,  or  that  the  outside  world  were  very  indif- 
ferent to  their  urgent  calls  for  help.  They  could 
not  believe  that  the  several  official  persons  addressed 
could  disregard  their  inquiries,  and  decided  that  the 
vessel  and  mail  must  have  been  lost. 

Meantime  their  anxiety  grew  in  intensity,  and  of 
all  the  friends  of  the  Flemings  none  seemed  so  deep- 
ly concerned  as  Nina,  who  was  constantly  devising 
some  plan  for  the  discovery  of  Jesse.  She  wanted 
her  father  or  some  other  person  to  take  a  voyage  to 
Sweden  or  England,  or  wherever  it  was  found  neces- 
sary to  go.  She  never  looked  upon  such  an  under- 
taking as  involving  any  danger.  It  was  simply  the 
separation  from  home  that  was  to  be  considered. 


THE     KINGDOM     OF     GOLD  45 

Hie  dangers  of  the  sea  were  comparatively  nothing. 
Had  not  the  Captain  of  the  "Sea  Foam"  followed 
the  seas  all  his  life  and  only  recently  visited  the 
island  in  his  eighty-fifth  year?  No,  she  would  not 
fear  the  ocean,  and  if  she  were  a  man  would  soon  be 
on  the  way  to  Sweden. 

If  Jesse  could  be  found  the  Flemings  might  all 
come  back  to  Mystic  Island  again.  Nina  was  con- 
stantly seeking  for  some  one  to  volunteer  to  go.  Her 
father  and  others  had  admitted  that  arrangements 
could  be  made  to  furnish  all  the  necessary  funds  to 
take  one  around  the  world  if  necessary,  but  the 
courageous  man  was  wanting. 

At  one  of  the  public  meetings  held  in  the  school- 
house  a  Mr.  Gray,  who  had  recently  come  to  the 
island  from  a  neighboring  group,  related  an  incident 
v/hich  occurred  there.  A  woman  by  the  name  of 
Mace  had  come  alone  all  the  way  from  England  in 
search  of  her  husband,  whom  she  found.  He  was 
endeavoring  to  escape  from  her,  but  she  had  traced 
him  from  place  to  place. 

"That  was  a  brave  woman,"  said  Alonzo  Par- 
sons, "such  as  Nina  would  be  if  she  should  go  to 
find  Jesse." 

That  suggestion  was  sufficient  for  Nina!  Not  a 
day  or  hour  should  be  lost  that  could  be  utilized  in 
preparing  for  what  was  clearly  her  duty,  nothing 
should  prevent  her  from  going  unless  some  other 
started. 

At  first  her  intentions  alarmed  her  parents  and 


46  THE     KINGDOM     OF     GOLD 

Mr.  Parsons  was  criticised  for  making  such  a  sug- 
gestion; but  Nina's  persistency  and  constant  discus- 
cussion  of  the  subject  eventually  brought  many  to 
her  way  of  thinking. 

The  first  vessel  which  came  to  the  island  after  this 
event  was  the  "Coral"  manned  by  Captain  Adams. 
The  delight  of  Nina  knew  no  bounds  when  it  was 
noised  about  that  the  Captain's  v/ife  accompanied 
him.  She  immediately  prepared  to  visit  the  vessel, 
and  as  soon  as  she  had  been  introduced  to  Mrs. 
Adams  she  related  the  loss  of  Jesse  Fleming  and 
read  to  her  the  item  oi  news  which  had  been  dis- 
covered so  many  years  after  the  accident. 

Mrs.  Adams  became  deeply  interested,  and  when 
Nina  revealed  her  plan  of  going  alone  to  search  for 
him,  she  told  Nina  that  when  a  woman  started  on 
such  an  errand  everybody  took  an  interest  in  her 
work,  and  was  eager  to  assist  as  far  as  possible  all 
her  efforts.  While  if  it  were  a  man  he  would  have 
to  depend  almost  entirely  on  his  ability.  The  nov- 
elty would  attract  widespread  attention,  and  the 
news  of  her  journey  and  purpose  would  travel  faster 
than  she  could  and  people  all  over  the  world  would 
become  interested  and  aid  in  the  discovery  of  the  lost 
boy. 

Such  words  of  encouragement  were  as  an  oasis  in 
the  desert  of  opposition  Nina  had  contended  with, 
and  brought  tears  of  gratitude  to  her  eyes.  She 
could  now  return  to  the  shore  with  an  assurance 
that  when  Mrs.  Adams  words  had  been  reported  to 


THE     KINGDOM     OF     GOLD 


47 


her  family  and  friends,  all  opposition  would  cease 
and  she  could  immediately  prepare  to  sail  by  the 
Coral. 

The  vessel  was  on  the  way  to  Melbourne,  but 
would  stop  at  several  intermediate  islands. 

The  views  of  Mrs.  Adams  were  accepted  by 
Nina's  parents  and  others,  who,  although  they  pre- 
viously consented  to  her  departure,  entertained  many 
misgivings  as  to  the  propriety  of  the  act.  Now  she 
should  go  forth  with  their  unreserved  approval  and 
belief  that  she,  if  any  one,  would  succeed  in  findmg 
Jesse. 

No  event  since  the  discovery  of  the  item  of  news 
about  the  lost  boy  had  so  stirred  the  inhabitants  as, 
when  on  the  following  day,  the  little  boat  containmg 
Nina,  her  father  and  mother  pushed  away  from  the 
shore.  Almost  every  person  on  the  island  was 
there  to  bid  Godspeed,  and  prayers  were  offered 
for  her  safety  and  success  in  finding  Jesse. 

So  intent  upon  her  purpose  was  Nina  as  the  vessel 
sailed  away,  that  so  soon  as  it  was  out  of  the  Hne 
of  vision  of  friends  on  the  shore,  her  thoughts  were 
carrying  her  eyes  to  the  "world's  ends"  and  before 
she  was  aware  of  the  passing  time,  the  island  had 
entirely  disappeared  from  view.  She  awoke  from 
her  reveries  in  a  new  world;  and  when  she  tried  to 
recall  the  departure,  the  last  object  which  impressed 
her  was  the  white  handkerchief  held  in  the  hand  of 
her  mother,  as  she  sat  in  the  little  boat  watching  the 
vanishing  form  of  the  vessel  which  was  bearing  away 


48  THE     KINGDOM     OF     GOLD 

her  darling  child.  Mother!  was  the  last  image 
that  had  reached  out  over  the  waves  and  impressed 
itself  so  deeply  upon  the  mind  of  Nina.  And  that 
dear  hand,  holding  the  emblem  of  purity  and  peace 
will  continue  to  flit  before  the  vision,  and  whenever 
there  comes  an  ordeal  of  trial,  the  weary  thoughts 
will  fly  back  to  this  object  as  an  ark  of  safety  to  find 
rest. 

Strong  and  courageous  as  Nina  was  there  were 
limits  to  her  powers  of  endurance.  She  had  now 
reached  the  boundary  line  between  hope  and  doubt 
without  realizing  her  perilous  situation.  For  the 
first  time  there  arose  distracting  thoughts  of  leaving 
the  beautiful  island,  perhaps  never  to  return;  of 
home,  kindred,  whose  eyes  might  never  again  behold 
her;  of  the  mother's  sweet  voice  she  might  rever 
again  hear;  of  the  father's  strong  arm  which  might 
never  again  encircle  her.  All  the  dear  friends ;  Oh ! 
how  they  seemed  to  crowd  around  as  if  present  on 
the  vessel  with  her!  And  then  the  devoted  animals, 
the  trees  and  hills,  what  if  she  should  never  go  back 
to  them?  Oh,  it  was  a  dreadful  thought!  And 
when  the  brave  mind  gave  way  under  the  heavy 
burden  she  was  thrown  into  a  convulsion  of  grief. 

Mrs.  Adams,  who  had  been  sitting  near  and  had 
noticed  how  Nina  suddenly  became  absorbed,  look- 
ing back  toward  the  now  invisible  isle,  was  quickly 
at  her  side  and  endeavored  to  calm  her  thoughts, 
to  tell  her  that  such  feelings  v/ere  common  to  all  voy- 
agers, that  they  would  soon  pass  away,  and  that  she 


THE     KINGDOM     OF    GOLD  49 

must  not  allow  her  mind  to  dwell  on  things  behind, 
but  to  look  ahead  for  what  the  future  held  out  for 
her. 

"Think  of  the  poor  lost  boy  without  father  or 
mother ;  and  of  the  sorrows  of  the  father  and  mother 
longing  in  vain  for  some  tidings  from  him,  and  then 
think  that  you  may  carry  that  joyous  news  to  them." 

The  efforts  of  Mrs.  Adams  were  rewarded  with 
a  measure  of  success  and  Nina  exerted  all  the  power 
she  possessed  to  brave  the  tide  of  emotion  which 
threatened  to  cast  her  down  into  utter  despair.  But 
the  fall  had  been  from  too  high  a  pinnacle.  Time 
alone  could  heal  the  bruised  spirit  and  restore  the 
mind  to  equilibrium. 

Through  the  kindly  diversions  of  Mrs.  Adams  she 
was  led  into  new  channels  of  thought,  but  it  was 
only  superficial  attention  that  Nina  gave  to  all  that 
was  said.  The  depths  of  her  mind  had  been  stirred 
and  would  not  settle  into  repose.  And  now  a  new 
trouble  was  imminent;  seasickness  was  added  to 
homesickness,  and  Nina  was  obliged  to  retire  to  the 
cabin  where  she  remained  for  several  days. 

Once  on  the  road  to  health  under  the  kind  minis- 
trations of  Mrs.  Adams,  Nina  gained  rapidly,  and 
was  soon  her  real  self  again,  brave  and  hopeful. 

Mrs.  Adams,  in  the  interval  of  Nina's  illness, 
had  thought  out  plans  which  she  explained  at  the 
first  opportunity,  when  Nina  showed  renewed  inter- 
est in  Jesse.  TTiese  were  to  get  some  important  ship- 
ping house  or  banker  in  Melbourne  to  aid,  by  fur- 


50  THE     KINGDOM     OF     GOLD 

nishing  Nina  with  letters  of  introduction  which  she 
might  use  if  required,  and  also  to  take  her  money 
and  issue  letters  of  credit  available  in  London  and 
Stockholm.  Also  to  endeavor  to  interest  them  in 
making  efforts  to  discover  the  boy  by  circulating 
news  regarding  him,  and  by  asking  the  public  prints 
to  lend  their  aid. 

As  Mrs.  Adams  elaborated  the  details  of  her 
scheme  Nina  joined  in  with  numerous  suggestions 
which  indicated  her  ability  to  proceed  with  the  exe- 
cution of  the  work. 


THE     KINGDOM     OF     GOLD  51 


CHAPTER  VI. 

MYSTERIOUS  DREAMS;  DEATH  OF  GEORGE  FLEMING 

After  the  remarkable  events  of  the  evening  at 
Professor  Greatwell's  lecture,  the  Fleming  family 
returned  to  their  home  and  retired  for  the  night,  but 
not  to  slumbers  sweet  or  restful.  Shortly  after  going 
to  bed  Mrs.  Fleming  suddenly  awoke  from  a  start- 
ling dream  in  which  she  saw  two  faces,  the  one  larger 
than  the  other,  but  both  seeming  to  belong  to  the 
same  person;  only  that  the  smaller  seemed  to  be  in- 
side the  larger.  The  smaller  one  was  that  of  her 
lost  Jesse,  and  the  larger  the  hypnotic  subject  of  the 
previous  evening — George  Cosgrove.  So  vivid  was 
the  impression  made  on  her  mind,  bringing  back 
thoughts  of  the  sweet  little  boy  floating  away  over 
the  restless  waves,  that  all  tendency  to  sleep  vanished, 
and  she  tossed  uneasilys  through  the  whole  night. 

The  following  days  were  full  of  anxiety,  and 
Mrs.  Fleming  became  so  nervous  as  to  require  the 
administration  of  powerful  medicines  to  produce 
sleep,  and  with  slumber  came  the  startling  dreams. 
She  constantly  failed  in  strength,  until  her  condition 


52  THE     KINGDOM     OF    GOLD 

became  so  alarming  that  her  physician  advised  a 
trip  to  Italy,  where  he  hoped  climatic  influences 
might  do  what  medicine  failed  to  accompHsh. 

As  Mr.  Fleming's  business  engagements  required 
his  personal  presence,  it  was  arranged  that  Mrs. 
Fleming  should  be  accompanied  by  her  nurse,  Mrs. 
Elsie,  Howard,  and  her  physician. 

The  effect  of  the  balmy  air  and  sunny  skies  of 
Italy  brought  relaxation  and  relief.  Not  since  the 
departure  from  Mystic  Island  had  her  nervous  sys- 
tem been  so  composedly  restful.  Yet  never  did  her 
eyes  close  in  sleep,  but  sooner  or  later,  she  awoke 
with  that  same  vision  before  her,  until  it  became  al- 
most impossible  for  her  to  separate  the  two  faces, 
when  the  mind's  eye  was  diverted  to  the  double  ob- 
ject. The  two  seemed  as  one,  and  yet  she  realized 
there  were  two. 

Mrs.  Fleming  had  been  greatly  benefitted  in 
health  when  news  of  her  husband's  sudden  death, 
caused  by  a  railway  accident,  brought  her  hastily 
back  to  London.  In  deep  sorrow  she  saw  the  re- 
mains of  her  faithful  and  devoted  companion  de- 
posited in  the  graveyard  at  Ipswich,  the  home  of  his 
ancestors,  and  in  the  same  plot  where  rested  the 
mortal  parts  of  his  father,  mother  and  brother.  He 
was  the  last  of  his  family. 

Back  again  in  London,  the  nightly  visions  in- 
creased in  number,  and  these  frequent  disturbances 
added  to  the  great  bereavement  were  again  under- 
mining Mrs.  Fleming's  health.     In  the  lonely  state 


THE     KINGDOM     OF     GOLD  53 

of  widowhood,  without  a  relative  to  offer  consola- 
tion or  sympathy,  the  burdens  of  hfe  seemed  too 
great  to  bear.  She  felt  comfortless  and  had  an  in- 
tense longing  to  go  back  to  Mystic  Island,  there  to 
dwell  in  its  quiet  vales  with  kindred  and  friends. 

All  remedial  efforts  having  failed  to  bring  relief, 
her  physician  became  so  alarmed  at  her  critical  con- 
dition that  he  consented  to  her  going,  believing  it  was 
the  only  hope  left  open  for  her. 

Mrs.  Elsie,  who  had  continued  with  her  since 
the  return  from  Italy,  consented  to  accompany  Mrs. 
Fleming  and  Howard.  After  unsuccessful  search 
for  a  suitable  vessel  going  direct  to  some  island  in 
the  south  Seas,  it  was  decided  that  they  take  a 
steamer  via  New  York  and  thence  via  Panama.  Ar- 
rangements were  made  to  go  by  the  first  steamer 
leaving,  as  matters  pertaining  to  the  affairs  of  the 
estate  of  her  husband  had  been  arranged.  His  exec- 
utor was  to  conduct  the  business  and  a  yearly  in- 
come of  two  thousand  pounds  was  guaranteed  to 
Mrs.  Fleming,  subject  to  draft  through  any  banking 
house  available  in  the  vicinity  of  her  home. 

When  the  hour  of  departure  came  Mrs.  Fleming 
was  so  feeble  that  she  was  taken  to  the  steamer  with 
difficulty,  and  placed  in  charge  of  an  attendant  phys- 
ician. 

Among  the  Hst  of  passengers  the  names  of  Mr. 
Henry  Cosgrove  and  son  George  were  to  be  found, 
but  Mrs.  Fleming  confined  entirely  to  her  bed  was 
too  feeble  to  be  interested  in  her  fellow-passengers. 


54  THE     KINGDOM    OF    GOLD 

The  weather  was  unusually  rough  for  three  days, 
but  on  the  fourth  the  sea  settled  down  to  compara- 
tive quiet,  and  all  was  animation  where  before  so 
little  movement  had  been  observable.  Now  the 
decks  were  crowded  with  a  happy  throng,  moving 
slowly  to  and  fro,  enjoying  the  refreshing  sunshine 
and  exhilerating  air.  Mr.  Cosgrove  and  George 
were  attracting  much  attention.  Howard,  too,  had 
ascended  to  the  deck.  He  was  drawn  by  the  fa- 
miliar face,  and  without  thinking  of  the  sorrow  and 
trouble  the  former  meeting  had  occasioned,  advanced 
and  spoke  to  Mr.  Cosgrove,  and  studied  the  face  of 
George,  while  Mr.  Cosgrove  referred  to  the  re- 
markable events  of  that  evening.  He  invited  How- 
ard to  sit  by  the  side  of  the  vessel  where  he  talked 
with  the  youth  about  his  life  in  London. 

Howard  was  very  careful  not  to  mention  the  ex- 
periences of  his  mother,  fearing  it  might  prove  un 
pleasant  news.  He  simply  said  in  reply  to  Mr.  Cos- 
grove's  questions,  that  his  father  was  dead  and  that 
his  mother  was  ill,  and  that  they  were  on  their  way 
to  their  former  home.  As  the  youth  seemed  quite 
sad,  Mr.  Cosgrove  turned  the  conversation  to  other 
things,  and  did  not  inquire  where  their  former  home 
had  been. 

As  soon  as  Howard  could  withdraw  without 
seeming  rudeness,  he  begged  to  be  excused,  and  hur- 
ried to  his  mother  to  tell  her  whom  he  had  met,  and 
how  pleased  he  was  with  the  pleasant  face  of  the 
mute,  George  Cosgrove,  and  to  suggest  if  she  could 


THE     KINGDOM     OF     GOLD  55 

see  him  again,  she  might  get  rid  of  those  horrible 
dreams. 

His  mother  was  gready  agitated  upon  hearing  of 
the  presence  of  George  Cosgrove  on  the  vessel,  and 
for  a  while  Howard  feared  he  had  done  his  mother 
great  injury  by  informing  her.  Mrs.  Fleming  re- 
quested him  to  go  again  and  look  at  the  face  of 
George,  and  wait  two  hours  and  then  come  to  her 
again. 

Howard  sought  out  the  Cosgroves,  and  found 
them  walking  up  and  down  the  deck  that  George 
might  have  needed  exercise,  as,  during  the  previous 
days,  he  had  been  confined  entirely  to  the  crowded 
limits  of  the  small  stateroom.  When  Howard  met 
them  Mr.  Cosgrove  said,  "Won't  you  walk  with 
us?  I  will  tell  George  that  you  have  seen  him  be- 
fore at  Professor  Greatwell's  lecture,  and  that  you 
wish  to  make  his  acquaintance. 

Just  how  he  conveyed  the  words  to  George,  How- 
ard could  not  detect,  but  George  extended  his  hand 
and  bowed  his  head  in  recognition  and  they  were 
soon  walking  side  by  side.  Mr.  Cosgrove  acted  as 
interpreter,  and  they  were  thus  enabled  to  exchange 
a  few  commonplace  remarks,  about  the  ship,  the 
ocean,  their  food,  and  how  they  slept. 

Presently  Howard  noticed  a  man  approaching 
who  addressed  Mr.  Cosgrove.  He  desired  to  talk 
with  him  regarding  a  proposed  meeting  to  be  held  in 
the  cabin  on  the  following  day.  Mr.  Cosgrove 
asked  Howard  if  he  would  remain  with  George 


56  THE     KINGDOM     OF     GOLD 

while  he  accompanied  the  gentleman.  Howard  con- 
sented, and  Mr.  Cosgrove  informed  George  of  the 
arrangement,  and  the  two  were  left  walking  up  and 
down  the  deck. 

Barely  had  Mr.  Cosgrove  and  his  companion 
stepped  into  the  cabin  when  it  was  noised  about  that 
a  steamer,  probably  one  going  from  New  York  to 
Liverpool,  was  sighted  almost  directly  ahead,  and 
that  in  a  few  minutes  the  vessels  would  be  passing  in 
midocean.  Howard  felt  exceedingly  anxious  to  in- 
form his  mother  of  the  event,  thinking  if  she  could 
see  the  ship  it  might  afford  her  much  pleasure.  But 
how  could  he  leave  George? 

Passengers  were  rushing  to  and  fro  to  notify 
friends  and  Howard  became  alarmed  lest  George 
should  become  excited,  and  decided  to  find  a  seat 
where  the  father  would  be  most  likely  to  come  to 
look  for  them.  When  they  reached  the  selected 
place  he  tried  to  make  George  understand  by  pulling 
him  to  one  side,  guiding  his  hand  to  the  back  of  a 
chair  and,  to  his  great  delight,  he  was  immediately 
successful.  Side  by  side  they  sat,  one  in  a  world  of 
silence  and  utter  darkness,  the  other  beneath  the 
blue  vault  of  the  heavens,  lustrous  with  the  effulgent 
light.  Faces  radiant  with  animation  were  on  every 
side,  and  voices  responsive  enlivening  the  joyous 
throng. 

The  ships  were  soon  almost  abreast,  and  How- 
ard standing  on  his  chair  was  able  to  see  the  magnifi- 
cent steamer  forging  ahead  as  if  some  great  levia- 


THE     KINGDOM     OF    GOLD  57 

than  imbued  with  powers  of  thought  and  action,  as 
if  intent  on  some  important  purpose,  rushing  on  to 
its  accompHshment. 

It  was  a  sight  never  to  be  forgotten  which  stirred 
all  the  powers  of  the  mind  into  intense  emotion, — 
the  grandeur,  beauty,  power,  motion,  each  incom- 
prehensible, but  so  absorbing.  Howard  sunk  me- 
chanically into  his  chair,  while  his  mind  floated 
along  after  the  beautiful  receding  object.  As  soon 
as  his  hand  touched  George  he  exclaimed,  "Oh, 
how  I  wish  he  could  see  that  ship!"  Immediately 
George  repeated,  "Oh  how  I  wish  he  could  see  that 
ship!" 

That  utterance  attracted  the  attention  of  a  lady 
standing  beside  them  who  immediately  said,  "It  is 
not  too  late;  let  the  young  man  stand  in  my  chair," 
and  she  pushed  her  chair  toward  Howard,  the  per- 
son she  supposed  the  blind  man  had  expressed  the 
wish  for. 

"I  thank  you,"  Howard  repHed;  "I  have  seen 
the  ship;  he  did  not  realize  it." 

Then  addressing  George  the  lady  said,  "Your 
brother  has  seen  the  boat;  you  are  glad,  I  know,  I 
wish  you  too  could  have  seen  such  a  beautiful  sight. 
Have  you  always  been  blind?" 

No  reply  was  made  by  either  as  Howard  feared 
to  undertake  to  explain  why  George  did  not  answer 
these  kind  words. 

Mr.  Cosgrove  hearing  that  a  vessel  was  passing, 
and  noticing  the  commotion,  hastened   to  George 


58  THE     KINGDOM     OF     GOLD 

and  Howard,  fearing  his  son  might  have  become 
frightened  by  the  passing  crowd;  and,  thanking 
Howard  for  his  kind  attention,  took  George's  hand 
again  to  give  him  the  assurance  he  thought  he  might 
require. 

Howard,  glad  of  a  chance  to  return  to  his  mother, 
hastened  away,  while  Mr.  Cosgrove  informed 
George  of  the  cause  of  the  excitement. 

When  Howard  returned  he  found  Mrs.  Flem- 
ing out  of  bed,  and  reclining  on  the  sofa.  By  the 
cheerful  expression  which  Mrs.  Elsie  gave  in  answer 
to  his  anxious  look  of  solicitude,  he  saw  that  a  great 
and  favorable  change  had  come  to  his  mother.  He 
did  not  question  her,  but  noticed  beneath  the  appar- 
ent calm  that  overspread  her  brow,  there  was  an  in- 
tense yearning,  which  manifested  itself. 

He  immediately  related  what  had  occurred  dur- 
ing his  absence,  and  again  described  the  quiet  expres- 
sion which,  as  a  halo,  illuminated  the  pale,  pleasant 
features  of  George  Cosgrove.  He  assured  his  mother 
she  could  but  be  comforted  and  benefitted  by  behold- 
ing that  bright  face.  He  suggested  that  Mr.  Cos- 
grove would  undoubtedly  be  pleased  to  bring  his 
son  to  see  her. 

Mrs.  Fleming  could  not  consent  to  such  an  ar- 
rangement, but  thought,  as  he  had  allowed  Howard 
to  walk  about  the  deck  with  the  young  man,  he 
would  be  willing  to  have  him  lead  the  blind  young 
man  to  her  room. 

Howard    approached    the    Cosgroves    about    an 


THE     KINGDOM     OF     GOLD  59 

hour  after  this  conversation  and  asked  if  he  might 
be  allowed,  sometime,  to  take  George  to  his  mother, 
that  she  might  see  him  again.  Mr.  Cosgrove  said  he 
might  go  immediately  if  it  would  be  agreeable  to  his 
mother,  and  as  Howard  assented  to  that  proposi- 
tion Mr.  Cosgrove  informed  George  that  he  was 
going  to  call  on  a  lady,  Mrs.  Fleming,  Howard's 
mother,  who  had  seen  him  at  Professor  Greatwell's 
lecture,  in  London,  and  he  placed  George's  hand  in 
Howard's  and  they  were  soon  at  the  door  of  the 
room. 

Mrs.  Elsie  had  assisted  Mrs.  Fleming  to  rise  and 
dress  that  she  might  feel  presentable  if,  by  any 
chance,  Mr.  Cosgrove  should  accompany  his  son. 
She  was  seated  directly  opposite  the  door  when  it 
was  opened,  and  Howard  said, 

"Mother,  this  is  Mr.  George  Cosgrove." 

"Mother,  this  is  Mr.  George  Cosgrove,"  repeated 
George. 

Mrs.  Fleming,  Howard  and  the  nurse,  all  smiled 
at  this  rehearsal,  and  Mrs.  Fleming  forgetting  for  the 
moment  that  George  could  not  hear,  replied,  "I  am 
very  happy  to  meet  you;  please  be  seated,"  and  she 
motioned  to  Mrs.  Elsie  to  place  a  chair  by  his  side. 

George  took  no  notice  of  the  greeting,  but  stood 
motionless  before  them,  while  Mrs.  Fleming  gazed 
intently  at  the  beautiful  features  of  her  grown  son, 
and  noted  the  striking  resemblance  to  her  dear,  de- 
parted husband,  during  those  periods  when  she  sat 
beside  him  in  anxious  solicitude  when  he  lay  pale 


60  THE     KINGDOM     OF     GOLD 

from  illness  with  his  eyes  closed  in  sleep.  Had  not 
Howard  broken  the  silence  she  would  have  continued 
her  gaze,  and  where  might  her  thoughts  have  been 
led? 

But  Howard  was  restless  and  embarrassed,  and 
not  knowing  what  to  do  or  say,  called  "Mother!" 
as  if  to  remind  her  of  the  trying  situation. 

"Mother!"  repeated  George. 

Mrs.  Fleming  started  as  if  suddenly  called  by 
some  one  out  of  sight.  Two  calling  her  mother, 
brought  back  thoughts  of  her  lost  Jesse,  and  of  his 
fate,  and  that  had  he  lived  he  would  now  be  a  man 
and  perhaps  as  large  and  beautiful  as  the  form  stand- 
ing before  her.  She  could  now  understand  how,  in 
her  dreams,  this  face  had  appeared  like  Jesse's  as  it 
bore  such  a  striking  resemblance  to  her  departed  hus- 
band. 

"Mother,  mother,"  whispered  Howard. 

"Mother,  mother,"  softly  repeated  George. 

"You  must  remember  he  cannot  hear  you,  and 
he  must  be  feeling  strange  to  stand  here  so  long!" 
Howard  continued. 

"You  must  remember  he  cannot  hear  you,  and  he 
must  be  feeling  strange  to  stand  here  so  long!"  came 
in  hushed  tones  from  both  in  succession. 

"Yes,  I  do  understand,  dear,"  she  replied. 
"Won't  Mr.  Cosgrove  be  seated?"  and  she  again 
pointed  to  a  chair  beside  him. 

Howard  moved  George's  hand  to  the  back  of  the 


THE     KINGDOM     OF     GOLD  61 

chair.  As  soon  as  George  touched  it,  he  understood 
the  invitation  and  sat  down. 

•  "Please  hand  him  that  shell,  Mrs.  Elsie,  that  used 
to  delight  Jesse.  I  have  always  carried  it  with  me 
and  it  may  interest  him  for  a  few  minutes.  I  wish 
to  look  longer  into  that  sweet  face." 

The  shell  was  placed  into  George's  hand,  and  he 
passed  his  fingers  over  it  with  seeming  pleasure, 
but  without  any  apparent  recognition  of  the  old  time 
plaything.  He  appeared  to  be  stud)dng  its  form  and 
texture. 

Mrs.  Fleming  was  gazing  at  the  pale,  earnest  face, 
and  thinking  of  the  sorrow  which  that  face  had 
caused  her,  by  producing  those  peculiar  and  startling 
dreams;  ruining  her  health,  and  driving  her  away 
from  her  husband  never  to  see  his  kindly  face  again, 
except  when  wrapped  in  death.  Oh  how  bitter  were 
the  thoughts  which  came  to  her,  and  how  mysterious 
it  all  seemed !  Then  her  mind  floated  away  to  Mys- 
tic Island,  to  another  sweet  face,  rosy  and  joyous  as 
it  looked  back  toward  the  shore;  the  eyes  sparkling 
with  bright  anticipation;  the  sweet  lips  aglow  with 
the  mother's  last  kiss,  vibrating  with  "by  bys"  and 
"yes,  mamma,  yes!"  in  response  to  the  solicitous  in- 
structions given. 

But  she  had  reverted  to  those  scenes  so  many, 
many  times  and  to  the  dread  horrors  which  might 
have  come  by  exposure  after  death  to  the  depreda- 
tions of  birds  of  prey,  had  by  repeated  efforts,  filled 
the  bitter  cup  of  sorrow  to  overflowing,  and  had 


62  THE     KINGDOM     OF     GOLD 

long  since  learned  to  interpose  brighter,  hopeful 
thoughts  and  anticipation,  to  thwart  the  tendency  to 
despair  and  rise  above  mere  mortal  trials,  to  the  im- 
mortal compensations;  to  the  promises  which  Reve- 
lations had  pictured  as  far  exceeding  any  transitory 
trouble.  She  had  so  schooled  her  emotions  that  the 
power  to  rally  was  equal  to  the  emergency,  and  now 
again,  as  on  many  previous  occasions,  she  was  able 
to  appear  calm  and  collected. 

Realizing  it  would  be  tedious  for  George  to  re- 
main longer,  she  requested  Howard  to  assist  him  to 
withdraw.  "And,"  she  added,  "as  you  cannot  con- 
verse with  George,  when  you  return  to  his  father, 
thank  him,  and  ask  him  to  express  my  thanks  to  his 
son  for  coming.  Tell  him  I  was  greatly  pleased  to 
see  his  son  again,  and  also  say  I  feel  very  anxious 
about  his  health,  he  seems  so  delicate.  I  don't  know 
as  you  better  mention  that  either,  for  Mr.  Cosgrove 
may  think  such  concern  from  a  stranger  uncalled  for 
and  rude.  No,  don't  mention  that,  but  ask  him  to 
bid  George  goodby  for  me;  for  it  is  not  likely  we 
shall  ever  meet  wnth  them  again  in  this  world!" 

Howard  stepped  forward  taking  George's  hand, 
and  immediately  he  arose,  and  as  he  did  so,  said 
"Jesse's  shell,"  holding  it  before  him. 

Mrs.  Elsie  reached  and  took  it.  All  were  sur- 
prised at  the  remark,  but  as  Howard  had  advanced 
through  the  door,  and  George  was  following,  there 
was  no  attempt  made  to  obtain  further  information 
from  him  about  the  shell. 


THE     KINGDOM     OF     GOLD  63 

Mrs.  Fleming  having  seen  so  many  exhibitions  of 
repetitions  of  words  in  London,  and  now  in  her  own 
room,  concluded,  as  before,  that  George  had  read 
Howard's  mind,  as  Howard  always  spoke  of  the 
shell  as  "Jesse's  shell." 

Both  Mrs.  Elsie  and  Mrs.  Fleming  were  rejoiced 
at  the  strength  she  seemed  to  gain  by  rising,  and  the 
invalid  remained  on  the  sofa  absorbed  in  reflections 
on  the  surprising  experiences  which  this  eventful  day 
had  brought. 

When  night  came  the  sea  was  calm  and  the  move- 
ments of  the  vessel  hardly  perceptible.  It  was  a  fa- 
vorable time  for  rest,  and  sweet  indeed  were  the 
slumbers  of  Mrs.  Fleming.  She  dreamed  again  of 
the  face.  It  was  not  that  same  face  which  had  star- 
tled and  exhausted  her  nervous  system,  but  a  face 
she  had  never  before  seen  in  dreams ;  the  face  of  her 
dear,  lost  husband.  It  was  also  the  face  of  George 
Cosgrove,  and  of  Jesse!  Hie  addition  of  the  third 
seemed  to  harmonize  the  other  two,  and  the  dream 
was  so  peaceful  and  soothing  that  she  awoke  in  rap- 
tures of  delight,  and  from  that  time  health  and 
strength  came  steadily  back  to  her. 

The  following  day  was  very  stormy,  and  the 
ocean  became  so  rough  that  fears  were  entertained 
by  many  passengers  that  the  vessel  might  be  injured 
by  the  terrible  waves. 

The  Cosgroves  were  confined  to  their  room,  as 
were  nearly  all  the  passengers,  and  George  was  so 
nervous  as  to  require  the  constant  attention  of  his 


64  THE     KINGDOM     OF     GOLD 

father,  and  he  remained  prostrated  when  the  vessel 
arrived  at  the  dock  in  New  York  the  following  day. 

Mrs.  Fleming  improved  so  rapidly  she  was  able 
to  walk  about  the  cabin  and  was  extremely  anxious 
to  bid  good  bye  to  George  before  leaving.  She  now 
liked  to  think  of  that  face  which  had  at  first  brought 
her  so  much  suffering,  but  at  last  restoration  and 
peace  of  mind,  such  as  she  had  never  before  expe- 
rienced. Instead  of  retiring  with  forebodings  of 
terrible  dreams,  she  now  looked  forward  to  her  slum- 
bers with  bright  anticipation,  for  in  them  she  seemed 
to  imbibe  the  elixir  of  health! 

She  sent  Howard  to  inquire  after  the  Cosgroves 
and  ask  permission  to  call  at  their  room  and  say 
goodby  to  George.  When  Howard  rapped  at  the 
door,  a  stranger's  face  greeted  him,  and  he  was  in- 
formed that  George  had  been  very  ill,  not  able  to 
sleep,  that  now,  as  the  vessel  was  moored  at  the 
dock,  he  was  resting  quietly,  and  the  doctor  had 
left  instructions  that  he  should  be  allowed  to  sleep 
as  long  as  possible. 

Howard  went  back  to  his  mother  with  this  un- 
pleasant news. 

Arrangements  had  been  made  in  advance  for  the 
Flemings  to  go  directly  to  the  steamer  for  the  Isth- 
mus, which  would  sail  in  a  few  hours,  so  it  was  im- 
possible for  Mrs.  Fleming  to  remain  to  see  George. 
Almost  sickened  by  the  disappointment,  she  has- 
tily prepared  for  the  transfer,  and  was  soon  on  board 
the  vessel  and  on  the  way  from  New  York  to  Pan- 
ama. 


THE     KINGDOM     OF     GOLD  65 


CHAPTER  VII. 

NINA'S  VOYAGE  TO  MELBOURNE  AND  LONDON.  HER 
MEETING  WITH  JAMES  FORDHAM 

The  day  following  the  arrival  of  the  Coral  in 
Melbourne  Mrs.  Adams  and  Nina  started  out  to 
secure  assistance  in  the  furtherance  of  the  plans  they 
had  devised.  They  met  with  expressions  of  sympa- 
thy wherever  the  loss  and  news  of  the  rescue  of 
Jesse  was  described,  and  offers  of  assistance  to  aid 
in  prosecuting  the  search. 

Through  a  Mr.  Swinggate,  arrangements  were 
completed,  and  within  a  few  days  Nina  with  letters 
of  introduction  and  credit,  was  conducted  to  the 
steamer  bound  for  England,  and  introduced  to  the 
Captain,  who  promised  to  give  special  care  to  her 
comfort  and  entertainment,  during  the  voyage. 

In  furtherance  of  this  prom.ise  he  presented  Nina 
to  his  niece.  Miss  Julia  Fordham,  who  happened  to 
be  on  a  return  trip  to  London,  where  she  resided. 

As  Mrs.  Adams  had  also  lived  in  London,  and 
had  described  the  social  ways  of  London  life  to 
Nina,  she  now  felt  as  if  meeting  with  a  friend.  But 


66  THE    KINGDOM    OF     GOLD 

she  soon  discovered  there  were  different  grades  of 
society,  and  that  Miss  Fordham  had  moved  in  circles 
where  Mrs.  Adams  had  not  been  privileged  to  enter. 
By  comparing  what  she  heard  from  both,  she  learned 
that  each  grade  was  absorbed  with  ideas  and  pur- 
poses quite  different  from  the  aims  of  the  other. 

Miss  Fordham  was  accompanied  by  her  brother 
James,  who  had  gone  out  to  Austraha  for  recreation, 
and  she  asked  him  to  help  her  entertain  this  brave 
girl,  who  was  but  a  novice  in  the  ways  of  the  world, 
and  needed  the  council  of  a  trustworthy  person,  who 
could  advise  and  assist  her  in  her  plans  for  the  dis- 
covery of  the  lost  Jesse. 

James  Fordham  became  deeply  interested  in  what 
Nina  told  him  about  the  missing  boy,  and  her  object 
in  visiting  Sweden.  As  soon  as  the  name  of  George 
Fleming  was  mentioned,  young  Fordham  recollected 
that  he  knew  of  a  George  Fleming,  a  wool  merchant, 
who,  he  had  heard,  came  from  Australia. 

As  Nina  made  no  attempt  at  appearing  in  any 
other  dress  than  the  simple  form  worn  by  the  women 
of  Mystic  Island,  made  of  hand-woven  homespun 
fabric,  with  odd  colors,  homely  and  ill-shapen,  a 
sort  of  compromise  between  the  native  dress,  and 
those  brought  by  the  Swedes,  Miss  Fordham's  pride 
and  ideas  of  propriety  could  not  rest  with  any  degree 
of  composure  while  she  was  in  the  presence  of  Nina, 
and  she  had  been  considering  the  way  in  which  she 
could  induce  her  to  adopt  the  habit  worn  by  English 
women. 


THE     KINGDOM     OF    GOLD  67 

One  day  after  becoming  better  acquainted,  she 
remarked  to  Nina  that  she  should  hke  to  see  her  in 
European  dress,  and  as  they  were  of  about  the  same 
size  and  form,  she  would  be  pleased  to  rig  her  up 
in  one  of  her  suits. 

Nina  at  first  hesitated  to  give  her  assent  to  this,  as 
she  feared  it  might  incline  her  to  dissatisfaction  with 
what  she  now  wore,  and  in  that  way  might  interfere 
with  the  work  she  had  started  to  accomplish. 

Miss  Fordham  thought  the  mere  experiment  would 
prove  a  diversion  and  tend  to  enlarge  her  ideas  and 
acquaint  her  with  what  was  constantly  being  encoun- 
tered as  she  travelled;  that  she  might  better  under- 
stand those  she  met,  if  she  reaHzed  what  made 
up  their  appearance,  and,  to  a  great  extent,  con- 
trolled their  movements,  determined  their  attitudes, 
and  modified  their  actions. 

Nina  finally  consented  to  allow  Miss  Fordham 
the  pleasure  of  seeing  her  in  full  European  dress  with 
the  understanding  that  she  should  not  be  required  to 
leave  the  seclusion  of  Miss  Fordham's  stateroom. 

This  room  was  the  finest,  largest  and  most  elabo- 
rately furnished  on  the  ship,  and  was  kindly  given 
to  Miss  Fordham  by  her  uncle  that  her  trip,  which 
was  partly  made  as  a  visit,  might  prove  as  enjoyable 
as  possible. 

Thither  the  two  repaired,  and  as  a  preliminary 
Nina's  hair  was  dressed  to  correspond  with  Miss 
Fordham's.  The  clumsy  moccasin-like  footgear  was 
removed,  and  silk  stockings  and  a  pair  of  French 


68  THE     KINGDOM    OF    GOLD 

gaiters  were,  with  great  discomfort  and  difficulty, 
substituted.  And  so  in  turn  each  garment  was  ex- 
changed, until  laced  and  braced,  Nina  was  led,  al- 
most lifted,  to  a  standing  position  before  the  mirror, 
a  modern  belle  in  appearance,  bedecked  with  one  of 
Miss  Fordham's  most  elaborate  and  expenisve 
dresses;  one  suited  for  a  grand  occasion. 

During  the  long,  tedious  period  required  for  effect- 
ing this  marvelous  change,  Miss  Fordham  had  found 
it  necessary  to  comfort  Nina  with  cheering  expres- 
sions, such  as  one  would  address  to  a  restless  child, 
for  she  had  become  very  weary.  Each  garment 
seemed  to  have  found  scores  of  sensitive  spots,  and 
innumerable  nerves,  which,  until  now,  had  never 
given  any  evidences  of  existence. 

The  combined  sensations  produced  an  effect 
which,  to  Nina,  were  as  if  she  had  been  wrapped 
from  head  to  feet  in  strong  tightly  drawn  cords,  and 
movement  seemed  impossible.  Nina  stood  as  a  statue 
while  Miss  Fordham  withdrew  a  few  steps  to  ob- 
serve her. 

At  this  moment  a  rap  came  and  as  Miss  Ford- 
ham opened  the  door  her  brother  stood  before  her, 
concerned  because  of  her  long  absence  from  the 
cabin,  as  he  had  anticipated  an  early  return  when  she 
and  Miss  Hassen  asked  to  be  excused.  He  feared 
one  of  them  had  been  taken  ill,  and  v>fhen  he  caught 
a  glimpse  of  the  lady  standing  before  the  mirror, 
he  supposed  her  to  be  one  of  the  passengers,  who 
had  been  called  to  assist  his  sister.     "What  has  hap- 


THE     KINGDOM     OF     GOLD  69 

pened  to  Miss  Hassen?"  he  eagerly  inquired.  And 
then  catching  the  reflection  of  Nina's  face  from  the 
mirror,  he  saw  at  a  glance  what  had  transpired.  He 
was  so  far  advanced  as  to  prevent  the  closing  of  the 
door,  until  he  should  recede,  and  though  Miss  Ford- 
ham  made  a  slight  effort  to  do  so  it  was  unsuccessful, 
and  she  involuntarily  turned  to  see  what  the  effect  of 
this  sudden  intrusion  was  having  upon  Nina,  while 
at  the  same  moment,  in  an  undertone,  she  coaxingly 
begged  her  brother  to  withdraw. 

During  this  episode  Nina  had  stood  motionless, 
not  a  muscle  moved,  excepting  that  the  eyes  were 
turned  to  observe  Mr.  Fordham's  face  in  the  mirror, 
and  to  notice  that  he  v/as  looking  at  her.  The  few 
minutes  she  had  been  standing  seemed  more  like 
hours,  and  though  Miss  Fordham  immediately 
stepped  to  support  her,  as  soon  as  she  had  closed  the 
door,  Nina  fell  as  an  inanimate  body  at  her  feet. 

Terribly  frightened.  Miss  Fordham  rushed  back 
and  called  her  brother,  who  had  been  so  struck  by 
the  appearance  of  Nina  that  he  had  scarcely  moved 
from  the  door.  Noticing  the  excited  state  of  his  sis- 
ter, he  hurried  into  the  room  and  to  Nina,  who  re- 
mained as  she  had  fallen,  and  clasping  her  hand  and 
arm,  he  asked  if  he  should  assist  her  to  the  sofa.  Nina 
had  not  fainted;  she  was  suffering  from  muscular 
paralysis.  She  was  so  embarrassed  by  Mr.  Ford- 
ham's  presence  that  she  could  not  think  what  reply 
to  make. 

Both  brother  and  sister  became  so  frightened,  that 


70  THE     KINGDOM     OF     GOLD 

they  lifted  her  to  the  sofa,  and  Juha  urged  her 
brother  to  go  instantly  to  the  doctor's  room  and  have 
him  come  at  once  to  Nina. 

Though  so  painfully  encompassed  and  helpless  in 
body,  Nina's  mind  was  clear  enough  to  reahze  that 
she  did  not  require  a  physician.  Perplexing  as  the 
incidents  had  been,  a  more  embarrassing  one  seemed 
imminent,  and  she  called  out  to  Mr.  Fordham  as  he 
was  emerging  from  the  room,  to  come  back,  which  he 
prompdy  did,  and  she  begged  him  not  to  go  for  the 
physician,  as  she  was  not  sick,  but  so  tied  up  as  to  be 
helpless,  and  that  she  would  soon  be  all  right  again 
when  the  wrappings  were  removed. 

But  Miss  Fordham  was  so  agitated  by  the  terrible 
shock,  and  the  thought  which  naturally  came  to  her, 
that  possibly  Nina  might  die  in  her  clothes,  she  was 
not  inclined  to  listen  to  Nina's  pleadings,  and  urged 
her  brother  to  bring  the  doctor. 

Miss  Fordham's  actions  made  Nina  brave,  and 
she  immediately  rose  above  embarrassment  and  said 
to  Mr.  Fordham,  "I  know  you  will  give  me  a  chance 
to  show  you  that  I  do  not  need  a  physician;  I  am 
not  ill,  I  have  great  strength.  If  you  will  help  me 
to  my  feet,  and  assist  me  I  will  show  Miss  Fordham 
that  I  am  well."  And  lifting  her  head  and  extending 
her  hands  as  she  spoke,  with  Mr.  Fordham's  assist- 
ance she  stood  erect  in  a  moment. 

The  first  reaction  from  the  paralyzed  condition 
of  the  nerves  and  muscles  had  come,  and  there  was 


THE     KINGDOM     OF    GOLD  71 

relief  from  pain,  and  the  power  to  move  was  used 
to  the  delight  of  all. 

Once  again  before  the  mirror,  which  showed  the 
full  form,  stood  Nina  supported  by  the  hands  of 
James  Fordham,  and  this  time  it  was  as  embarrassing 
for  him  as  for  her.  Flushed  with  excitement,  her 
cheeks  and  lips  almost  crimson,  eyes  dark  and  flash- 
ing with  intense  attention,  wavy  black  hair  in  pro- 
fuse rolls,  a  form  of  graceful  rotundity,  modeled  with 
healthy  tissues,  Nina  would  be  considered  a  striking 
figure  anywhere.  There  was  a  bearing  of  queenly 
importance,  natural  but  marked,  and  young  Ford- 
ham  felt  that  a  superior  being  stood  by  his  side. 

Her  great  beauty  had  remained  undiscovered 
while  hidden  beneath  the  wrappings  of  a  South  Sea 
Island  maiden.  But  now  it  was  revealed  in  fulness 
before  his  astonished  gaze,  and  he  stood  spellbound ; 
while  Nina,  absorbed  in  a  study  of  the  wonderful 
transformation,  contemplated  her  helpless  and  em- 
barrassing position,  supported  by  Mr.  Fordham, 
without  power  to  release  herself  if  she  desired.  She 
might  have  fallen  again  had  not  Miss  Fordham  come 
to  her  rescue. 

Standing  at  one  side,  while  her  brother  supported 
the  other,  she  asked  Nina  to  take  a  few  steps  around 
the  small  room,  and  see  if  she  could  not  become  fa- 
miliar with  the  trappings  she  had  on.  "Come  now 
again  to  the  mirror,"  she  said,  as  they  slowly  paced 
the  limits  of  the  stateroom.  "See  now,  a  royal  lady 
indeed!    Why,  James,  Miss  Hassan  would  produce 


72  THE     KINGDOM     OF     GOLD 

a  sensation  in  London  society  if  she  would  only  con- 
sent to  stay  with  us  for  a  part  of  the  coming  season." 

Suddenly  realizing  that  it  was  not  with  an  intimate 
friend  but  a  comparative  stranger,  and  in  the  pres- 
ence of  a  gentleman,  that  this  exceedingly  familiar 
attitude  had  been  assumed,  Julia  immediately  asked 
Nina  to  forgive  her  seeming  rudeness,  which  had 
thoughtlessly  escaped  her,  as  she  was  not  her  real 
self  after  all  the  excitement,  and  added  that  she 
hoped  her  brother  would  overlook  the  remarks  made 
in  his  presence. 

James  instantaneously  felt  that  the  time  for  his 
withdrawal  had  come,  and  he  asked  if  Miss  Hassen 
would  not  now  be  seated,  suggesting  that  after  a  lit- 
tle quiet  rest,  she  would  be  quite  restored  again. 

Julia  selected  the  easy  chair  into  which  Nina 
dropped,  almost  exhausted,  and  James  entered  the. 
cabin.  No  sooner  had  James  passed  out  than  Julia 
was  at  Nina's  feet,  kneeling,  holding  her  hands  while 
she  apologized  for  her  improper  remarks.  "I  know 
you  will  forgive  my  hasty  words,  for  you  are  abso- 
lutel})  beautiful  in  our  form  of  dress,  and  I  came  very 
near  saying  those  very  words  in  the  presence  of  my 
brother.  I  cannot  help  expressing  myself  to  you 
alone. 

"If  you  would  only  allow  me  to  introduce  you 
into  our  society  in  London,  this  coming  season,  there 
is  hardly  any  position  which  is  beyond  your  possible 
attainment." 

Nina's  mind,  though  unsophisticated,  had  been  so 


THE     KINGDOM     OF     GOLD  73 

actively  employed  with  thoughts  that  required  the 
exercise  of  a  new  order  of  reasoning,  that  she  un- 
derstood much  of  the  meaning  of  Miss  Fordham's 
words,  and  realized  that  there  was  a  possible  world, 
entirely  different  from  the  one  she  had  inhabited.  The 
experiences  of  the  last  hour  had  demonstrated  that, 
as  to  outward  appearance,  she  could  become  a 
changed  being;  one  who  would  hardly  be  recognized 
on  Mystic  Island,  were  she  to  appear  there.  Ideas 
like  these  swiftly  passed  through  her  mind  as  she  sat 
encased  in  the  painful  manacles  of  fashion. 

She  could  not  reply  to  Julia's  words  further  than 
to  say,  "Miss  Fordham,  you  know  I  am  but  a  simple 
girl,  without  education,  or  knowledge  of  the  world, 
and  these  shoes  are  so  painful,  and  this  dress  so  op- 
pressive, I  hope  you  will  remove  all  these  things  and 
let  me  put  on  my  simple  clothes  again  as  soon  as  pos- 
sible, for  every  breath  hurts  me.  Please  call  me 
Nina,  won't  you.  Miss  Fordham?  It  sounds  so 
strange  to  hear  Miss  before  my  name." 

"Yes,"  replied  Miss  Fordham,  "If  you  will  call 
me  JuHa.  It  will  afford  me  pleasure  as  well;  and 
now  Nina,  let  me  remove  those  terrible  shoes ;  for  you 
must  know,  they  are  too  small  a  size  for  your  feet; 
but  then  I  had  no  others,  and  so  forced  these  on.  No 
wonder  they  were  painful;  but  when  you  have  the 
right  size,  and  have  worn  them  for  a  little  time,  they 
become  comfortable.  You  would  soon  learn  to  like 
our  way  of  dressing  I  am  sure." 

Continuing  her  conversation,  which  was  explana- 


74  THE     KINGDOM     OF     GOLD 

tory  of  the  various  parts  of  the  dress,  Julia  succeeded 
in  giving  Nina  a  very  instructive  lesson,  while  she  re- 
leased her  from  captivity  and  restored  her  to  her 
normal  state. 

But  there  were  some  things  which  proved  very 
afflictive;  and  not  the  least  so,  the  hair,  which  had 
been  turned  up  from  its  natural  position.  Each  hair 
had  pressed  and  irritated  a  nerve,  and  when  they 
were  returned  to  their  former  positions  the  whole 
scalp  became  inflamed.  The  cramped  position  and 
tight  lacing  of  the  feet,  had  also  produced  soreness 
which  was  quite  painful  when  walking  was  at- 
tempted. In  addition  to  the  many  bodily  discom- 
forts there  remained  the  embarrassment  caused  by 
the  presence  of  young  Fordham;  and  especially  by 
the  perplexing  remarks  made  in  his  presence  by 
Julia. 

It  was  several  days  before  Nina  could  command 
sufficient  confidence  to  appear  in  the  presence  of  the 
brother  aagin,  and  then,  only  because  Julia  had  as- 
sured her  that  no  mention  would  be  made  of  the 
occurrences  which  distressed  her. 

The  subject  of  conversation  between  brother  and 
sister,  at  their  first  meeting  after  the  event  of  the 
day,  was  confined  almost  entirely  to  Nina.  Both 
seemed  to  be  infatuated  with  her  beauty,  and  strik- 
ing appearance.  James  chided  Julia  for  allowing 
her  feelings  to  overcome  her  good  sense,  and  for 
exposing  him  to  such  dreadful  embarrassment.  He 
thought  it  must  have  been  equally  painful  for  Miss 


THE     KINGDOM     OF     GOLD  75 

Hassen,  and  hardly  knev/  how  to  approach  her  again 
with  any  degree  of  composure. 

"Oh!  I  will  attend  to  that,"  said  Julia,  "she  is 
but  a  simple-minded  girl  who  does  not  realize  as  we 
do  the  impropriety  of  such  a  remark.  Had  she  been 
a  refined  person,  accustomed  to  society,  I  could  not 
have  given  utterance  to  any  such  sentiments ;  but  she 
is  more  like  an  innocent  child,  and  I  am  sure  she  will 
take  all  I  said,  as  if  coming  from  a  sister." 

"Well,"  replied  James,  "I  hesitate  at  meeting  her 
again  since  this  experience.  If  you  had  not  said 
what  you  did,  I  should  have  felt  very  happy  in  her 
company,  for  there  has  been,  from  the  first,  some- 
thing about  her  manner,  and  in  her  conversation, 
which  has  been  very  entertaining  to  me.  I  have  be- 
come so  deeply  interested  in  her  plans  to  find  the 
lost  child  that  I  have  felt  as  if  I  should  offer  to  ac- 
company her  to  Sweden,  on  our  arrival  in  London, 
if  I  could  arrange  to  have  you  to  go  with  us.  Of 
course  in  the  event  that  she  would  allow  me  to  do 
so.  But  now,  since  this  affair,  I  have  lost  all  cour- 
age. She  seems  to  me  more  like  one  of  the  worldly- 
wise,  who  do  not  require  a  protector,  or  assistance 
even  in  such  a  work;  that  she  will  be  able  to  go 
alone,  and  require  no  attendant.  It  may  seem  fool- 
ish, but  I  feel  it  my  duty  to  devote  my  time  and 
means  to  aiding  Miss  Hassen  in  finding  the  lost  boy. 

"The  child  has  secured  a  place  in  my  affections, 
and  I  cannot  help  thinking  of  his  possible  sufferings, 
and  of  entertaining  feelings  similar  to  Miss  Hassen's, 


76  THE     KINGDOM     OF     GOLD 

regarding  him.  I  am  almost  certain  Mr.  Fleming  is 
living  in  London." 

"Well,"  replied  Julia,  "if  you  find  Mr.  Fleming, 
he  will  undoubtedly  accompany  Miss  Hassen,  and 
so  you  would  not  be  required." 

"I  had  not  thought  of  that,"  said  James  medita- 
tively, "but  there  may  be  other  work  to  do.  I  might 
co-operate  with  them,  if  I  do  not  accompany  Miss 
Hassen.  I  have  been  thinking  over  the  chances  of 
finding  Jesse,  and  have  planned  a  course  of  proce- 
dure, which  I  expected  to  place  before  Miss  Hassen 
at  an  early  day;  but  now  I  cannot  get  myself  in  a 
proper  state  of  mind  to  do  so,  and  as  we  shall  soon 
be  in  London,  I  think  I  shall  wait  until  I  have  de- 
termined if  Mr.  Fleming  can  be  found." 

Juha  here  remarked  that  he  might  confine  his  sug- 
gestions to  looking  for  Mr.  Fleming  in  London,  and 
that  she  might  invite  Nina  to  go  to  their  house  and 
remain  until  other  arrangements  were  devised. 

James  approved  of  this  plan,  and  told  Julia  to 
inform  Miss  Hassen  that  he  had  some  suggestions 
to  make  regarding  the  search  for  Jesse. 

Julia  had  frequented  Nina's  room  during  her  se- 
clusion, and  had  spent  a  good  part  of  each  day  in 
entertaining  her;  and  after  the  conversation  with 
James,  had  arranged  for  a  meeting  which  was  to 
take  place  on  deck.  While  she  and  Nina  were  tak- 
ing exercise  James  was  to  meet  them  as  if  by  chance. 
This  proved  a  successful  ruse. 

After  a  few  remarks  on  the  weather,  and  the 


THE    KINGDOM     OF     GOLD  11 

progress  of  the  vessel,  London  was  spoken  of,  and 
James  invited  them  to  seats,  where  he  could  lay  be- 
fore them  his  plans  for  procedure  immediately  upon 
their  arrival.  At  an  opportune  moment  during  the 
conversation  Julia  invited  Nina  to  accompany  them 
to  their  home  and  remain  with  them  during  her  stay 
in  London;  and  assured  her  that  James  would  be 
pleased  to  do  all  he  could  to  assist  her. 

Notwithstanding  the  efforts  to  conduct  the  con- 
versation without  any  reference  to  the  events  of  the 
past  few  days,  there  was  an  attitude  of  restraint  ap- 
parent to  all,  which  it  was  impossible  to  overcome; 
and  when  Nina  accepted  the  kind  invitations  to  re- 
main with  the  Fordhams,  it  was  evident  she  did  so 
with  considerable  hesitation. 

Child  of  nature  as  she  had  been,  the  transformed 
existence  for  but  a  few  moments  was  sufficient; 
standing  by  the  side  of  a  man  of  the  world,  attired 
in  habiliments  that  might  adorn  a  bride,  leaning  on 
his  arm,  supported  by  him;  realizing  for  the  first 
time  the  fascinating  charms  of  her  own  face  and 
form — all  these  were  impressed  upon  her  amatory 
nature;  and  a  new  life  had  sprung  into  existence. 
Powers  which  by  slower  processes  might  have  re- 
quired months,  or  possibly  years  for  development 
had  been  established  as  by  a  flash  light  and  she 
could  no  longer  view  the  world  except  through  the 
medium  of  this  new  negative.  The  childlike  sim- 
plicity of  manner  had  forever  passed  from  her;  the 


78  THE     KINGDOM     OF     GOLD 

graces  which  belonged  to  womanhood  now  encir- 
cled her. 

The  glance  of  the  eyes,  the  wave  of  the  hand, 
the  poise  of  the  body,  every  gesture  and  movement 
were  imbued  with  a  new  force.  New  thoughts  had 
intruded,  and  henceforth  Nina  knew  not  what  to 
expect.  She  felt  as  one  standing  on  uncertain 
ground,  which  might  sustain  or  engulf  her — as  if 
carried  by  a  tide  out  on  an  unknown  sea — as  if  so- 
journing in  a  strange  land  where  she  knew  not  who 
was  friend,  or  who  foe.  Her  only  refuge  seemed  to 
be  the  two  companions  who  had  brought  her  to  this 
gateway;  whether  leading  into,  or  out  of,  paradise, 
she  knew  not.  She  felt  herself  both  attracted  and 
repulsed  by  them.  Now  inclined  to  allow  them  to 
determine  her  future  course,  and  again  to  withdraw 
entirely  from  them  and  seek  other  aid.  No  wonder 
her  reluctant  acceptance  of  the  kind  offer  of  a  home 
in  London,  seemed  cool  and  almost  offensive  to 
James  and  Julia.  But  as  their  own  feelings  had 
also  been  wrought  up  to  a  high  tension,  they  could 
readily  excuse  any  seeming  indifference  in  Nina. 

And  so  it  was  agreed  that  Nina  should  accom- 
pany the  Fordhams  to  their  home,  when  the  steamer 
arrived  in  London. 


THE     KINGDOM     OF     GOLD  79 


CHAPTER  VIII. 

MILLIONAIRES  AND  REFORMERS.  WITH  JESSE  AS 
ORACLE,  ORGANIZE  "THE  KINGDOM  OF  GOLD" 

As  soon  as  George  Cosgrove  awoke  from  his  re- 
freshing sleep  he  was  taken  from  the  steamer  to 
the  house  of  his  foster-father's  friend,  Mr.  Fisher, 
whose  carriage  had  been  in  waiting  at  the  wharf 
since  the  arrival  of  the  vessel  several  hours  previous. 

This  gentleman  had  accumulated  great  wealth 
as  a  speculator  in  stocks,  and  a  manager  of  large 
enterprises.  His  millions  did  not,  however,  bring 
peace,  or  that  measure  of  satisfaction  usually  ac- 
credited to  riches,  by  those  who  have  never  tasted 
their  sweet  or  bitter.  He  felt  there  was  no  enduring 
security ;  that  sooner  or  later  there  would  come  con- 
flicts between  the  ignorant  laboring  class,  and  intel- 
ligent wealthy  class;  that  the  numbers  of  the  latter 
were  so  disproportionate  to  those  of  the  former, 
that  the  superiority  of  mind  would  be  insufficient  to 
maintain  order,  and  that  sanguinary  conflicts  would 
follow.  He  considered  the  social  mutterings  and 
occasional  outbursts  of  violence  as  the  precursors 


80  THE    KINGDOM    OF    GOLD 

of  incipient  revolution,  which  must  either  be  out- 
witted or  overcome  by  superior  force. 

Having  been  fortunate  in  numerous  complicated 
schemes,  his  confidence  did  not  falter  when  he  un- 
dertook the  difficult  task  of  discovering  a  new  sys- 
tem of  political  economy.  He  confidently  believed 
there  was  a  providential  development  in  all  prog- 
ress ;  that  demand  and  supply,  followed  in  successive 
waves.  He  had  consulted  with  eminent  men  in  the 
various  departments  of  life,  and  spent  thousands  of 
dollars  in  securing  from  the  ablest  writers,  private 
essays  on  the  subject. 

At  last  he  struck  upon  an  idea  which  he  believed 
would  eventually  furnish  a  solution  of  the  problem. 
He  termed  it  poly-iheof^ ;  and  described  it  as  a  har- 
monious system  to  be  deduced  from  the  vast  accu- 
mulations of  ideas,  included  in  the  numerous  es- 
says he  had  collected,  and  others  which  might  be 
obtained.  He  had  arrived  at  the  conclusion  that 
no  speaker  or  writer  was  able  to  express  the  senti- 
ments he  entertained.  That  all  truth  was  harmo- 
nious, but  man's  imperfect  powers  produced  discord ; 
and  that  there  was  a  rhythmical  vibration  in  all  per- 
fect expressions  of  truth  which  was  beautiful  mel- 
ody. That  somewhere  hidden  away  in  the  mind 
there  was  a  power  of  Jvill  or  determination,  which 
winnowed  the  inspirations  of  the  sensorium;  and 
transferred  to  the  power  of  expression,  or  mental 
Tvord-mill,  such  as  related  to  the  object  of  thought, 
and  that  if  suitable  words  could  be  arranged  rap- 


THE     KINGDOM     OF     GOLD  81 

idly  enough  to  express  the  ideas,  they  came  forth 
from  mouth  or  pen.  If  the  mill  failed  to  arrange 
and  supply  words,  the  intuition  passed  on  out  of 
reach  of  expression,  leaving  only  a  slight  impress  too 
vague  for  utterance. 

He  therefore  surmised  that  there  could  be  found, 
between  the  lines  as  it  were,  the  whole  of  the  in- 
spired sentiment,  provided  a  means  could  be  devised 
for  supplying  the  required  words  and  arranging 
them  into  harmonious  expression;  similarly  as  in 
music  the  unwritten  part  is  arranged  to  harmonize 
the  melody. 

In  seeking  for  the  means  of  discovering  the  unex- 
pressed parts  with  which  to  complete  the  required 
measure  of  harmony,  he  was  led  to  consider  many 
novel  theories,  pertaining  to  the  phenomenon  of 
man's  intellectual  processes,  and  among  others  hyp- 
notism. This  afforded  a  means  of  determining  some 
of  the  required  information,  as  when  an  ignorant 
subject  was  requested  to  describe  a  named  object 
of  which  he  possessed  little  knowledge;  he  would 
correctly  express  size,  shape,  and  substance. 

Here  was  a  key  to  the  missing  parts  of  his  sys- 
tem. It  was  but  the  key,  however.  It  admitted 
the  possessor  into  the  lobby,  but  did  not  necessarily 
allow  him  to  enter  into  the  vast  store-house  of  infi- 
nite wisdom,  or,  so  far  as  he  had  investigated,  enable 
him  to  harmonize  the  unique  collection  of  written 
ideas;  relating  to  the  theme  that  absorbed  his  atten- 
tion.    Yet  it  afforded  hope  in  that  direction,  and 


82  THE     KINGDOM     OF     GOLD 

encouraged  him  to  extend  his  investigations  on  sim- 
ilar Hnes. 

His  next  step  was  with  mediums  of  spirit  commu- 
nications. Here  he  found  a  marked  similarity  to 
the  phenomenon  of  hypnotism;  but  the  operator  or 
supposed  dictator  of  ideas  was  not  always  satisfac- 
torily determinable.  To  control  or  direct  the  me- 
dium and  confine  him  to  some  definite  object  was 
found  to  be  very  difficult  and  sometimes  impossi- 
ble. 

He  discovered  that  no  two  hypnotized  subjects 
or  mediums  agreed  in  the  description  of  an  object  or 
idea.  If,  however,  two  hypnotized  subjects  were 
operated  upon  simultaneously,  and  one  was  asked  to 
describe,  the  second  would  assent  to  the  description, 
unless  directed  to  disagree,  when  great  differences 
would  be  manifested.  The  second  would  be  nega- 
tive or  positive  to  the  first,  as  directed,  on  all  sub- 
jects. 

In  like  manner  if  two  mediums  were  seated  near 
each  other,  and  harmoniously  inclined,  descriptions 
by  one  would  be  assented  to  by  the  other.  But  if 
a  feeling  of  antagonism  existed,  dissenting  opinions 
would  be  expressed. 

These  unsatisfactory  results  seemed  to  be  beyond 
the  control  of  the  investigator,  and  he  was  becom- 
ing somewhat  discouraged  with  his  efforts,  when 
the  arrival  of  his  friend  Cosgrove  with  George  in- 
fused new  enthusiasm  into  his  work,  as  George  had 


THE    KINGDOM     OF     GOLD  83 

exhibited  powers  quite  outside  the  realm  he  had  in- 
vestigated. 

During  the  period  in  which  these  various  experi- 
ments had  been  made,  the  reformer  had  enHsted 
the  co-operation  of  more  than  a  score  of  weahhy 
friends,  who  had  become  enthused  by  his  novel  ideas 
and  had  joined  in  efforts  for  the  solution  of  the  great 
problem.  As  their  investigations  led  them  into  many 
strange  and  questionable  places,  it  became  necessary 
for  each  to  disguise  his  identity;  for  they  were  de- 
termined to  leave  no  theory  or  phenomena,  be  it 
ever  so  vague,  questionable  or  disreputable,  until  it 
had  been  proved  as  far  as  their  ingenuity  could  pen- 
etrate. We  shall  therefore  know  of  them  only  by 
their  assumed  names. 

Various  theories  obtained  and  were  advanced; 
first  one  and  then  another,  seemed  the  proper  basis 
of  action.  One  held  to  the  old  Romanish  idea  that 
the  Church  should  govern.  That  which  was  the  de- 
pository of  the  good,  the  combined  churches  or  re- 
ligious orders,  should  control  all  the  political  ma- 
chinery of  the  country. 

Another;  that  land  was  the  only  true  basis  of 
governing  its  inhabitants,  as  it  was  the  source  of  all 
life.  That  the  tillers  of  the  soil  and  those  who 
were  intimately  associated  with  them  as  accessories 
always  constituted  the  majority;  therefore,  owner- 
ship should  determine  the  basis  of  power. 

Another  that  it  was  not  the  land,  but  the  improve- 
ments,  especially   those   great  railways,   manufac- 


84  THE    KINGDOM     OF    GOLD 

tories,  and  other  productions  of  scientific  effort  and 
wealth,  that  should  control;  as  simply  land  would 
take  care  of  itself  while  these  might  be  destroyed, 
and  the  nation  destroyed  with  them. 

The  colleges  and  schools  found  an  exponent,  who 
claimed  that  as  the  schools  were  the  basis  of  all  im- 
provement, even  in  religion,  that  as  they  were  the 
source  of  power,  they  should  exercise  the  right  of 
controlling  and  directing  its  application. 

And  then  there  came  the  advocate  of  the 
"Money-god."  He  claimed  that  money  was  the 
only  universal  measure  of  power.  That  the  land, 
or  the  factory,  the  church  or  the  schools,  could  not 
be  maintained  except  for,  and  by  the  use  of  money. 
That  everything  could  be  purchased  with  it,  and 
that  its  power  was  practically  unlimited.  That  the 
rich,  though  seemingly  abundantly  supplied,  still 
longed  for  more;  and  the  poor,  the  ignorant,  the  vi- 
cious, could  be  controlled  by  it.  It  was  the  one 
great  power  in  the  world  susceptible  of  being  used 
to  protect  the  higher,  as  against  the  lower  classes, 
and  of  overcoming  all  attempts  at  insurrection  or 
refusal  to  labor. 

He  challenged  the  presentation  of  a  reasonable 
condition  which  could  not  be  solved  by  the  proper 
application  of  money.  He  claimed  there  was  no 
such  thing  as  money  outside  the  actual  coin,  and 
that  it  was  the  only  sure  reliance  in  case  of  trouble 
with  the  masses. 

His  theories  found  favor  with  many  of  the  more 


THE     KINGDOM    OF     GOLD  85 

prominent  workers  now  gathered  around  the  re- 
former, and  the  leader  was  favorably  inclined  to- 
ward his  friend's  "golden  ideas"  if  he  could  com- 
bine with  them  some  of  the  beautiful  sentiments  of 
the  essayists. 

It  was  evident  that  the  advocate  of  money  was 
fast  becoming  the  ruling  spirit  of  the  group,  and  that 
all  minds  were  more  or  less  negative  to  his.  Such 
were  the  circumstances  under  which  the  new  hypnot- 
ic subject  was  to  be  tried. 

Having  been  informed  of  the  powers  possessed 
by  George,  who  though  dumb  in  his  normal  state 
could,  when  influenced,  divine  and  repeat  the 
thoughts  of  others;  the  first  experiments  were  di- 
rected to  confirming  these  claims. 

This  was  done  by  Mr.  Cosgrove  who  requested 
the  gentlemen  to  select  a  passage  in  any  book,  or 
to  write  a  sentence  for  him.  He  would  read  it, 
advance  and  place  his  hand  on  George,  and  will 
him  to  express  the  words,  when  they  were  repeated 
to  the  satisfaction  of  all. 

After  satisfying  themselves  as  to  his  ability  to 
repeat  what  had  been  read  by  the  operator,  it  was 
agreed  that  Mr.  Fisher  should  select  one  of  his 
essays  on  political  economy,  for  a  test  of  the  powers 
of  George  to  discover  the  missing  parts,  according 
to  the  theory  of  imperfect  expressions. 

To  prepare  George  for  this  work  it  was  deemed 
best  to  have  Mr.  Fisher  read  only  part  of  a  sen- 


86  THE     KINGDOM    OF    GOLD 

tence,  and  then  will  George  to  supply  the  remainder. 
It  was  found  he  could  perform  this  wonderful  feat. 

As  Mr.  Fisher  was  so  familiar  with  the  writings 
of  his  essayists,  it  was  deemed  best  that  some  other 
person  should  present  the  sentence  to  George,  to 
avoid  forecasting  unknown  parts  for  his  mind.  Mr. 
Hammond,  the  advocate  of  money,  was  by  mutual 
accord  selected,  and  it  was  arranged  that  he  should 
lay  his  hand  on  George's  head,  and  then  read  to 
himself  the  first  paragraph  of  the  article,  and  then 
he  should  will  George  to  repeat  it  with  such  added 
words  or  sentences  as  were  required  for  its  perfect 
rendering. 

The  first  paragraph  of  the  essay  was  as  follows : 
"TTie  true  solution  of  the  problem  of  government 
lays  in  the  discovery  of  an  underlying  principle, 
which  is  adaptable  to  all  the  conditions  of  human  ex- 
perience during  a  prescribed  period  of  time.  This 
principle  can  only  be  determined  by  a  formula  in- 
volving the  several  important  active  ideas,  which 
are  obtaining  at  that  time." 

The  rendering  uttered  by  George  was  as  follows : 
"The  true  solution  of  the  great  problem  of  how 
to  control  the  actions  and  direct  the  minds  of  a  mul- 
titude possessing  various  ideas,  is  to  be  found  in  the 
selection  of  that  central  force  which,  when  applied 
to  the  variable  conditions  of  human  experience,  shall 
be  found  most  potent  in  producing  marked  results; 
and  in  directing  its  use  to  those  circumstances,  which 


THE     KINGDOM     OF     GOLD  87 

require  regulation  with  mathematical  precision,  and 
economical  expenditure." 

To  say  that  the  assembled  reformers  were  de- 
lighted with  this  result  would  be  a  very  mild  expres- 
sion, they  were  enthusiastic. 

The  second  paragraph  was  attempted  in  a  spirit 
of  earnest  expectancy.     It  read  as  follows: 

"The  active  ideas  which   are  prevalent  at  this 
time,  pertaining  to  government,  are  the  relative  rights 
of  classes  of  individuals,  as  related  to  intellectual 
and  practical  attainments,  and  the  management  of 
such  institutions  and  powers,  as  determine  for  each 
class,  its  position  in  the  line  of  progress,  the  pos- 
session of  property  and  exercise  of  influence." 
The  rendering  by  George  was  as  follows: 
"The  questions  which  are  agitating  the  minds  of 
the   people   of   this   country,   involve   many   things 
which  have  never  before  required  the  attention  of 
the  government;  and  it  is  doubtful  if  a  solution  can 
ever  be   obtained  by   legislative   enactment.      The 
central  force  which  will  be  found  efficient  in  adjust- 
ing all  differences,  as  between  classes  or  orders  of 
men,  or  the  management  of  enterprises,  institutions, 
or  the  government  itself;  is  best  expressed  by  one 
word,  GOLD!" 

If  possible,  the  meeting  was  more  enthusiastic 
than  before,  as  this  last  word  found  utterance,  and 
all  agreed  that  the  wonder  of  the  nineteenth  century 
stood  before  them. 

It  was  evident  George  had  advanced  beyond  the 


88  THE     KINGDOM     OF     GOLD 

limits  of  the  paragraph  selected.  The  question 
arose  if  it  would  not  be  better  for  Mr.  Hammond 
to  will  him  to  proceed  with  his  subject  regardless  of 
the  balance  of  the  written  essay,  and  it  was  decided 
to  try  that  experiment.     The  result  was  as  follows: 

"Once  in  possession  of  that  great  central  force, 
which  might  be  compared  to  the  sun,  around  which 
all  smaller  bodies  revolve,  and  by  which  all  are  re- 
strained within  orbits  of  safety,  it  is  useless  to  con- 
sider the  lesser  powers  and  influences,  which  might 
be  compared  to  erratic  comets  or  aerolites  which  oc- 
casionally shoot  across  the  sky.  Having  discovered 
the  power,  use  it!    Knowing  the  right  thing,  do  it! 

"Make  all  other  things  subservient  to  this!  Use 
gold  and  you  will  abide  in  the  "golden  age"!  Sub- 
stitute the  powers  of  gold  for  the  powers  of  govern- 
ment, and  you  shall  possess  The  Kingdom  of  Gold! 

"The  rules  of  action: 

"First: — Enlist  and  combine  as  many  million- 
aires as  possible  in  the  work  of  accumulating  gold. 

"Second: — Make  the  mining  and  storage  of  gold 
the  first  great  object;  the  more  you  horde  it  the 
greater  will  become  its  value  and  powers  for  use. 

"Third: — The  use  to  be  made  of  this  great 
power,  when  sufficient  accumulations  have  been 
made,  must  be  determined  by  your  richest  men; 
those  who  possess  the  greatest  power  should  exer- 
cise it. 

"Fourth: — Let  all  the  gradations  of  governmen- 


THE     KINGDOM     OF     GOLD  89 

tal  powers,  and  social  positions  be  determined  by 
the  amount  of  gold  possessed  by  the  individual. 

"Let  gold  be  the  measure  with  which  to  deter- 
mine or  decide.  If  one  aspires  to  a  place  of  promi- 
nence let  him  secure  the  necessary  gold  to  prove  him 
worthy  of  it.  The  possession  of  gold  is  the  true 
measure  of  ahilii^r 

Profuse  congratulations  were  tendered  to  Mr. 
Hammond  at  the  conclusion  of  these  words,  and 
all  agreed  that  he  had  anticipated  George,  h\  d's- 
covering  the  key  to  the  solution  of  the  great  prob- 
lem which  had  been  their  task;  and  they  also 
pledged  themselves  to  proceed  to  make  practical 
use  of  the  advice  received. 

By  mutual  consent  Mr.  Fisher  was  selected 
chairman,  and  organized  action  was  initiated  by  the 
appomtment  of  a  committee  to  formualte  methods 
of  procedure.  By  the  consent  of  Mr.  Cosgrove, 
George  was  retained  as  Oracle,  to  direct  the'r  fu- 
ture action. 

A  treasurer  was  elected  and  two  million  dollars 
were  subscribed,  and  the  foundation  of  The  King- 
dom of  Cold  was  laid  that  night! 

"Organization 

Chairman : — Charles  Fisher. 
Treasurer: — Byron  Hammond. 
Secretary : — George   Armstrong. 


90  THE     KINGDOM     OF     GOLD 

''Executive  Committee. 

Byron  Hammond. 
Charles  Fisher. 
George  Armstrong. 
Silas  Flood. 
Thomas  Smith. 
David  Hale. 
Henry  Cosgrove." 

TTie  association  was  designated  ''The  Kingdom 
of  GoUr 

Mr,  Armstrong  was  selected  as  secretary  of  the 
committee,  which  made  the  following  report : 
"To  Charles  Fisher,  Esq., 

Chairman  of  the  Kingdom  of  Gold. 
Dear  Sir: — 

We  have  the  pleasure  of  submitting  to  your  hon- 
orable association  the  following  suggestions  which 
have  been  formulated  in  compliance  with  your  re- 
quest. 

"We  have  carefully  perused  the  record  of  the 
marvelous  revelations  made  by  our  Oracle;  and  fol- 
lowing directly  in  the  line  of  that  advice,  recommend 
that  a  standing  committee  be  elected  to  secure  in- 
creased membership;  and  suggest  for  their  guid- 
ance the  following  rules: 

"No  man  to  be  approached  as  a  prospective 
member  until  he  has  been  classified  as  being  worth 
at  least  two  million  dollars. 


THE    KINGDOM     OF     GOLD  91 

"TTie  principles  of  The  Kingdom  of  Gold  to  be 
unfolded  to  him  only  so  far  as  it  is  necessary  to  get 
his  assent,  and  it  shall  always  be  presented  to  him 
as  simply  the  ideas  of  the  one  man  who  thus  at- 
tempts his  conversion. 

"If  he  seems  inclined  to  join  such  an  organization, 
provided  one  was  to  be  formed,  he  is  to  be  put 
under  promise  of  strict  secrecy,  guaranteed  by  a  de- 
posit of  fifty  thousand  dollars,  to  be  forfeited  in  the 
event  he  is  guilty  of  disclosing  the  secrets  of  the  as- 
sociation. 

"All  applicants  are  to  be  admitted  at  a  regular 
meeting  and  are  to  seal  their  pledges  by  a  deposit 
of  not  less  than  one  hundred  thousand  dollars. 

"All  payments  must  be  made  in  gold,  and  all  coin 
to  be  deposited  with  such  Trust  Companies  as  may 
be  designated  at  a  regular  meeting. 

"We  advise  that  the  limit  of  membership  be 
fixed  at  one  thousand;  to  include  in  addition,  as 
partakers  of  the  benefits  of  the  Kingdom,  the  wives 
and  children,  also  the  Father  and  Mother,  and 
Fathers-in-law  and  Mothers-in-law  of  members. 

"We  recommend  that  Mr.  Henry  Cosgrove  and 
his  son  George  Cosgrove,  be  elected  honorary  mem- 
bers without  being  required  to  deposit  money;  and 
to  be  full  participants  in  all  the  privileges  and  ben- 
efits of  the  Kingdom,  and  that  Henry  Cosgrove 
continue  as  a  member  of  the  executive  committee. 

"In  conclusion,  we  recommend  that  our  illustrious 
Oracle  be  consulted  as  to  all  the  details  of  proced- 


92  THE     KINGDOM     OF     GOLD 

ure,  and  that  a  meeting  be  called  for  tomorrow  eve- 
ning, at  which  an  opportunity  can  be  afforded  for 
such  revelations. 

Respectfully  submitted, 

George  Armstrong, 

Secij," 

In  compliance  with  the  report  of  the  committee, 
the  chairman  sent  out  calls  for  a  meeting  on  the  fol- 
lowing night,  and  at  an  early  hour  all  were  pres- 
ent including  George  and  his  father.  The  meeting 
was  called  to  order,  and  the  report  of  the  commit- 
tee read  and  adopted.  The  Cosgroves  were  made 
honorary  members,  and  the  association  immediately 
proceeded  to  business. 

Mr.  Hammond  and  George  were  seated  on  a 
sofa,  the  secretary  at  his  desk,  and  Mr.  Fisher  an- 
nounced that  the  Oracle  could  proceed.  Mr. 
Hammond  taking  George's  hand,  said:  "We  are 
now  congregated  to  receive  instructions  in  detail, 
relating  to  the  carrying  out  of  the  advice  you  have 
given — First,  for  the  accumulating  of  gold;  George 
can  you  advise  us?  As  George  responded  to  this  by 
repeating  the  words  uttered,  and  then  became  si- 
lent, the  chairman  suggested  that  Mr.  Hammond 
had  placed  himself  in  a  negative  condition  by  asking 
a  question;  and  that  he  should  command  George 
to  proceed  to  give  the  advice  on  the  "accumulating 
of  gold." 

Following  this  suggestion  Mr.  Hammond,  with 


THE     KINGDOM     OF    GOLD  93 

his  hand  on  George's  head,  commanded  and  imme- 
diately the  following  was  delivered. 

"As  everything  depends  upon  collecting  a  vast 
supply  of  gold,  your  efforts  should  be  untiring. 

"First  secure  as  rapidly  as  possible  a  member- 
ship of  one  thousand.  Your  subscriptions  from  these 
will  probably  average  two  hundred  thousand  dol- 
lars each.  In  this  way  you  will  secure  a  fund  of 
two  hundred  million  dollars  with  which  to  operate. 

"Second  in  importance  is  your  treasury.  These 
hundreds  of  millions  must  be  put  in  an  absolutely 
secure  place.  A  proper  location  for  the  treasury  is 
high  ground,  where  there  is  solid  rock,  and  at  least 
seventy-five  feet  above  tide  water.  Such  a  site  can 
be  obtained  in  the  upper  part  of  this  city. 

"At  your  next  meeting  particulars  relating  to  its 
construction  will  be  given.  Call  a  meeting  within 
ten  days." 


94  THE     KINGDOM     OF     GOLD 


CHAPTER  IX. 

NINA'S   VOYAGE  TO  SWEDEN :   DISCOVERY  OF 
THE  NAME  OF  JESSE'S  FOSTER-FATHER 

When  the  steamer  arrived  in  London  the  Ford- 
hams  were  met  at  the  dock  by  their  father,  and 
Nina  accompanied  them  to  their  home,  which 
seemed  to  her  Hke  the  palace  of  the  King,  so  grand 
and  beautiful  were  all  the  furnishings  of  the  capa- 
cious mansion,  with  seemingly  innumerable  servants 
to  attend  to  every  want  or  caprice  of  its  occupants. 

She  had  never  formed  a  conception  of  anything 
so  regal  in  appearance,  and  could  hardly  disabuse 
her  mind  of  the  idea  that  she  was  in  the  palace  of 
the  King  and  Queen,  with  prince  and  princess,  who 
had  condescended  to  shelter  and  interest  themselves 
in  the  purposes  of  a  poor  South  Sea  Island  girl. 

The  day  after  their  arrival,  James  Fordham  and 
his  father  went  to  the  importing  house  where  James 
remembered  meeting  with  a  Mr.  Fleming.  As  soon 
as  they  made  known  the  object  of  their  call,  they 
were  informed  that  Mr.  George  Fleming,  formerly 
of  Mystic  Island,  had  been  a  member  of  the  firm. 


THE     KINGDOM     OF     GOLD  95 

and  that  his  widow  still  retained  an  interest  in  the 
business,  under  the  control  of  an  executor.  That 
gentleman  told  them  he  had  heard  Mr.  Fleming 
relate  the  incident  of  the  loss  of  his  son,  Jesse,  when 
a  mere  child ;  how  he  had  floated  out  to  sea  in  a  boat 
after  having  been  made  unconscious  by  lightning. 

They  were  also  informed  of  the  poor  health  of 
Mrs.  Fleming,  and  of  her  departure  for  Mystic  Isl- 
and, accompanied  by  her  son  Howard  and  her  nurse 
and  learned  that  it  would  probably  require  nearly  a 
year  to  get  a  communication  from  her. 

As  this  information  was  so  complete,  and  corre- 
sponded so  perfectly  with  the  statements  made  by 
Nina,  they  entertained  no  doubt  as  to  the  identity 
of  the  father  and  mother  of  Jesse.  They  realized 
that  Nina  would  be  terribly  shocked  to  hear  of  Mr. 
Fleming's  death,  and  the  departure  of  Mrs.  Flem- 
ing. 

James  related  to  his  father  his  plan  for  ofFering 
to  accompany  Miss  Hassen,  if  Julia  could  be  al- 
lowed to  go  with  them  to  Sweden.  This  news  would 
tend  to  discourage  Miss  Hassen,  and  he  felt  it  to 
be  his  duty  to  render  all  the  assistance  which  lay  in 
his  power  to  aid  in  discovering  the  lost  child. 

Mr.  Fordham  knew  of  no  good  reason  why  they 
should  not  go  with  Miss  Hassen,  if  they  were  both 
desirous  of  doing  so,  and  told  his  son  he  would  fur- 
nish the  necessary  funds  and  assist  in  getting  them 
started  as  soon  as  possible,  provided  it  was  agree- 
able to  all  three. 


96  THE     KINGDOM     OF     GOLD 

When  they  arrived  home  they  carefully  avoided 
meeting  Nina,  and  informed  Julia  and  her  mother 
of  the  facts  they  had  discovered,  and  advised  them 
to  try  and  prepare  Nina's  mind  for  the  reception  of 
such  discouraging  news. 

All  endeavors  to  mitigate  the  effects  of  these  sad 
tidings  were  unavailing  and,  as  had  been  anticipated, 
Nina  was  greatly  depressed  when  she  learned  of  the 
death  of  Mr.  Fleming,  and  how  nearly  she  came  to 
meeting  Mrs.  Fleming. 

"Oh!"  she  would  say,  "if  I  could  only  have  told 
Mrs.  Fleming  of  the  news  relating  to  dear  Jesse  and 
that  possibly  he  might  now  be  in  London,  I  am  sure 
it  would  have  restored  her  to  health.  Poor  woman! 
No  wonder  she  is  broken  after  all  the  trials  with 
Jesse  to  lose  her  husband,  such  a  fine,  noble  man! 
He  had  no  superior,  no  equal,  on  Mystic  Island; 
everybody  loved  him!  Oh!  What  sorrow  she  will 
take  with  her  to  his  friends,  to  every  soul  there ! 

"It  is  indeed  dreadful  to  think  of!  And  then 
when  she  gets  there,  she  will  hear  about  Jesse,  and 
want  to  be  back  where  she  could  help  find  him! 
And  she  will  not  know  where  I  am,  or  what  I  am 
doing.  Oh!  I  must  get  away  to  Sweden  as  soon  as 
possible!" 

Julia  tried  to  cheer  and  comfort  her  with  the  hope 
Jesse  might  very  soon  be  found,  and  Mrs.  Ford- 
ham  informed  her  that  they  were  arranging  to  have 
Julia  and  James  accompany  her  to  Sweden,  and  as- 


THE     KINGDOM     OF     GOLD  97 

sist  in  every  way  posisble  to  discover  the  information 
about  the  lost  boy. 

In  a  few  days  preparations  were  completed  and 
all  were  ready  to  start  for  Sweden.  During  this  in- 
terval it  occurred  to  Mr.  Fordham  that  it  would  be 
unnecessary  for  Nina  to  go  to  Sweden,  as  Jesse 
would  probably  be  discovered,  if  at  all,  in  England, 
and  that  search  for  the  newspaper  which  published 
the  articles  could  as  well  be  made  by  James,  and 
Nina  would  be  saved  the  journey.  This  plan  was 
mentioned  to  Nina,  but  she  informed  them  that  she 
had  promised  her  people  to  go  to  Sweden,  and 
search  for  Jesse,  and  that  as  it  had  been  the  home 
of  her  grandparents,  she  desired  to  visit  that  coun- 
try. So  the  arrangements  proposed  by  Mrs.  Ford- 
ham  were  carried  out  and  the  three  started. 

Immediately  after  their  arrival  at  Stockholm  ad- 
vertisements were  published  in  the  papers  having  ex- 
tensive circulation,  and  notices  were  sent  to  all  news- 
papers published  in  seaport  towns,  quoting  the  mu- 
tilated article,  and  asking  for  information.  A  re- 
ward was  offered  for  the  entire  article,  or  any  infor- 
mation which  would  lead  to  the  discovery  of  Jesse. 

Days,  and  finally  weeks  passed  and  nearly  all 
hopes  of  discovering  the  desired  information  had 
faded.  Files  of  all  the  newspapers  in  the  country 
had  been  examined,  and  having  exhausted  every 
means  which  gave  promise  of  success,  the  searchers 
were  preparing  to  return  to  England. 

Nina  alone  continued  to  entertain  hopes  of  find- 


98  THE     KINGDOM     OF     GOLD 

ing  Jesse.  It  may  have  been  because  of  her  inex- 
perience, or  lack  of  judgment  as  to  the  possible 
chances,  and  also  because  she  did  not  realize  how 
exhaustively  all  chances  of  information  had  been 
searched  by  the  methods  adopted  and  carried  out 
by  James  Fordham.  It  may  have  been  because 
she  had  come  so  far,  and  dwelt  so  long  in  anticipa- 
tions. Failure  meant  more  to  her  than  to  the  others. 
How  could  she  return  to  Mystic  Island  without  tid- 
ings from  Jesse?  How  could  she  approach  that 
mother  without  those  words  of  comfort  upon  which 
all  her  hopes,  if  not  her  life  also,  were  by  this  time 
hanging? 

No,  it  could  not  be!  Had  not  Elnathan  Yard- 
ley  taught  them  that  "we  must  learn  to  wait,  for 
there  is  a  right  time,  when  all  that  is  good  and  pleas- 
ant for  us  will  come;  not  when  we  would  like  to 
have  it,  but  when  it  is  best  for  us  to  have  it."  Had 
not  all  her  travels,  which  had  been  looked  forward 
to  by  her  friends  with  so  many  forebodings,  been  as 
safe  and  enjoyable  as  if  planned  by  one  who  pos- 
sessed means  of  making  them  what  they  had  been? 
No,  she  would  not  yet  give  up  hope,  or  abandon  the 
efforts;  if  they  had  to  return  to  England  without  the 
name,  she  might  still  find  Jesse. 

During  the  long  stay  in  Sweden  the  Fordhams 
and  Nina  had  visited  several  places  of  interest,  and 
Nina  had  spent  several  weeks  with  relations  who  re- 
sided in  one  of  the  fertile  valleys  above  Hakner, 
near  the  borders  of  Norway.     But  they  resided  at 


THE     KINGDOM     OF     GOLD  99 

a  private  house  in  Stockholm  during  most  of  the 
time,  as  Nina,  with  her  odd  dress,  had  found  hotels 
too  public  for  her  retiring  nature;  so  a  quiet  home 
was  secured  where  they  boarded. 

James  was  absorbed  in  efforts  to  find  the  news- 
paper, and  devoted  the  greater  part  of  each  day  to 
that  work,  but  gradually  became  discouraged  as  the 
weeks  pased  by.  His  daily  association  with  Nina, 
added  to  the  experience  on  board  the  steamer  com- 
ing from  Melbourne,  had  made  deep  inroads  into 
his  affections,  and  although  he  tried  to  reason  him- 
self out  of  this  growing  fondness,  he  daily  became 
more  attached,  and  felt  that  he  must  either  manage 
to  leave  her  altogether,  or  express  his  feelings.  He 
realized  the  difficulties  of  confining  this  wild-flower 
of  the  sunny  seas,  to  the  social  limits  of  London  life, 
and  the  natural  opposition  to  be  encountered  from 
his  family  and  friends.  But  he  well  knew,  if  once 
she  consented  to  be  his  wife,  and  would  appear  in 
London  as  she  had  on  that  memorable  occasion  on 
the  steamship,  that  all  social  troubles  would  be  at 
an  end. 

In  fact,  it  was  the  transformed  being  which  rested 
on  his  arm  before  the  mirror  that  had  engaged  his 
thoughts  and  captivated  his  affections,  and  not  the 
modest  child  of  Mystic  Island.  For  Nina  had  not 
been  guilty  of  conscious  effort  to  appear  anything 
but  the  simple  maiden  she  was ;  and  no  such  thoughts 
as  those  entertained  by  James  Fordham  had  ever 
entered  her  mind  or  engaged  her  attention. 


100  THE     KINGDOM     OF     GOLD 

It  was  an  afternoon  in  the  last  days  of  August 
that  a  lad  entered  the  office  of  James  Fordham  and 
presented  a  sheet  which  contained  the  long  sought 
for  item.  It  was  ''Der  Vaktman"  and  had  been 
published  in  Gottenborg.  It  had  but  a  very  short- 
lived existence,  as  it  was  destroyed  by  fire  about 
three  weeks  after  its  first  issue.  No  files  of  the  news- 
paper were  preserved.  This  copy  was  found  by  a 
woman  who  was  cleaning  one  of  the  rooms  in  her 
house  and,  in  glancing  over  it,  she  chanced  to  notice 
the  article,  and  to  recall  that  a  reward  had  been 
offered  for  something  of  that  kind.  She  sent  her 
boy  with  it  to  the  office,  and  so  for  the  first  time,  the 
name  of  Jesse's  foster-father  became  known. 

James  Fordham  was  greatly  excited  and  very 
happy  over  the  final  success  of  their  efforts.  He 
asked  the  boy  if  he  was  to  receive  the  reward  and 
the  boy  had  replied  by  saying  his  mother  would 
come  for  it.  Young  Fordham  asked  if  he  had  far 
to  go,  and  learning  that  the  house  was  near,  of- 
fered to  go  with  him  and  pay  the  mother. 

As  they  walked  along  the  street  the  lad  said  his 
mother  had  told  him  that  this  lost  boy  was  "a  grown 
man  now,"  and  he  wanted  to  know  if  that  was  so. 

James  Fordham  had  always  considered  Jesse, 
as  Nina  had  continually  described  him,  as  a  child. 
Had  he  given  the  subject  a  moment's  thought,  he 
would  have  concluded  Jesse  was  now  grown.  He 
had  not,  however,  until  this  moment  reaHzed  that 
they  were  looking  for  a  man !     His  mind  immediate- 


THE     KINGDOM     OF     GOLD  101 

ly  reverted  to  Nina,  and  he  wondered  if  she  ever 
thought  of  him  as  a  man,  and  indeed  might  there 
not  be  a  deeper  cause  than  had  before  been  con- 
jectured, for  her  earnest  endeavors,  her  wilHngness 
to  go  around  the  world  alone  to  find  Jesse?  Had 
he  not,  after  all,  wasted  his  affections  on  one  whose 
love  had  already  centered  on  another? 

Why  she  was  not  interested  in  European  man- 
ners and  ways  now  became  evident,  for  was  not  he 
whom  she  sought  a  "child  of  the  South  Sea  Islands" 
also?  Was  it  possible  he  could  not  possess  the 
image  he  had  worshipped?  The  dreams  of  capti- 
vating society  with  her  matchless  face  and  form 
were  but  dreams! 

The  boy  by  his  side  continued  to  press  questions, 
but  received  no  answers  from  the  man  accompany- 
ing him.  They  had  now  reached  the  humble  cot- 
tage which  had  held  the  secret  so  long,  and  the 
mother  stood  at  the  door. 

James  Fordham  paid  the  offered  reward,  but  if 
he  spoke  to  the  woman  he  did  not  remember.  He 
turned  and  strolled  toward  their  boarding  house. 
The  very  important  newspaper  had  been  thrust  into 
his  pocket;  his  mind  was  almost  wild  with  thoughts 
of  Nina,  and  the  manner  in  which  he  had  allowed 
himself  to  think  he  might  sometime  possess  her  as 
his  wife.  But  for  that  question  by  the  boy,  he 
would  have  been  going  with  a  rapid  pace.  He 
would  have  been  thinking  of  the  joy  he  was  bring- 
ing to  Nina  and  Julia,  and  his  enthusiasm  at  getting 


102  THE     KINGDOM     OF     GOLD 

possession  of  the  desired  information  would  have 
been  unbounded.  But  now  he  was  approaching  his 
companions  as  one  going  to  his  doom! 

It  happened  the  door  was  locked  and  he  could 
not  enter  without  knocking.  Nina  opened  the  door 
and  saw  that  something  had  happened.  She  asked 
anxiously  if  he  were  ill  or  injured,  and  the  paper 
was  handed  to  her  without  a  word  of  reply,  while 
they  advanced  into  the  room. 

Nina  was  confused.  She  sank  into  a  chair  and 
asked  if  it  was  "something  dreadful!" 

James  replied  that  the  paper  was  the  one  they 
had  been  seeking;  that  the  article  was  there;  that 
— Nina,  too  eager  to  wait  and  forgetting  all  con- 
siderations of  propriety,  was  perusing  the  article 
while  James,  filled  with  indignation  at  the  abrupt 
disregard  shown,  would  have  left  the  room  but  for 
the  timely  arrival  of  Julia,  who,  reahzing  something 
startling  had  occurred,  advanced  and  begged  him 
to  tell  her  what  had  happened. 

By  this  time  Nina  had  read  the  item  and  bound- 
ing to  her  feet,  was  repeating  the  name  of  "Cos- 
grove!  Henry  Cosgrove! !  who  resides  in  England!" 

"Why  is  this  what  ails  you,  James?"  inquired 
Julia. 

And  Nina  answered  that  she  thought  the  good 
news  had  in  some  way  affected  him. 

James  replied  that  it  had  proved  far  more  star- 
tling than  he  had  anticipated.  He  tried  to  control 
his  feelings  and  converse  composedly  about  it,  but 


THE     KINGDOM     OF     GOLD  103 

Nina  was  so  overjoyed  and  plied  questions  so  rap- 
idly that  young  Fordham  found  himself  driven  into 
a  new  field  of  operations,  and  his  mind,  for  a  time, 
absorbed  with  other  business  than  he  would  have 
chosen  for  himself. 

"Cosgrove,  Henry  Cosgrove,"  repeated  Nina. 
"Don't  you  know  anybody  by  the  name  of  Cosgrove 
in  London,  Mr.  Fordham?  Have  you  not  heard 
the  name  of  Cosgrove,  Julia?" 

Julia  had  replied  before  the  question  was  fin- 
ished, that  she  knew  a  family  by  the  name  of  Cos- 
grove. "Don't  you  know  Richard  Cosgrove, 
James?  That  young  fellow  who  won  the  prize  at 
cricket  last  autumn?" 

"Oh  yes!  I  do  remember  him;  but  his  father  is 
not  the  gentleman  described  in  that  paper." 

"Well,"  interrupted  Nina,  "they  may  have  rel- 
atives, and  those  relatives  other  relatives.  I  am  sure 
we  shall  find  Jesse!  Oh!  I  am  so  happy,  I  do  not 
know  what  to  say  or  do!  What  shall  we  do?  Shall 
we  go  right  off  to  London?" 

Julia  thought  they  should  go  in  the  morning;  and 
James  said  there  was  nothing  further  to  remain  for, 
that  the  sooner  they  were  back  to  London  the  bet- 
ter. 

The  girls  were  soon  busy  packing  their  trunks 
for  the  journey,  and  the  following  day  found  them 
on  their  way  to  the  great  city. 

Seated  in  the  cabin  of  the  steamer  on  their  return 
to  London,  the  conversation  being  about  the  finding 


104  THE     KINGDOM     OF     GOLD 

of  the  newspaper,  Julia  was  asking  her  brother  what 
kind  of  appearing  woman  it  was  who  had  found  it, 
and  what  her  name  was.  James  said  he  had  for- 
gotten if  he  had  asked;  he  was  so  excited  he  con- 
cluded he  forgot  to  ask. 

Julia  thought  that  "awfully  stupid"  but  James 
made  no  reply. 

"I  was  thinking,  Nina,  about  the  age  of  Jesse; 
this  paper  says  he  was  a  child ;  but  does  not  mention 
the  exact  age.    How  old  was  he  then?" 

"About  eight  years  old,"  replied  Nina. 

"Well,  let  me  see.  Why!  He  must  be  a  man 
now!"  said  Julia. 

James  was  not  stupid  now,  if  he  had  been  on 
another  occasion,  but  was  eager  to  notice  Nina's 
face  and  her  reply. 

"Yes,"  said  Nina,  "we  were  very  nearly  of  the 
same  age;    he  is  past  twenty  now." 

There  was  no  trace  of  other  than  ordinary 
thoughts  in  that  calm,  yet  earnest  face  and  James 
could  detect  nothing  to  indicate  her  feelings. 

There  was  quiet  for  a  few  moments,  when  Julia 
continued:  "I  have  been  thinking,  Nina,  that  as 
it  is  a  young  man,  and  not  a  child,  (as  I  have  al- 
ways thought  Jesse  to  be)  that  you  are  trying  to 
find;  perhaps  you  are  more  than  ordinarily  inter- 
ested in  his  discovery,  especially  as  he  is  about  your 
own  age!" 

"Oh!"  repHed  Nina,  blushing  slightly,  "I  have 
always  thought  of  him  as  a  child,  and  although  I 


THE     KINGDOM     OF     GOLD  105 

know  he  is  a  grown  man  by  this  time,  I  have  only- 
thought  of  a  child  as  I  have  tried  to  find  him.  It 
may  be  I  shall  not  recognize  him  if  I  meet  him. 
But  to  me  he  has  only  been  a  poor  blind  and  dumb 
boy.  I  have  wondered  why  he  has  never  been 
able  to  inform  anybody  where  he  belonged,  and 
that  we  heard  nothing  from  him." 

James  had  noted  every  word  and  expression,  as 
Nina  uttered  these  sentences,  and  when  she  had 
finished  he  felt  creeping  back  into  his  mind  some  of 
the  old  thoughts  and  feelings. 

"It  may  be  possible,  yet,"  he  thought,  "if  she  has 
not  set  her  heart  on  Jesse,  and  from  what  she  says 
she  seems  never  to  have  thought  of  him  as  a  possi- 
ble husband." 

Nina  had  spoken  truly.  Never  had  she  thought 
of  Jesse  as  becoming  her  husband.  But  this  sug- 
gestion of  Julia's  set  Nina's  heart  and  head  at  work. 
Another  new  world  had  sprung  into  being!  She 
became  absorbed  in  thoughts  such  as  had  never 
before  found  expression  through  her  brain. 

These  fragments  of  conversation  had  kindled 
two  minds,  and  James  was  quite  himself  again  in 
a  little  time  thereafter.  But  Nina  was  quite  a  dif- 
ferent person  from  her  former  self  of  a  few  mo- 
ments previous.  Had  she  been  approached  by 
James  one  hour  ago,  what  the  result  might  have 
been  could  readily  be  conjectured  provided  he  had 
consented  to  accompany  her  to  Mystic  Island,  after 
Jesse  was  found,  for  at  least  a  short  stay.     But 


106  THE     KINGDOM     OF     GOLD 

now  the  gates  had  been  opened,  and  the  affec- 
tions had  clustered  around,  peeping  out  at  an  image 
known  only  to  the  mind  of  Nina  Hassen.  The 
heart  had  commenced  its  preparations  for  the  re- 
ception of  a  guest!  Once  the  currents  of  love  have 
started  to  flow  in  one  direction  it  is  with  great  diffi- 
culty they  can  be  divided. 

James  Fordham  arose,  asked  to  be  excused,  and 
went  up  on  deck,  where  he  paced  to  and  fro,  his 
mind  exercised  to  intenseness.  He  had  resolved  to 
approach  Nina  on  the  subject  of  becoming  his  wife, 
and  to  do  so  this  day,  as  by  tomorrow  Jesse 
Fleming  might  be  discovered,  and  then  it  might  be 
too  late. 

Having  passed  through  the  ordeal  of  disappoint- 
ment, as  he  supposed,  a  second  blow  could  add 
but  little  to  his  sorrow,  and  it  was  possible  that  joy 
might  be  substituted.  He  would  risk  a  trial  at  the 
very  first  opportunity. 

He  returned  to  the  cabin  and  found  Nina  alone, 
Julia  had  gone  to  her  room  to  take  a  nap.  Nina 
might  have  been  dozing  also  had  not  the  remarks 
of  Julia  driven  all  drowsiness  or  anything  of  kin 
to  it,  away.  She  was  so  absorbed  in  thoughts  of 
Jesse,  that  she  did  not  notice  the  approach  of  James, 
until  his  hand  rested  on  her  shoulder,  and  he  asked 
her  if  he  might  take  the  seat  beside  her;  to  which 
she  assented,  and  he  immediately  proceeded  in  this 
wise. 

"Miss    Hassen,     excuse    me — Nina — I — some- 


THE     KINGDOM     OF     GOLD  107 

times  forget  that  you  wish  us  to  call  you  Nina — 
I  really  hope  you  will  allow  me  to  call  you  Nina. 
May  I  add  dear  to  that  sweet  name?" 

Nina  blushed  but  could  not  speak. 

He  continued:  "Nina,  you  may  not  have  been 
aware  of  it,  but  my  heart  has  been  yours  for  months, 
and  I  could  not  allow  you  to  return  to  London 
without  telling  you  of  it,  and  asking  you  to  become 
my  wife.  I  know  you  will  think  this  abrupt  and 
unseemly,  but  I  cannot  withhold  my  words  any 
longer.  If  you  will  consent  to  marry  me  I  will 
endeavor  to  make  your  life  as  bright  and  full  of 
happiness,  as  that  of  any  wife  in  London,  and  I 
know  your  beautiful  face  will  be  welcome  any- 
where." 

Nina,  crimson  with  blushes  at  this  powerful  fusi- 
lade  discharged  at  the  citadel  of  her  heart,  was  so 
embarrassed  as  to  be  unable  to  reply,  and  James, 
seeing  her  confusion,  added,  "You  may  think  of 
what  I  have  said,  and  answer  when  you  feel  com- 
posed. I  realize  your  embarrassment,  Nina,  and  I 
will  retire  that  you  may  consider  my  proposal."  And 
James  hastily  returned  to  the  deck  and  paced  to 
and  fro  not  knowing  what  to  expect. 

Nina  hurried  to  her  room  and  threw  herself  on 
to  the  bed,  giving  way  to  tears,  for  she  could  not 
collect  her  thoughts,  and  knew  not  what  to  do,  so 
bewildering  were  the  events  of  the  past  hour. 

There  are  tears  of  sorrow  and  of  joy;  Nina's 
were  tears  of  perplexity  and,  as  they  cleared  the 


108  THE     KINGDOM     OF     GOLD 

mental  vision,  two  views  appeared.  One,  was  life 
in  London,  with  the  Fordhams,  with  all  the  luxu- 
ries she  had  observed  during  her  stay  there;  society 
with  all  its  allurements,  the  privileges  and  benefits 
arising  from  the  possession  of  wealth,  which  prom- 
ised all  that  the  heart  might  desire;  and  James 
Fordham,  who  had  been  so  kind  and  attentive,  an 
affectionate  and  devoted  husband. 

The  other  was  the  form  she  had  played  with  on 
Mystic  Island.  She  saw  Jesse  Fleming  floating 
away  through  the  breakers  out  on  the  boundless 
ocean,  and  her  heart's  desires,  pivoted  as  a  com- 
pass, continually  toward  him.  And  now  he  stood 
before  her  in  the  stature  of  manhood,  blind  and 
dumb!  She  took  his  hand  and  led  him  to  his 
mother.  He  was  restored!  but  his  life  was  one  of 
silence  and  utter  darkness.  Sympathy,  benevolence, 
affection,  intensified  by  years  of  anxious  waiting, 
sprang  forth  to  consummation!  The  decision  had 
been  reached. 

She  felt  great  sorrow  and  sympathy  for  James 
Fordham,  for  she  believed  every  word  he  uttered. 
How  could  she  in  any  way  comfort  him?  She  im- 
mediately thought  of  Julia,  and  hastening  to  her 
room,  informed  her  of  what  her  brother  had  said, 
and  asked  her  help  in  conveying  her  answer  in  such 
way,  as  to  cause  as  little  pain  as  possible,  and  to 
assure  him  of  her  sympathy. 

Julia  was  always  equal  to  undertaking  almost 
anything,  and  especially  the  management  of  James. 


THE    KINGDOM     OF    GOLD  109 

So  she  smoothed  the  troubled  face  with  a  gentle 
stroke  of  the  hand  and  an  assuring  kiss,  and  dis- 
appeared in  search  of  her  brother. 

She  introduced  the  subject  by  saying,  she  had 
iust  left  Nina  who  had  come  to  her  in  distress,  and 
blamed  herself  for  having  been  the  cause  of  his 
present  perplexities.  She  chided  him  for  allowing 
his  feelings  to  go  so  far  as  to  think  of  marrying  such 
an  uneducated  child  of  nature,  and  tried  to  convince 
him  that  he  should  be  thankful  for  escaping  from 
such  an  undesirable  attachment. 

As  on  a  former  occasion  she  had  managed  to  ad- 
just the  strained  feelings  existing  between  them,  so 
now  she  urged  her  brother  to  lay  aside  all  appear- 
ances of  dissatisfaction,  and  make  the  discovery  of 
Jesse  the  absorbing  theme  of  conversation. 


no  THE     KINGDOM     OF     GOLD 


CHAPTER  X. 

THE  "  KINGDOM  OF  GOLD."    SECURING  AND 
STORING  GOLD 

Complying  with  the  instructions  of  the  Oracle, 
the  members  of  The  Kingdom  of  Gold  met  to  re- 
ceive the  particulars  relating  to  the  treasury,  and 
the  following  details  were  given. 

"Secure  a  lot  not  less  than  two  hundred  feet 
square,  employ  able  engineers,  and  construct  in  the 
center  of  this  lot,  a  steel  treasury  house,  in  the  fol- 
V»wing  manner. 

"Make  an  excavation  fifty  feet  in  diameter,  and 
fifty  feet  deep.  At  the  centre  of  this  bottom  lay 
a  cast  steel  step,  six  feet  square,  six  inches  thick  at 
the  edge,  and  twelve  inches  in  thickness  at  the  cen- 
tre, with  a  socket  for  receiving  a  shaft  twelve  inches 
in  diameter. 

"This  shaft  should  be  thirty  feet  in  length,  and 
stand  upright. 

"Around  this  shaft,  and  attached  to  it,  should 
be  sixteen  steel  trusses,  extending  from  the  top  of 
the  shaft  to  within  twenty  inches  of  the  bottom  of 


THE     KINGDOM     OF    GOLD  1  1  1 

the  shaft,  and  outward,  on  the  bottom  cord,  in  a 
direct  hne  at  right  angles  to  the  shaft  twenty  feet. 

"The  top  cord  should  be  curved,  and  extend 
from  the  top  of  the  shaft,  to  the  top  of  the  outer  up- 
right, which  should  be  twenty  feet  in  height,  and 
between  these  cords  roof  beams  covered  with  heavy 
steel  plates. 

"Four  of  these  trusses  should  be  soHd  and  twelve 
open;  in  this  way  four  separate  compartments  will 
be  established.  Place  heavy  floor  beams  between 
the  bottom  cords,  and  heavy  steel  plates  for  the 
floor. 

"On  the  bottom  of  these  trusses  attach  a  circular 
toothed  rack,  thirty  feet  in  diameter;  for  revolving 
the  whole  structure. 

"At  opposite  sides  of  this  circle,  excavate  for 
electric  motors,  and  attach  with  pinions  to  the  rack, 
to  revolve  the  treasury  house. 

"Lay  a  track  of  heavy  steel  rails  thirty-eight  feet 
in  diameter  and  attach  friction  rollers  to  the  bot- 
tom of  the  trusses,  to  carry  the  unbalanced  weight. 

"Cover  the  whole  of  the  exterior  with  steel  plates 
one-half  inch  thick,  leaving  openings  for  entrance 
to  each  compartment,  and  for  ventilation  at  the 
top.  Construct  strong  doors  for  each  entrance,  and 
place  a  gattling  gun  at  each  door. 

"Openings  for  intercommunication  between  the 
compartments  are  necessary,  with  strong  doors,  and 
suspended  tracks  equipped  with  trolleys  extending 


1  1 2  THE    KINGDOM     OF    GOLD 

through  all  the  compartments  for  distributing  and 
handling  the  gold. 

"When  completed,  this  will  be  a  sub-surface  re- 
volving fortress,  capable  of  withstanding  any  at- 
tack likely  to  occur  during  the  first  period  of  the 
Kingdom. 

"The  whole  excavation  should  be  covered  with 
a  suitable  steel  dome;  and  admittance  to  the  treas- 
ury house,  made  by  two  tunnels,  one  connecting 
with  the  outer  entrance  and  thence  to  the  street,  and 
the  other  with  the  power  house. 

"This  power  house  will  contain  the  necessary  ma- 
chinery for  generating  the  electricity,  and  should  be 
equipped  with  immense  storage  batteries,  to  bridge 
over  any  accident  that  may  occur. 

"To  detect  any  attempt  to  undermine  the  treas- 
ury, bore  four  inch  wells,  at  intervals  of  four  feet 
apart,  around  the  bottom  of  the  excavation,  two  feet 
from  the  outside,  and  extend  these  twenty-five  feet 
below  tide  water  level. 

"Supply  your  treasury  with  arms  and  ammunition 
to  equip  the  occupants,  so  that  they  can  repulse  any 
attempt  to  invade  the  treasury.  And  construct  an 
alarm  system,  which  will  notify  the  authorities,  in 
the  event  of  a  sudden  attack  made  by  a  mob. 

"Into  this  structure,  as  speedily  as  possible,  store 
your  gold.  And  convert  your  possessions  into  the 
precious  metal  as  rapidly  as  you  can. 

"Send  your  engineers  to  the  various  gold  fields 


THE     KINGDOM     OF     GOLD  113 

throughout  the  world,  and  select  the  most  produc- 
tive mines  for  your  operations. 

"That  your  operations  may  not  be  understood  by 
the  public,  you  will  exercise  great  care,  in  having 
the  work  go  on  in  such  manner  as  to  appear  to  be 
of  a  different  character  from  what  it  really  is. 

"Allow  only  parts  of  your  plans  to  be  known  to 
any  individual,  outside  your  members ;  and  the  more 
you  divide  the  work  the  better. 

"It  would  be  well,  as  a  preliminary  to  your  great 
mining  operations,  to  mislead  the  public,  by  buying 
up  and  forming  trusts  of  large  productive  enter- 
prises, which  you  can  convert  into  gold  at  the 
proper  time. 

"It  will  be  necessary  to  control  numerous  banks, 
so  that  you  can  co-operate  with  the  government  in 
manipulating  silver  and  bonds,  to  suit  your  purposes. 

"The  difficulties  which  will  arise,  when  your 
plans  for  hoarding  gold  become  evident  will  require 
special  attention,  and  as  occasion  demands  the  di- 
rections will  be  given." 

At  the  conclusion  of  these  words,  which  had  been 
carefully  taken  down  by  the  secretary,  there  was, 
as  on  previous  occasions,  much  enthusiasm  mani- 
fested. 

Mr.  Hale  asked  the  privilege  of  making  a  few 
remarks,  in  which  he  congratulated  the  members 
on  the  auspicious  beginning  that  had  been  outlined, 
and  added  that  it  occurred  to  him  since  the  last 
meeting  that  it  would  be  a  good  scheme  to  form  an 


114  THE     KINGDOM     OF     GOLD 

immense  Trust,  and  secure  as  many  established  en- 
terprises as  possible,  as  a  preparatory  step  toward 
securing  gold;  and  he  wished  to  acknowledge  his 
complete  approval  of  the  whole  plan  as  now  out- 
lined by  the  Oracle. 

The  presiding  officer  remarked,  that  the  forma- 
tion of  a  permanent  committee,  with  power  to  act 
regarding  the  acquisition  of  the  mines  had  occurred 
to  him,  and  that  all  the  advice  seemed  eminently 
practical. 

Mr.  Hammond  followed,  and  said  the  great  sub- 
ject which  he  had  been  considering  since  the  last 
meeting,  had  been  solved  to  his  entire  satisfaction; 
that  was,  when,  and  how  such  immense  treasure 
could  be  safely  stored.  Among  other  things  he  had 
thought  of  a  structure  deep  down  in  the  solid  rock. 
Now  he  felt  they  were  ready  for  action. 

TTie  secretary  reported  the  addition  of  fifteen 
members  to  the  organization,  which  now  numbered 
forty-six. 

The  treasurer  reported  subscriptions  all  paid  up 
to  date,  amounting  to  nine  millions  two  hundred 
thousand  dollars. 

The  chair  announced  as  a  "Committee  on  Mines" 
the  names  of  eleven  members,  and  requested  the  sec- 
retary to  prepare  copies  of  the  instructions  for  their 
use. 

A  "Committee  on  Construction  of  Treasury"  was 
also  appointed,  and  the  meeting  adjourned  for  one 
week. 


THE    KINGDOM    OF    GOLD  1  1 5 

At  the  following  meeting  Mr.  Hammond  ad- 
dressed the  members  at  considerable  length,  on  the 
propriety  of  admitting  foreigners  to  membership.  He 
said  he  had  good  reason  to  believe  that  prominent 
millionaires  abroad  were  ready  to  join,  if  the  plan 
was  made  known  to  them;  and  that  from  informa- 
tion obtained,  he  had  no  doubt  several  hundred 
members  could  be  secured  in  Europe. 

Mr.  Flood  suggested  that  the  Oracle  should  be 
consulted  on  all  important  matters,  and  Mr.  Ham- 
mond added  that  he  only  made  the  suggestion  to 
determine  the  propriety  of  asking  for  information 
on  that  subject. 

The  "Committee  on  Mines"  reported  that  sev- 
eral mining  experts  had  been  consulted,  and  that  a 
fund  of  information  had  been  secured  for  future  use. 

The  "Committee  on  Treasury  Building"  reported 
progress,  but  found  it  difficult  to  proceed  rapidly. 
They  had  employed  eminent  engineers  to  prepare 
plans  'for  the  structure,  as  if  it  were  to  be  erected 
in  the  rich  mining  districts  of  Mexico,  to  hold  im- 
mense collections  of  silver  ore,  to  be  placed  above 
ground  and  revolve  so  as  to  be  self-protecting,  with 
the  aid  of  a  few  men  inside  to  defend  it. 

Preliminary  examinations  indicated  that  there 
would  be  difficulty  in  getting  permission  from  the 
city  to  make  such  an  excavation  as  was  required, 
without  describing  in  detail  all  parts  of  the  structure 
to  be  erected. 

The  secretary  reported  the  addition  of  twenty- 


1  1 6  THE     KINGDOM     OF    GOLD 

four  new  members,  and  the  treasurer  reported  "four- 
teen million  dollars  on  hand." 

The  presiding  officer  proposed  the  Oracle  be  now 
consulted,  and  there  being  no  objection  Mr.  Ham- 
mond was  asked  to  take  a  seat  by  George. 

Mr.  Hammond  suggested  that  as  they  had  suc- 
ceeded so  well  on  previous  occasions  by  Mr.  Ham- 
mond's making  a  verbal  statement  before  willing 
George  to  reply,  that  he  should  so  proceed  on  this 
occasion;  as  it  prepared  the  meeting  for  receiving 
the  revelations. 

Following  the  suggestion  Mr.  Hammond  said: 
"We  consider  it  proper  and  desirable  that  capital- 
ists in  foreign  countries  should  be  admitted  to  mem- 
bership; will  you  instruct  us?     I  will  a  reply." 

George  replied  as  follows: 

"You  should  proceed  with  great  care  across  the 
water.  It  will  be  impossible  to  get  their  gold  shipped 
to  this  country  for  storage.  The  proper  way  is  to 
organize  a  separate,  but  associated  body  there,  and 
allow  them  to  hold  their  own  gold,  during  the  first 
period  of  the  kingdom.  Let  the  instructions  so  far 
given  answer  for  both  countries." 

Mr.  Hammond  then  said,  "TTiere  will  be  dif- 
ficulty in  getting  the  city  to  approve  of  our  struc- 
ture, have  you  any  advice  to  offer?     I  will  a  reply." 

George  answered,  "That  was  to  be  expected;  the 
time  to  act  has  not  yet  arrived.  Push  on,  and  the 
necessary  word,  which  is  now  in  waiting  will,  when 
the  time  comes,  be  given." 


THE     KINGDOM     OF     GOLD  1  1 7 

Mr.  Hammond  was  greatly  surprised  at  this  re- 
ply, which  indicated  that  the  whole  plan  and  its  re- 
sults were  a  matter  of  foreknowledge  with  the  Ora- 
cle. He  suggested  to  the  meeting  that  it  might  be  a 
proper  question  to  propound,  if  the  future  could  be 
outlined. 

As  this  proposition  was  quite  an  innovation,  Mr. 
Fisher  thought  it  should  receive  the  consideration 
of  the  meeting;  and  a  motion  authorizing  Mr.  Ham- 
mond to  prepare  and  ask  such  a  question,  was  unan- 
imously adopted. 

The  question  was  as  follows:  "Our  Oracle  seems 
to  know  the  future,  as  well  as  the  present;  will  he 
outline  the  workings  of  the  Kingdom  of  Gold?  I  so 
will." 

To  this  George  replied:  "The  future  opens  up  to 
view  hke  a  panorama,  and  I  will  endeavor  to  de- 
scribe the  scenes  as  they  succeed  each  other. 

"The  membership  list  is  large,  and  includes  the 
wealthy  of  many  nations.  Immense  industries  are 
controlled  by  one  central  body;  and  the  lower 
classes  are  organizing  to  overthrow  what  is  termed 
the  'King  of  Monopolies.' 

"The  productions  of  gold  are  so  enormous,  that 
fears  are  entertained,  that  its  monetary  value  will 
be  destroyed. 

"Wealth  is  becoming  centralized ;  and  many  fail- 
ures are  occurring  among  the  middle  classes.  The 
government  is  constantly  changing  from  one  policy 


1  1 8  THE    KINGDOM    OF    GOLD 

to  another  in  the  hope  of  alleviating  the  troubles 
which  continually  agitate  the  country. 

"Various  reforms  are  inaugurated  which  scarcely 
last  through  one  administration,  when  a  new  phase 
appears. 

"Immense  issues  of  paper  money  flood  the  coun- 
try, and  result  in  the  failure  of  many  moneyed  in- 
stitutions. 

"A  reaction  takes  place,  and  silver  and  gold 
become  the  chief  mediums  of  exchange. 

"Temperance  reformers  succeed  in  passing  pro- 
hibitory laws  in  nearly  all  the  states;  and  the  man- 
ufacture and  sale  of  intoxicating  liquors  are  almost 
entirely  suppressed.  The  treasure  house  of  "The 
Kingdom  of  Gold"  is  being  filled  preparatory  to 
the  great  trouble  pending. 

"Labor  has  organized  throughout  the  country, 
and  capitalists  are  preparing  to  protect  their  pos- 
sessions. 

"Members  of  'The  Kingdom  of  Gold'  reside 
chiefly  in  New  York.  Many  of  them  occupy  houses 
modeled  after  the  treasury  structure.  Their  dwell- 
ings are  constructed  almost  entirely  of  steel  and 
glass,  on  the  exterior,  and  revolve  at  will,  by  touch- 
ing a  button,  rapidly  or  slowly,  coincident  with  the 
sunshine  when  desired,  and  easily  brought  into  any 
desired  position,  to  secure  a  cooling  breeze,  or  pro- 
tection from  unpleasant  winds.  They  are  supplied 
with  Gattling  guns  and  portholes,  and  in  cases  of 
necessity  are  absolutely  secure. 


THE     KINGDOM     OF     GOLD  119 

"Great  improvements  are  being  made  in  generat- 
ing and  using  magnetic  force,  and  all  the  inventions 
relating  to  it  have  been  purchased  by  The  Kingdom 
of  Gold,  and  are  kept  secret  from  the  rest  of  the 
world. 

"Immense  machine  shops,  entirely  under  its 
control,  are  constructing  engines  many  fold  more 
powerful  than  anything  now  in  use !  And  this  power 
is  to  be  used  chiefly  on  the  water.  The  end  of  the 
first  period  of  the  Kingdom  is  fast  approaching,  and 
preparations  are  being  made  to  transfer  the  seat  of 
power  to  the  new  and  permanent  home  selected, 
which  is  in  the  South  Sea  Islands;  for  New  York 
is  fast  becoming  a  place  unsafe  for  the  members, 
and  for  the  immense  accumulation  of  gold. 

"Great  ships  are  being  built  after  an  entirely  new 
model.  They  have  been  tested  and  found  to  be 
able  to  go  over  two  hundred  miles  an  hour;  and  it 
is  by  the  exclusive  use  of  these  vessels,  propelled  by 
this  secret  magnetic  power,  that  the  members  of  the 
Kingdom  will  be  able  to  protect  themselves,  and 
become  absolute  rulers  of  the  world ! 

"All  those  who  are  engaged  in  making  these  ves- 
sels are  separated  from  the  outside  world,  and  paid 
more  than  double  ordinary  wages;  provided  with 
every  comfort,  and  promised  high  positions  in  the 
future. 

"As  soon  as  all  is  ready  for  the  change,  all  those 
who  possess  information  which  will  enable  them  to 
divulge  secrets  of  value  are  to  be  transported  to  the 


120  THE    KINGDOM    OF    GOLD 

new  held  of  action,  and  kept  in  confinement,  but 
supported  in  luxury,  with  all  desirable  means  of  com- 
fort and  enjoyment. 

"  Ihese  great  ships,  to  the  number  of  twenty-four, 
rendezvous  m  an  Atoll,  located  in  a  group  of  islands. 
The  coral  belt  has  four  artificial  channels  opening' 
through  it  for  admitting  the  ships,  and  inside,  on 
the  calm  waters  is  sufficient  space  to  accommodate 
all  in  safety. 

"Each  vessel,  and  all  its  machinery,  is  made  of  a 
composite  metal,  which  possesses  greater  strength 
than  steel,  and  is  proof  against  all  corrosion.  It  re- 
sists the  action  of  the  most  powerful  acids,  and  in 
appearance  is  more  hke  gold  than  iron. 

"It  is  so  fine  in  structural  formation,  that  it  re- 
ceives a  polish  finer  than  any  metal  now  in  use,  and 
the  wearmg  parts  of  machinery  are  subject  to  so  lit- 
tle friction  that  they  require  no  additional  lubrica- 
tion. Once  constructed  the  Great  Ships  and  all  their 
machinery  will  last  for  ages ! 

"The  islands  surrounding  this  Atoll  are  occupied 
by  beautiful  structures,  which  contain  wealth,  the 
beautiful  in  art,  and  the  immense  libraries,  labora- 
tories, observatories,  conservatories  of  music,  thea- 
tres, cathedrals,  parks,  gardens,  and  the  Temple,  in 
which  is  located  the  great  treasury  where  the  gold 
is  stored. 

"The  Temple  is  completely  covered  with  pure 
gold;  also  all  the  interior  furnishings. 

"The  seat  of  the  President  is  a  soHd  gold  chair; 


THE     KINGDOM     OF     GOLD  121 

and  in  the  treasury  and  on  board  the  great  ships  is 
accumulated  more  than  half  of  all  the  gold  coin 
in  the  world ;  and  nine-tenths  of  all  the  gold  bullion. 
"The  Temple  is  built  on  a  very  small  island, 
which  it  almost  covers,  and  surrounding  it,  at  all 
times,  are  four  of  the  immense  ships,  ploughing 
through  the  waves  at  a  speed  of  one  hundred  to  two 
hundred  miles  an  hour. 

"All  these  ships  are  so  constructed  as  to  do  double 
duty.  They  are  both  pleasure  yachts  and  destroy- 
ers! 

"Each  has  a  sharp  prow,  extending  to  a  cutting 
edge,  made  of  this  hard  metal,  and  so  heavy,  that 
combined  with  the  weight  of  the  vessel,  and  going 
at  its  maximum  speed  it  can  cut  in  twain  the  strong- 
est steel  ship  ever  made  without  serious  shock ! 

"The  front  of  the  vessel  is  conical,  extending  back 
from  the  great  blade  to  a  sufficient  height  to  furnish 
perfect  protection  against  any  missile  that  could  be 
sent  by  the  most  powerful  gun. 

"Back  of  this  it  is  covered  with  glass. 
"The  means  for  enjoyment  on  the  several  islands 
exceed  the  most  extravagant  and  luxurious  arrange- 
ments now  to  be  found  anywhere.  But  the  most  fas- 
cinating existence  is  to  be  found  on  board  these  im- 
mense ships,  which  are  provided  with  every  means 
of  pleasure  and  diversion  that  the  ablest  minds  can 
conceive  of;  and  what  is  greatest  of  all,  the  power 
to  traverse  the  oceans  of  the  earth  at  such  a  high 
speed  that  the  motion  of  the  vessel  overcomes  all 


122  THE     KINGDOM     OF     GOLD 

Other  motions!     The  machinery  is  so  adjusted  as  to 
be  noiseless. 

"Neither  passengers  nor  freight  of  any  kind  are 
ever  carried;  nothing  but  gold,  and  the  members  of 
the  Kingdom,  their  relatives  and  friends,  and  what- 
ever is  required  for  their  sustenance  and  comfort. 

"They  pass  from  England  to  New  York  during 
the  hours  of  daylight,  and  from  New  York  to  the 
Temple  in  thirty  hours.  In  sixteen  hours  from 
New  York  to  Gibraltar ;  in  thirty-four  hours  to 
Cape  of  Good  Hope ;  twenty-six  hours  to  San  Fran- 
cisco; fifty-seven  hours  to  China  and  in  five  days 
around  the  world! 

"A  new  system  of  telegraphy  has  been  invented, 
by  which  the  position  of  every  steamship  on  the 
seas  of  the  whole  earth  is  known. 

"This  system  of  'Magnetic  Vibrator]^  telegraph})' 
is  secretly  controlled  by  the  Kingdom.  All  the 
instruments  act  automatically.  The  messages  are 
prepared  phonographically. 

"The  conducting  medium  is  a  vibrant  fluid,  and 
the  means  consists  in  supplying  each  vessel  with  a 
small  tank  which  is  located  at  the  bottom  and  has 
an  outlet  near  the  keel.  It  is  so  arranged  as  to 
flow,  but  in  such  small  quantity  as  to  be  hardly 
perceptible.  This  fluid  possesses  the  quality  of 
elasticity  to  such  a  degree  that  a  drop  can  be  ex- 
tended in  the  water  for  a  mile.  It  is  almost  im- 
possible to  separate  this  filament;  and  if  broken  two 
parts  unite  as  soon  as  they  touch. 


THE    KINGDOM    OF     GOLD  123 

"Each  tank  is  furnished  with  a  vibratory  cord 
of  magnetic  metal  suspended  through  the  fluid.  No 
two  of  these  cords  are  of  the  same  length  or  diam- 
eter, and  the  magnetic  tone  produced  identifies  the 
vessel. 

"The  discoveries  in  magnetism,  show  that  mag- 
netic vibrations  vary  according  to  location  on  the 
globe ;  being  intensified  toward  the  poles,  and  dimin- 
ishing in  uniform  ratio  to  the  equator;  and  that  the 
northern  and  southern  hemisphere  each  have  a  dis- 
tinct tone. 

"There  has  also  been  determined  longitudinal  di- 
visions, two  distinct  magnetic  fields,  which  revolve 
around  the  earth  coincident  with  the  sun's  position 
and  that  these  hemispheres,  each  have  a  distinct 
tone;  and  that  the  intensity  of  the  vibrations  dimin- 
ish as  they  approach  the  direct  rays  of  the  sun. 

"The  combination  of  these  north  and  south,  and 
east  and  west  vibrations  produce  on  the  vibratory 
cords  in  the  tanks,  a  distinct  magnetic  tone  which  ac- 
cords with  its  location. 

"As  the  vessel  proceeds  from  port,  it  leaves  a 
connecting  thread  of  the  fluid,  which  keeps  the  tank 
in  constant  communication  with  all  connections  with 
that  station;  also,  as  it  proceeds  with  all  the  fila- 
ments it  crosses,  which,  because  of  the  immense 
traffic,  are  like  spider  webs  covering  the  oceans. 

"At  the  Temple  and  on  the  Great  Ships  are  lo- 
cated the  magnetic  receivers,  which  synchronize  the 
tones  from  all  the  tanks  on  the  globe. 


124  THE     KINGDOM     OF     GOLD 

"The  ships  of  all  nations  carry  these  sealed  tanks, 
which  are  examined  as  they  leave  and  enter  ports, 
by  the  agents  of  the  Kingdom.  No  vessel  ventures 
on  the  ocean  without  one,  as  it  would  be  subject  to 
instant  destruction  if  happening  in  the  path  of  one 
of  the  Great  Ships. 

"Collisions  between  the  great  Ships  or  with  any 
other  vessel  are  impossible,  except  by  the  careless- 
ness of  the  pilots,  three  in  number,  who  constantly 
occupy  the  pilot  house,  and  have  before  them  au- 
tomatic charts  which  register  the  exact  position  of 
every  vessel  including  their  own. 

"Each  agent  of  the  Kingdom  is  furnished  with  a 
tank ;  and  also  provided  with  a  transmitter,  by  means 
of  which  he  can  send  any  desired  message,  by  talk- 
ing into  it,  and  submerging  it  in  the  tank.  But  no 
agent  possesses  a  receiver;  these  are  only  on  the 
Great  Ships  and  at  the  Temple. 

"These  receivers  convert  the  messages  into  oral 
words,  (as  a  telephone)  or  print,  as  is  desired;  or 
both.  j 

"Members  of  the  Kingdom  seated  on  different 
vessels,  thousands  of  miles  apart;  and  moving  at  a 
speed  of  two  hundred  miles  an  hour,  can  converse 
as  distinctly  as  if  side  by  side  on  a  sofa. 

"The  novelty  and  excitement  arising  from  the 
wonderful  movements  of  these  vessels,  together  with 
the  magnetic  telephones,  is  so  fascinating  that  a  ma- 
jority of  the  members  are  to  be  found  plowing  the 
whole  navigable  world. 


THE     KINGDOM     OF    GOLD  125 

"Members  of  the  Kingdom  receive  outside 
friends,  and  entertain  them  for  unHmited  periods; 
but  most  of  these  visits  are  confined  to  one  of  the  isl- 
ands, which  is  provided  with  immense  hotels  perfect 
in  every  appointment,  and  surrounded  by  places  of 
amusement,  art  galleries,  parks,  and  every  means  of 
enjoyment. 

"They  are  admitted  to  the  island  by  an  ordinary 
steamship  which  plies  between  this  and  an  island  of 
entry  one  hundred  miles  distant. 

"This  port  of  entry  is  open  to  the  merchant  ves- 
sels of  the  world ;  and  it  is  here  that  everything  com- 
ing to  the  Kingdom  is  received.  Nothing  but  pas- 
sengers and  their  belongings  ever  pass  out. 

"The  Panama  Canal  has  been  completed  on  a 
sea  level,  and  both  that  and  the  Suez  Canal  made 
to  accommodate  the  Great  Ships. 

"The  first  step  toward  the  founding  of  the  com- 
ing central  Kingdom  will  be  made  very  soon,  and 
you  should  prepare  yourselves  for  a  journey  to  the 
South  Pacific  Ocean,  via  San  Francisco.  Your 
Oracle  must  direct  the  important  details,  and  should 
be  accompanied  as  hereafter  directed  by  several 
numbers,  and  efficient  attendants." 

At  the  close  of  this  remarkable  forecast,  the  mem- 
bers, instead  of  manifesting  enthusiasm  as  on  pre- 
vious occasions,  seemed  to  be  stupefied.  Absolute 
silence  reigned  for  a  few  moments,  when  one  of 
the  members  broke  forth,  "Well,  well!  this  eclipses 
anything  to  be  found  in  the  Arabian  Nights,  and 


126  THE     KINGDOM     OF     GOLD 

seems  almost  impossible,  though  I  must  admit,  rea- 
sonable. I  feel  as  if  surfeited  and  like  going  by 
myself  to  meditate  on  all  these  mysterious  revela- 
tions." 

The  general  feeling  was  evidently  the  same,  as 
the  meeting  adjourned  without  the  customary  com- 
ments. 


THE    KINGDOM    OF    GOLD  127 


CHAPTER  XL 

THE  "TEMPLE*  IN  THE  SOUTH  SEAS;  THE  "GREAT  SHIPS' 
THAT  DOMINATE  THE  NATIONS ;    "  MAGNETIC  VI- 
BRATORY   TELEGRAPHY":    GOLD   WITHDRAWN 
FROM  THE  NATIONS 

The  work  of  the  Committee  on  Construction  of 
Treasury  was  not  progressing  as  rapidly  as  desired, 
because  obstacles  arose  which  were  not  readily  over- 
come. The  designs  for  the  steel  work  of  the  treas- 
ure house  had  been  completed,  but,  as  the  excavation 
could  not  be  made  without  attracting  too  much  at- 
tention, and  the  necessary  permit  could  not  be  ob- 
tained without  showing  the  plans  for  the  structure, 
further  work  for  the  present  seemed  impractical. 

Reports  were  coming  in  from  the  mining  engi- 
neers, and  the  outlook  in  that  department  was  prom- 
ising. Membership  was  rapidly  increasing  without 
creating  suspicions.  Conferences  of  wealthy  men 
were  taken  as  evidences  of  the  formation  of  new 
"trusts."  But  as  one  part  of  the  great  plan  could  not 
proceed,  it  was  decided  to  consult  the  Oracle,  to  get 
more  specific  directions. 


128  THE     KINGDOM     OF     GOLD 

At  this  meeting  Mr.  Hammond  asked  this  ques- 
tion, and  willed  an  answer. 

"You  have  promised  that  the  right  word  would 
be  given  at  the  right  time.  The  wheels  seem  blocked 
can  you  give  the  required  directions?  I  will  an  an- 
swer." 

George  replied  as  follows: 

"An  outline  of  the  future  is  absolutely  neces- 
sary to  inspire  confidence.  To  give  specific  direc- 
tions before  the  actual  hour  of  need  is  impractical." 

As  George  was  silent  the  members  discussed  the 
situation,  and  attention  was  called  to  the  frequent 
allusions  to  the  "end  of  the  first  period'  and  to  the 
troubles  which  would  necessitate  the  rem.oval  of 
the  gold  to  the  South  Seas.  If  no  specific  direc- 
tions could  be  obtained  as  to  the  duties  of  today, 
would  not  an  outline  of  the  "last  days  of  the  first 
period"  be  beneficial?  It  was  decided  to  put  such 
a  question,  and  Mr.  Hammond  did  so,  to  which 
George  replied: 

"Action  and  reaction  is  the  law  of  progress.  You 
have  nobly  started  in  this  great  undertaking,  but  I 
see  that  reaction  is  setting  in;  and  a  considerable 
period,  not  definable,  will  elapse,  before  the  second 
active  movement  will  be  made. 

"When  you  again  move,  the  beginning  of  the 
'end  of  the  first  period'  will  be  at  hand. 

"Before  you  can  make  use  of  the  great  magnetic 
force,  you  will  be  obliged  to  proceed  with  what 
you  now  possess. 


THE     KINGDOM     OF     GOLD  129 

"If  you  wait  for  the  discovery  of  that  power  be- 
fore you  begin,  you  will  not  be  able  to  control  it, 
as  it  will  become  public  property.  You  must  of 
necessity  pass  through  the  first  period,  if  you  are  to 
reap  the  great  rewards  of  the  second. 

"The  first  discovery  of  the  existence  of  your  or- 
ganization will  agitate  the  whole  country;  but  its 
chief  object  will  not  be  correctly  determined.  It 
will  be  called  the  'King  of  Trusts,'  because  the 
leading  men  connected  with  great  enterprises,  will 
be  recognized  as  its  members,  and  its  vast  accumu- 
lations will  be  considered  as  a  fund  to  sustain  the 
trusts,  and  control  the  government. 

"At  that  time  you  can  prepare  for  self-defence, 
and  test  and  develop  those  wonderful  discoveries 
which  you  will  obtain  control  of. 

"Your  accumulations  of  gold  will  be  but  one  of 
the  causes  which  will  disturb  the  money  market. 
Hie  principles  which  underlie  the  existing  systems 
are  wrong,  and  inadequate  for  the  great  changes 
and  immense  improvements  which  will  immediately 
follow  the  development  of  the  magnetic  system. 

"Panics  verging  on  revolutions  will  come,  and 
your  revolving  houses  with  steel  compartments  will 
be  found  necessary  at  times.  With  them  you  will 
be  able  to  withstand  mobs  until  the  military  come 
to  your  rescue. 

"Although  it  will  not  be  understood  by  the  gov- 
ernment or  the  people  how  it  is  done,  you  will  be 
able  to  control  the  supply  of  gold,  and  manage  the 


130  THE     KINGDOM     OF     GOLD 

money  market  so  as  to  prevent  panics  which  are  im- 
minent. 

"By  such  examples  you  will  secure  the  confidence 
of  one  of  the  leading  factions  and  thus  become  more 
secure  as  individuals. 

"Meantime  the  inventions  will  be  perfected  and 
the  Great  Ships  built." 

Following  this  meeting  came  the  period  of  reac- 
tion indicated  by  the  Oracle,  and  little  was  done  ex- 
cept preparatory  work  for  the  development  of  mines, 
and  completing  the  arrangements  for  the  trip  to  the 
Southern  Pacific  Ocean. 

All  the  members  of  the  Kingdom  of  Gold  congre- 
gated at  an  important  meeting  preceding  the  de- 
parture of  the  Oracle  on  the  journey  to  the  South 
Seas,  to  locate  the  future  centre  of  the  world! 

As  soon  as  order  was  announced,  Mr.  Hammond 
addressed  the  meeting.  He  said  he  had  perused 
the  revelations  of  the  last  meeting  with  intense  in- 
terest, and  was  delighted  with  the  grand  destiny 
which  lay  before  them.  There  were,  however,  some 
points  which  he  would  like  elucidated  before  the  Or- 
acle took  his  departure,  and  he  had  formulated  a 
question  for  consideration  if  the  meeting  was  so  dis- 
posed. "Will  our  Oracle  describe  the  future  re- 
lations of  the  various  nations  to  the  Kingdom,  and 
indicate  the  manner  in  which  selections  of  officers 
and  allotment  of  duties  shall  be  made?" 

These  questions  were  acceded  to,  and  George, 
seated  by  Mr.  Hammond,  responded  as  follows: 


THE     KINGDOM     OF     GOLD  131 

"When  the  time  arrives  for  transferring  the  gold 
from  the  various  store-houses,  located  in  the  differ- 
ent countries,  to  the  Temple,  the  twenty-four  Great 
Ships  w^ill  be  dispatched  to  the  various  ports,  pre- 
pared for  their  entry,  and  on  the  same  day  the  world 
will  be  drained  of  its  gold  to  such  an  extent  that 
there  will  be  a  general  panic  produced  throughout 
all  the  nations! 

"Then  will  commence  the  real  struggle  between 
the  past  and  the  future.  Then  will  come  the  op- 
portunity of  the  agents  of  the  Kingdom  located  in 
each  country.  They  will  engage  to  supply  any 
amount  of  gold  required,  provided  the  government 
will  pay  a  certain  price  for  it. 

"As  all  efforts  to  obtain  gold  from  other  sources 
will  prove  ineffectual  the  offers  of  the  agents  will  be 
readily  acceded  to,  and  after  the  governments  have 
tested  the  contracting  parties  long  enough  to  be  sat- 
isfied of  their  ability  to  supply  all  the  gold  that  may 
be  required,  it  will  be  an  easy  matter  to  establish 
permanent  satisfactory  rates  of  premium. 

"One  of  the  conditions  which  the  Kingdom  will 
insist  upon  will  be  restrictions  regulating  the  uses  of 
other  forms  of  money.  By  these  arrangements  the 
Kingdom  will  become  the  Bank  of  the  World! 

"Whenever  it  is  considered  advantageous  for  the 
Kingdom  to  encourage  war  between  nations,  it  will 
do  so  by  furnishing  vast  amounts  of  gold  for  that 
purpose,  and  when  the  war  is  over  the  nations  en- 
gaged will  find  themselves  under  a  burden  of  indebf- 


132  THE     KINGDOM     OF     GOLD 

edness  to  the  Kingdom.  On  such  occasions,  large 
premiums  for  its  use  will  be  exacted,  and  you  can 
readily  see  that  the  Kingdom  will  secure  large  liens 
on  the  nations.  As  it  will  possess  the  Great  Ships 
and  the  Magnetic  System  of  Communication,  the 
navies  and  merchantmen  of  all  nations  will  be  at  its 
mercy!  Under  such  circumstances  it  will  be  ena- 
bled to  revise  its  agreements,  and  to  exact  higher 
rates  for  furnishing  gold.  To  refuse  would  result 
in  the  overthrow  of  any  maritime  government.  In 
this  way  the  Kingdom  will  substantially  control  the 
nations  financially,  and  will  be  able  to  dictate  such 
laws  and  regulations  as  will  best  serve  its  purposes. 

"The  selection  of  officers  to  manage  the  King- 
dom will  take  place  immediately  after  the  gold  has 
been  transferred  to  the  Temple.  It  will  then  be 
known  who  has  contributed  the  greatest  amount. 

"He  will  then  be  declared  President;  the  next 
Vice  President;  and  so  on  until  eleven  Vice  Presi- 
dents have  been  declared. 

"The  First  Vice  President  shall  be  treasurer;  the 
Second  Vice  President  First  Vice  Treasurer,  and 
so  on  until  five  Vice  Treasurers  are  declared. 

"The  presiding  member  shall  be  the  President. 
When  he  is  absent  the  First  Vice  President,  and  so 
on  in  the  order  of  the  members'  number.  This  body 
shall  be  designated  the  Cold  Chamber;  and  consti- 
tute the  government  as  related  to  the  Temple,  the 
Cold,  the  Creat  Ships,  and  the  Magnetic  Systems 
ol  power  and  transmission. 


THE     KINGDOM     OF     GOLD  133 

"There  will  be  another  body  designated  The 
Congress;  consisting  in  like  manner  of  a  president, 
and  a  cabinet  of  forty-eight  members.  This  house 
shall  regulate  the  internal  affairs  of  the  kingdom; 
but  all  laws  or  rules  established  by  it  shall  be  sub- 
ject to  the  censorship  of  the  Gold  Chamber. 

"Parliamentary  rules,  such  as  are  in  general  use, 
will  be  followed  until  a  vote  is  taken  which  will  be 
in  this  wise :  The  vote  of  a  member  may  count  that 
number  which  represents  the  number  of  millions  of 
dollars,  discarding  fractional  parts,  he  has  contrib- 
uted to  the  treasury  fund. 

"The  records  of  the  meetings  of  both  houses 
will  be  kept  by  an  automatic  Magnetic  indicator, 
which  will  be  so  arranged  as  to  print  every  word  as 
soon  as  uttered. 

"In  voting  no  words  will  be  used.  The  voting 
will  be  done  in  the  order  of  station,  and  each  mem- 
ber will  use  a  graduated  manipulator,  by  which  he 
can  cast  a  vote  of  one  million  (or  one)  or  any  num- 
ber not  exceeding  the  number  of  millions  he  is  rated 
at. 

"It  will  appear  on  the  *yeaJ  or  'nay'  side,  also  the 
sum  of  yea  and  nay  votes.  In  this  way  a  member 
is  able  to  indicate  the  degree  of  his  approval  or  dis- 
approval. In  the  event  of  a  tie  vote,  the  presiding 
officer  can  cast  his  vote;  or  order  it  reconsidered. 
He  can  also  cast  his  vote  on  any  question,  and  if 
there  should  remain  a  tie,  he  will  still  possess  the 
power  of  casting  the  deciding  vote. 


134  THE     KINGDOM     OF     GOLD 

"Each  member  of  the  Gold  Chamber  will  be 
Chief  Officer  of  one  of  the  Great  Ships,  and  each 
of  the  members  of  the  Congress  second  or  third 
officer. 

Each  ship  will  have  in  addition  sixteen  officers, 
and  all  officers  will  have  power  to  act  as  treasury 
agents  in  all  parts  of  the  world. 

"The  relative  position  or  rank  of  every  officer 
will  accord  with  his  rating,  according  to  the  certifi- 
cate for  gold  furnished.  There  will  be  no  distinc- 
tion as  to  sex  in  the  allotment  of  offices.  Any 
woman  possessing  a  sufficient  amount  of  gold  to 
entitle  her  to  a  seat  in  either,  may  select  a  man  to 
represent  her. 

"All  vacancies  by  death  will  be  filled  in  the  same 
manner  as  at  first,  by  readjustments. 

"Each  member  will  wear  a  number  indicating  his 
rating. 

"All  offenses  will  be  punished  or  adjusted  by 
fines,  payable  in  gold,  excepting  murder,  which  will 
require  a  surrender  of  all,  and  death. 

"All  profits  accruing  to  be  divided  and  credited 
pro  rata,  as  per  certificates  of  members." 

At  the  conclusion  of  these  particulars,  George 
continued : 

"Now  the  time  has  come  to  start  the  expedition 
to  locate  the  future  Kingdom. 

"Engage  an  able  navigator,  one  familiar  with  the 
South  Seas. 

"Have  the  Oracle  accompanied  by  Mr.  Cosgrove, 


THE    KINGDOM     OF    GOLD  135 

Mr.  Fisher,  Mr.  Hammond,  and  any  other  members 
who  desire  to  go. 

"Proceed  by  the  most  expeditious  route,  and  as 
much  by  land  as  possible.  Be  very  considerate  of 
the  Oracle's  health,  and  rest  whenever  he  expresses 
a  desire  to  do  so.  Move  on  when  he  is  ready. 
Avoid  all  exhibitions  of  his  powers  in  any  public 
way.  Should  he  desire  to  know  or  become  ac- 
quainted with  any  one,  do  not  disappoint  him. 

"Avoid  bringing  him  into  difficulties,  rather  than 
try  to  restrain  his  inclination.  You  have  a  very 
sensitive  instrument,  the  slightest  rudeness  may  des- 
troy it.  Give  way  entirely  to  any  inclination  he 
may  manifest,  and  he  will  surely  lead  you  to  the 
future  Kingdom." 

At  the  conclusion  there  was  a  unanimous  ex- 
pression of  thanks  extended  to  George,  through  Mr. 
Cosgrove;  and  after  a  general  conference  relating 
to  the  expedition  the  meeting  adjourned. 

Three  days  after  the  meeting  a  special  train 
started  for  San  Francisco.  In  one  of  the  cars  were 
George,  Mr.  Cosgrove,  Mr.  Hammond,  Mr.  Hale, 
and  Mr.  Armstrong.  In  the  other  were  a  sea- 
Captain,  two  civil  engineers,  two  stenographers,  two 
draughtsmen  and  four  assistants. 

The  journey  was  to  be  by  rail  to  San  Francisco, 
and  then  by  a  steamer  which  had  been  chartered, 
with  which  they  were  to  proceed  to  Honolulu,  and 
from  that  place  by  direction  of  the  Oracle. 


36  THE     KINGDOM     OF     GOLD 


CHAPTER  XII 

NINA'S  PURSUIT  OF  JESSE  AFTER  DISCOVERY  OF 
HIS  NAME  "  GEORGE  COSGROVE  " 

The  arrival  of  Nina,  Julia  and  James  in  London, 
with  the  good  news  about  Jesse,  caused  rejoicing  in 
the  Fordham  household,  as  they  had  become  ex- 
tremely anxious  because  of  the  continued  detention 
in  Sweden. 

The  name  Henry  Cosgrove  did  not  bring  to  mind 
any  person  known  by  Mr.  Fordham,  but  as  the  di- 
rectory revealed  several  Cosgroves,  and  one  whose 
dwelling  was  near,  he  called  early  the  following 
morning,  and  learned  that  such  a  man  as  Henry 
Cosgrove  had  frequented  London,  that  his  home  was 
in  Carlisle,  in  the  north  of  England,  that  he  had  a 
blind  and  dumb  son;  and  that  a  lawyer  named 
Newgate,  in  London,  was  his  attorney. 

Returning  immediately  to  his  home  he  informed 
Nina  and  his  family  of  the  happy  tidings.  Mr. 
Fordham  told  them  that  he  had  ordered  the  car- 
riage which  would  be  at  the  door  directly,  and 
invited  all  to  go  with  him  to  see  Mr.  Newgate. 


THE     KINGDOM     OF     GOLD  137 

James  was  not  at  home,  and  the  mother  decided 
not  to  go;  so  Nina  and  JuHa  accompanied  him. 
They  were  driven  rapidly  to  the  lawyer's  office  and 
found  Mr.  Newgate  in.  They  learned  from  him 
that  Jesse  had  been  found  at  sea,  as  described  in 
the  Gotenborg  paper,  and  that  Mr.  Cosgrove  had 
been  an  extensive  traveler,  and  was  on  a  voyage 
from  Peru  to  China  when  the  ship  was  wrecked. 
He,  with  others,  was  picked  up  by  a  vessel  which 
belonged  in  Gotenborg,  and  it  v/as  while  on  the 
way  to  that  place  that  the  little  boat  was  discovered 
with  the  one  little  waif  in  it,  blind,  dumb,  and  nearly 
Hfeless!  His  own  recent  rescue  had  taught  Mr. 
Cosgrove  a  lesson  of  sympathy  never  to  be  forgotten, 
and  he  was  attracted  to  the  child  from  the  first.  As 
the  boy  improved  in  health,  without  showing  any 
evidences  of  intelligence  he  concluded  Jesse  had  al- 
ways been  blind  and  dumb. 

As  the  days  and  weeks  passed,  on  the  tedious 
journey,  he  became  so  fond  of  the  helpless  lad,  that 
he  decided  to  adopt  him  as  his  son  George  Cosgrove. 

When  he  arrived  in  England  he  employed  a  pri- 
vate tutor  for  George,  and  gave  him  every  care 
possible.  He  had  taken  him  to  America  on  two 
occasions.  George  was  a  young  man  now  about 
twenty  years  old;  exceedingly  nervous,  but  other- 
wise healthy.  He  was  described  as  being  pale,  but 
having  a  very  pleasing  face;  and  a  general  striking 
appearance  that  would  impress  almost  any  one 
seeing  him. 


138  THE     KINGDOM     OF     GOLD 

Both  father  and  adopted  son  had  sailed  for  New 
York  City  several  months  previous.  He  had  not 
heard  from  them,  but  was  aware  of  their  arrival  be- 
cause of  some  business  correspondence  received  from 
a  lawyer  named  Sweet,  who  attended  to  Mr.  Cos- 
grove's  business  when  he  was  in  America. 

During  the  relation  of  this  information  Nina  was 
overcome  with  joy.  She  repeatedly  thanked  Mr. 
Newgate,  while  Mr.  Fordham  was  explaining  who 
she  was,  and  who  the  boy  was. 

The  office  was  a  scene  of  excitement  as  the 
clerks  gathered  to  observe  the  manifestations  of 
rejoicing.  Nina  was  impatient  to  learn  how  they 
could  find  Mr.  Cosgrove. 

Mr.  Newgate  was  quite  certain  Mr.  Cosgrove 
would  not  return  to  England  for  some  time  to  come, 
and  advised  them  to  inquire  by  Cable,  addressed 
to  Mr.  Sweet. 

This  advice  was  followed,  and  the  little  party 
returned  to  the  Fordham  mansion,  where  the  good 
news  was  repeated  amid  joyful  exclamations. 

The  reply  received  from  New  York  was  as  fol- 
lows: "Sweet  in  the  mountains.  Whereabouts  of 
Cosgrove  unknown." 

After  due  consideration  it  was  decided  that  Mr. 
Fordham,  Julia  and  Nina,  would  go  by  the  first 
steamer  for  New  York.  As  James  desired  to  re- 
main in  London  to  attend  to  numerous  matters 
which  had  been  neglected  for  a  long  period;  he 


THE     KINGDOM     OF     GOLD  139 

would  stay  with  his  mother  while  his  father  accom- 
panied Nina. 

At  first  the  father  thought  such  an  arrangement 
impossible,  but  when  he  saw  James  and  learned 
that  he  preferred  to  remain  at  home,  and  also  re- 
called that  he  was  anxious  to  see  a  friend  in  New 
York,  he  consented  to  the  arrangement,  and  on  the 
second  day  following  the  three  started  for  America. 

The  week  following  found  them  in  a  hotel  in 
New  York  City,  and  Mr.  Fordham  preparing  to 
go  and  call  on  Mr.  Sweet. 

"Now  girls,  you  get  ready,  for  if  I  learn  that 
George  and  Mr.  Cosgrove  are  near,  I  shall  imme- 
diately return  and  we  will  go  at  once  to  see  them." 

Could  it  be  possible  they  were  really  so  near 
Jesse  after  all  the  voyages,  the  long-continued 
search,  the  anxious  waiting? 

"Oh!  how  Impatience  gains  upon  the  soul 
When  the  long-promised  hour  of  Joy  draws  near! 
How  slow  the  tardy  moments  seem  to  roll! 
What  spectres  rise  of  inconsistent  fear! 
To  the  fond  doubting  heart  its  hopes  appear 
Too  brightly  fair,  too  sweet  to  realize: 
All  seem  but  day-dreams  of  delight  too  dear! 
Strange  hopes  and  fears  in  painful  contest  rise. 
While  the  scarce-trusted  bliss  seems  but  to  cheat 
the  eyes." 

Mr.  Fordham  went  directly  to  the  office  of  Mr. 
Sweet,  where  he   learned   that   the  dispatch   from 


140  THE     KINGDOM     OF     GOLD 

London  had  been  forwarded,  and  a  reply  had  just 
arrived,  advising  them  to  call  at  a  Mr.  Anderson's 
on  Madison  Avenue,  who  would  probably  be  able 
to  furnish  the  information  desired.  He  immediately 
departed  for  the  place  indicated,  and  was  ushered 
into  a  parlor  where  a  lady  replied  to  his  numerous 
inquiries  with  great  reserve. 

Not  until  he  had  given  the  account  of  Jesse's 
loss  and  recovery,  and  his  present  age  and  condi- 
tion, did  she  manifest  any  interest;  and  then  ap- 
parently by  accident  she  mentioned  the  names  of 
Charles  Fisher,  and  Mr.  Cosgrove;  and  that  they 
were  in  San  Francisco,  and  about  to  sail  for  Hono- 
lulu. She  insisted  that  it  would  do  no  good  to  try 
to  communicate  with  them  by  telegraph,  but  would 
not  explain  why. 

Mr.  Fordham  went  immediately  to  a  telegraph 
office  and  sent  a  message  to  the  steamship  about  to 
sail  from  San  Francisco;  saying  it  was  very  im- 
portant to  communicate  with  a  Mr.  Fisher  or  Mr. 
Cosgrove,  who  had  a  blind  and  dumb  boy  with 
them,  before  their  departure  for  Honolulu.  He 
then  returned  to  Nina  and  Julia. 

They  saw  at  a  glance  that  something  was  wrong 
and  rushed  to  meet  him.  They  were  greatly  de- 
jected when  they  learned  what  had  transpired. 
Their  only  hope  semed  now  to  depend  upon  the 
prompt  delivery  of  a  telegram.  Restless  and  im- 
patient they  waited  for  the  reply. 

It  came  at  last,  and  read:    "No    such    persons 


THE     KINGDOM     OF     GOLD  141 

have  engaged  passage ;  they  cannot  be  found.  The 
steamer  sails  next  Saturday." 

The  three  sat  in  gloom  considering  what  should 
be  done,  Mr.  Fordham  would  like  to  go  to  San 
Francisco  with  them,  but  his  business  engagements 
would  not  permit  such  long  continued  absence,  and 
Julia  could  not  return  alone  to  London. 

Nina  was  extremely  anxious  to  go  in  any  way 
possible,  but  was  in  tears  to  think  she  must  part  with 
her  dear  companions  and  noble  friends.  She  could 
never  repay  their  many  kindnesses,  and  to  part 
without  finding  Jesse  was  too  heavy  a  blow  to  bear. 
Had  the  occasion  not  demanded  immediate  action, 
she  might  have  been  prostrated,  so  intense  was  her 
grief  at  being  separated  so  suddenly  from  Julia 
whom  she  had  learned  to  love  as  a  sister. 

During  the  interim  of  waiting  for  the  reply  to 
the  telegram,  Mr.  Fordham  had  conversed  with  the 
propiietor  of  the  hotel,  who  took  a  lively  interest  in 
their  mission,  and  ascertained  the  particulars  about 
the  trains  to  San  Francisco.  He  learned  if  a  start 
v/as  made  that  night  the  steamship  could  be  reached 
in  time  to  prevent  the  party  from  sailing,  if  it  was 
desirable.  He  offered  to  telegraph  to  his  brother 
to  meet  them  on  their  arrival,  and  also  to  have  him 
ascertain  if  such  persons  engaged  passage  before 
the  day  of  departure. 

Mr.  Fordham  and  the  landlord  made  the  ar- 
rangements which  included  every  comfort  possible 
for  Nina;  and  telegraphed  the  brother  to  meet  her 


142  THE     KINGDOM     OF     GOLD 

in  San  Francisco  upon  the  arrival  of  the  train. 
And  now  the  hour  had  come !  Amid  the  confusion 
of  a  dimly  lighted  sleeping  car  the  farewells  were 
faintly  uttered,  and  the  two  fond  friends  took  leave 
while  Mr.  Fordham  endeavored  to  comfort  them 
with  encouraging  words  of  hope. 

All  through  the  night  Nina  tossed  from  side  to 
side,  without  sleep,  without  desire  of  sleep,  whirl- 
ing along  through  what  surroundings  she  knew  not, 
nor  cared  to  know.  It  was  the  first  time  she  had 
journied  without  a  companion.  Nina's  thoughts  ran 
backward  through  the  days  and  months.  She  re- 
called the  many  kind  friends  who  had  made  her 
journeyings  enjoyable,  notwithstanding  the  anxiety 
of  her  purpose.     How  lonely  she  felt  now! 

All  along  she  had  appreciated  the  sacrifices  of 
the  Fordhams,  but  now  she  fully  realized  how 
very  near  and  dear  they  were  to  her.  It  seemed  as 
if  she  was  leaving  home.  Never  before  had  she 
felt  so  keenly  the  loss  of  that  friendship  which  had 
grown  into  love.  After  all  no  soul  had  come  quite 
so  near  as  James  Fordham's;  its  breath  had 
touched  her  own.  She  had  decided  it  could  come 
no  farther.  Yes,  she  had  been  loved,  and  she  loved 
in  return,  but  her  soul  merely  peeped  through  to 
see  that  love  was  there,  while  she  held  tightly  the 
screen  that  barred,  that  it  might  be  thrown  aside  for 
another.  She  thought  of  them  all,  but  lingered  at 
James. 

The  morning  light  opened  the  eyes  which  were 


THE     KINGDOM     OF     GOLD  143 

lost  in  reverie  and  she  realized  for  the  first  that  she 
was  rapidly  passing  through  the  land  of  America! 
the  home  of  Liberty!  which  she  had  longed  to  see 
ever  since  Elnathan  Yardley  had  described  its 
wonders  and  beauties.  Ever  since  she  and  Jesse 
had  stood  by  the  seashore,  and  been  told  of  the 
country  "far  away  over  the  waters,"  and  of  the 
"great  cities  and  multitudes  of  people!"  This  was 
that  vast  country,  and  she  and  Jesse  were  both 
passing  through  it;  but  alas!  he  could  not  see  it! 
She  would  have  to  see  for  both.  Yes,  she  would 
live  for  Jesse,  and  live  norv.  She  would  see  that 
she  might  at  some  time  describe  to  him. 

Beautiful  indeed  were  the  orchards  with  their 
ripe  fruit  and  the  fields  with  their  shocks  of  corn, 
herds  and  flocks,  the  houses,  the  gardens,  lawns 
and  lovely  flowers.  Towns,  cities,  rivers,  lakes, 
mountains,  were  in  turn  left  behind,  and  Nina  had 
time  to  reflect  on  the  past,  and  anticipate  the  future ; 
only  that  the  materials  for  the  latter  were  so  meagre. 

Time  and  again  she  recalled  the  lessons  of  El- 
nathan Yardley  to  "Have  faith  and  wait."  "Be 
patient  and  wait."  Yes,  the  delays  were  but  for 
the  best  after  all,  for  were  they  not  both  getting 
nearer  home?  Such  were  her  thoughts  when  the 
train  rested  in  San  Francisco.  Before  she  had  time 
to  get  her  things  together,  a  gentleman  stood  by  her 
side.  The  conductor  introduced  the  brother  of  the 
New  York  landlord,  and  they  were  soon  in  the 
waiting  room  of  the  depot,  where  he  informed  her 


144  THE     KINGDOM     OF     GOLD 

of  all  he  had  been  able  to  learn  about  George  and 
his  companions. 

He  first  told  her  the  steamship  would  not  sail  until 
afternoon;  it  was  then  nine  o'clock  in  the  morning- 
He  had  not  been  able  to  fiid  ary  of  the  persons 
named  in  the  telegram;  nor  were  there  any  passen- 
gers as  yet  recorded  on  the  books  bearing  such 
names.  But  a  friend  had  seen  something  which 
he  considered  very  important. 

For  several  days  a  steamer  had  been  noticed  in 
the  harbor  waiting  to  carry  an  expedition  to  Hono- 
lulu. The  day  it  sailed  this  friend  saw  several  men., 
about  twenty  he  thought,  go  out  to  the  steamer  in 
small  boats.  There  was  with  them  a  man  who 
was  blind.  He  was  led  by  a  tall  man  much  older, 
"I  thought  this  could  not  be  the  blind  and  dumb 
boy,  you  telegraphed  about,  for  he  saw  him  dis- 
tinctly; said  he  was  a  full  grown  man;  tall,  pale 
and  fine  looking." 

"Why,"  interrupted  Nina,  "is  it  possible  they 
telegraphed  you  to  look  for  a  blind  bo^?'' 

"Yes,"  was  the  reply,  "here  is  the  telegram," 
and  he  handed  it  to  her. 

Nina  read  it  and  said,  "This  accounts  for  it. 
We  have  all  called  him  a  boy,  because  when  he  was 
lost  he  was  a  small  boy,  but  that  is  surely  he  that 
you  have  described!  What  could  they  be  doing 
with  him?     Were  they  kind  to  him?" 

"Yes,"  replied  her  friend,  "they  were  conduct- 
ing him  to  a  small  boat,  and  two  assisted  him  to  get 


THE     KINGDOM     OF     GOLD  145 

into  the  boat,  and  the  manner  in  which  they  did  it 
impressed  my  friend  with  the  idea  that  he  was  an 
important  individual,  whom  they  were  anxious  to 
treat  with  unusual  consideration. 

"About  twice  as  many  men  entered  the  second 
small  boat,  and  carried  with  them  surveying  instru- 
ments. My  friend  thought  it  was  a  government 
expedition,  sent  on  some  special  mission.  But  he 
could  not  account  for  the  presence  of  the  blind 
man." 

After  learning  that  the  steamship  would  arrive  in 
Honolulu  before  the  smaller  vessel  could  possibly 
get  there,  and  that  she  could  make  all  necessary  ar- 
rangements there,  for  determining  if  Jesse  was  with 
them  when  their  boat  arrived,  she  decided  to  go 
immediately  to  the  steamer,  and  was  soon  on  her 
way,  escorted  by  this  new  friend. 

The  captain  of  the  steamship  assured  Nina  she 
would  be  in  Honolulu  before  the  arrival  of  the 
other  vessel.  The  friend  was  bidden  goodbye,  with 
many  thanks,  and  Nina  was  soon  in  her  alloted 
room  where,  on  account  of  her  previous  voyages, 
she  felt  quite  at  home. 

During  the  passage  to  Honolulu  Nina  related  to 
the  Captain  the  particulars  about  Jesse;  what  she 
had  learned  about  the  ship  he  had  embarked  in, 
and  how  the  men  had  conducted  him  with  apparent 
solicitude  to  the  small  boat. 

The  captain  concluded  the  boat  must  be  carrying 
a  government  expedition,  apparently  for  some  se- 


146  THE     KINGDOM     OF     GOLD 

cret  purpose;  but  could  not  conjecture  what  they 
required  a  blind  man  for,  unless  it  related  to  scientific 
research  in  which  the  sense  of  touch  was  important; 
as  sometimes  the  loss  of  one  or  more  senses  increased 
the  acuteness  of  others.  He  advised  Nina  not  to 
disclose  her  purposes  on  their  arrival  at  Honolulu, 
and  promised  to  engage  an  officer  of  their  company 
at  that  place  to  watch  the  incoming  vessels,  and 
upon  the  arrival  of  the  one  described,  ascertain 
their  destination  and  all  information  which  would 
aid  her  in  determining  the  object  of  Jesse's  presence 
with  the  expedition;  and  if  possible  enable  her  to 
secure  a  meeting  with  him. 


THE     KINGDOM     OF     GOLD  147 


CHAPTER  XIII 

JESSE  AS  ORACLE:  OCEAN  VOYAGE  OF  MEM- 
BERS OF  "THE  KINGDOM  OF  GOLD:" 
NINA  DISCOVERS  JESSE. 

The  little  coterie  of  gentlemen  members  of  The 
Kingdom  of  Gold,  who  accompanied  the  Oracle 
on  the  important  expedition  to  Mystic  Island, 
formed  a  very  interesting  group,  representing  several 
phases  of  human  development. 

Henry  Cosgrove  had  exhibited  from  childhood  a 
desire  for  change,  and,  after  becoming  master  of 
his  inheritance,  never  had  a  fixed  abiding  place  ex- 
cepting in  name.  Abundant  means  enabled  him  to 
indulge  his  inclinations,  and  the  more  important 
cities  of  the  whole  world  were  familiar  objects.  So 
when  the  directions  were  given  to  take  a  voyage  mto 
the  thousands  of  islands  of  the  Pacific  Ocean,  to 
discover  the  location  for  the  future  Kingdom,  he 
readily  acquiesced;  in  fact,  was  delighted  with  the 
opportunity;  and  as  George  had  accompanied  him 
on  numerous  occasions,  he  too  was  quite  satisfied. 


148  THE     KINGDOM     OF     GOLD 

when  the  information  that  a  long  journey  to  the 
South  Seas  had  been  arranged  for. 

Henry  Cosgrove  had  long  since  learned  that 
truth  was  like  a  many-sided  crystal,  of  one  sub- 
stance, but  possessing  many  angles,  and  that  its 
beauties  could  only  be  discovered  by  views  from 
various  standpoints.  While  steadfast  in  his  purpose 
of  seeking  for  truth,  he  had  staked  out  no  limits  in 
the  field  of  inquiry.  With  good  judgment  and  keen 
insight  he  was  inclined  to  give  a  fair  free  hearing 
to  all  sides,  and  not  render  a  decision  until  all  the 
evidence  was  in. 

Devotedly  attached  to  his  protege,  he  considered 
him  one  of  the  most  wonderful  beings  that  had  ever 
lived!  In  his  normal  state  George  was  a  very  ordi- 
nary mute;  in  his  abnormal,  a  mystery. 

Charles  Fisher  was  what  is  termed  a  visionary. 
He  lived  in  a  realm  of  unbounded  expectation  and 
was  inclined  to  undertake  vastly  more  than  ordi- 
nary judgment  would  consider  possible  of  accom- 
plishment. Good  fortune  seemed  to  have  smiled 
on  his  various  enterprises,  and  now  it  seemed  to  be 
crowning  all  his  efforts  with  a  glory  which  would 
overspread  the  world! 

Byron  Hammond  was  a  man  of  remarkable  abil- 
ity as  a  financier.  The  management  of  moneyed 
institutions  had  been  the  work  of  his  life;  and  he 
had  come  to  consider  the  possession  of  money  the 
true  measure  of  merit  in  Man. 

George  Armstrong  was  a  student  and  inventor. 


THE     KINGDOM     OF     GOLD  149 

He  had  acquired  his  millions  by  the  discovery  and 
practical  management  of  important  inventions. 

David  Hale  was  by  nature  a  monopolist.  He 
believed  in  "combinations"  as  the  one  sure  means 
of  managing  all  the  business  of  the  country.  That 
by  concentration  and  specialization  immense  savings 
could  be  effected;  and,  under  proper  management, 
each  individual  could  be  made  to  accomplish  far 
more  than  is  possible  where  there  are  so  many  small, 
competing  enterprises.  That  monopolies  were  there- 
fore justifiable;  and  that,  though  apparently  tyran- 
ical,  the  proper  exercise  of  might  made  it  right. 

As  George  was  oblivious  to  all  conversation, 
there  was  a  free  interchange  of  opinions  on  various 
subjects  during  the  voyage  to  Honolulu,  and  the 
days  passed  pleasantly.  Since  departing  from  New 
York  great  changes  in  temperature  had  been  ex- 
perienced and  the  subject  of  the  climate  of  the 
South  Seas  had  been  discussed.  Mr.  Hammond 
had  always  suffered  in  summer,  the  effects  of  heat, 
and  doubted  if  he  could  endure  the  perpetual  warm 
weather  of  the  tropics. 

Mr.  Armstrong  expressed  the  opinion  that  some 
invention  might  be  devised  by  which  the  climate, 
or  at  least  the  efFects  of  it  could  be  so  modified  as 
to  produce  comfortable  conditions,  and  suggested 
that  George  be  asked  to  consider  the  subject.  As 
he  happened  to  be  seated  near  George  at  that  time, 
Mr.  Fisher  said — "Take  his  hand  and  proceed  as 
Mr.  Hammond  has  heretofore." 


150  THE     KINGDOM     OF     GOLD 

Mr.  Armstrong  did  as  directed  and  propounded 
the  following  question.  "George,  cannot  you  tell 
us  some  way  to  modify  the  effects  of  the  sun's  heat, 
so  as  to  make  the  temperature  more  agreeable  in 
the  hot  weather?     I  will  a  reply." 

George  immediately  answered  as  follows:  ''Re- 
tardation, will  produce  the  desired  results.  When 
you  have  acquired  the  knowledge  by  which  to  use 
the  'Magnetic  force,'  it  will  be  a  simple  matter  to 
effect  the  change  you  desire. 

"You  are  now  aware  that  nearly  all  heat  is  de- 
rived from  the  sun's  rays,  which  bring  it  to  the  sur- 
face of  the  earth. 

"The  vibrations  which  convey  the  heat,  travel 
with  a  uniform  velocity,  and  produce  effects,  all 
other  things  being  equal,  in  proportion  to  the  direct- 
ness of  the  Hnes  of  vibration. 

"The  heat  which  surrounds  the  earth  extends  for 
many  miles,  as  do  the  particles  of  moisture,  which 
also  form  part  of  your  atmosphere. 

"The  effect  of  the  sun's  vibratory  waves  is,  to 
move  the  particles  of  heat,  and  bring  them  to  the 
earth;  and  so  you  have  a  larger  collection  nearer 
the  surface,  when  the  sun's  rays  are  direct,  as  in 
the  tropics. 

"If  the  vibrations  of  the  sun's  rays  affected  the 
particles  of  water  as  they  do  caloric,  although  you 
might  not  be  able  to  see  any  moisture  in  the  at- 
mosphere, you  would  soon  be  drenched  with  it. 

"Heat  does  not  accumulate  in  visible  forms  as 


THE     KINGDOM     OF     GOLD  151 

vapors  do,  but  continues  to  remain  in  separate  minute 
particles  which  are  elastic,  capable  of  being  con- 
densed into  smaller  and  smaller  proportions,  analo- 
gous to  the  properties  of  steam.  As  soon  as  the 
vibrations  of  the  sun's  rays  cease,  the  heat  is  re- 
leased from  pressure,  and  like  all  elastic  bodies 
returns  to  an  enlarged  state  of  equilibrium  and  rises 
to  its  natural  position  in  the  atmosphere  which  is 
many  miles  above  the  earth.  Then  it  rests  in  a 
zone  or  sphere  encircling  the  earth,  until  again  re- 
turned by  the  vibrations  caused  by  the  sun's  rays. 

"The  magnetic  energy  v/hich  you  will  learn  to 
control  can  be  applied  to  the  movement  of  the  atoms 
of  caloric  (which  are  only  appreciable  as  heat  when 
condensed)  and  your  vibrators  so  regulated  as  to 
disperse  any  surplus,  and  so  reduce  the  temperature 
to  the  desired  degree. 

"It  will  be  difficult  or  impracticable  to  arrange 
these  *'Retarders"  so  as  to  cover  sufficient  area  to 
effect  what  might  be  termed  the  climate,  but  for 
limited  spaces,  like  a  park,  or  garden,  a  hall,  dwell- 
ing, ship  or  warehouse,  perfectly  practicable." 

Mr.  Armstrong  expressed  his  satisfaction,  and 
suggested  that  Mr.  Hammond  would  have  to  en- 
dure the  disagreeableness  a  little  longer,  when  he 
would  be  able  to  control  the  temperature  so  that, 
probably,  others  would  be  "frozen  out." 

"Yes,"  retorted  Mr.  Hammond,  "I  suppose  I 
will  be  able  to  form  ice  by  using  a  'retarder'  over  a 
glass  of  water!" 


152  THE     KINGDOM     OF     GOLD 

Mr.  Hale  suggested  that  such  experimenting  with 
the  powers  of  the  Oracle  might  prove  injurious. 

Mr.  Fisher  expressed  satisfaction  with  what  had 
been  revealed  and  did  not  think  it  was  best  to  try 
to  restrict  George  unless  by  his  own  instructions,  and 
hoped  he  should  hear  more  on  similar  subjects. 

Mr.  Cosgrove  thought  a  wide  range  should  be 
given  the  Oracle's  powers,  provided,  he  was  limited 
to  what  might  be  termed  practical  things,  and  he 
certainly  thought  the  subject  of  heat  a  very  impor- 
tant one,  especially  as  the  "Kingdom"  was  to  be 
located  in  the  tropics. 

The  expedition  arrived  at  Honolulu  with  all  well, 
and  following  instructions  received  from  George, 
they  were  preparing  to  make  a  short  stay,  until  di- 
rections were  given  how  and  when  to  proceed. 

Mr.  Fisher  had  been  ashore  and  engaged  rooms 
at  a  hotel  for  George,  Mr.  Cosgrove,  and  himself, 
the  others  preferring  to  make  the  vessel  their  head- 
quarters. It  was  about  three  o'clock  in  the  after- 
noon when  Mr.  Cosgrove,  George  and  Mr.  Fisher, 
went  ashore,  and  proceeded  leisurely.  They  were 
passing  through  one  of  the  small  parks,  meeting 
persons  of  various  nationalities,  when  a  young  wo- 
man suddenly  sprang  forward  and,  grasping  George 
by  the  hand,  exclaimed,  "Jesse!  Jesse!  My  long- 
lost  Jesse!" 

George  threw  his  arms  around  the  woman,  and 
in   the   tones    and   with   the    gestures   of   a   child 


THE     KINGDOM     OF     GOLD  153 

responded:  "Nina,  dear  Nina!     I  am  so  glad  to 
be  with  you,  Nina!" 

And  then  he  asked  about  his  mother  and  father, 
Elnathan  Yardley,  the  Kitten  and  chickens,  and 
the  woman  was  answering  his  questions. 

Mr.  Cosgrove  stood  amazed,  while  Mr.  Fisher, 
on  the  alert  to  guard  the  Oracle,  sprang  forward 
and  gently  pressing  the  woman  aside,  asked  her  to 
let  go  George's  hand,  which  she  immediately  did, 
and  then  for  the  first  time  realized  the  embarrassing 
position  she  had  occupied.  She  stood  confused  for 
a  few  moments,  while  Mr.  Cosgrove  engaged  her 
in  conversation  and  Mr.  Fisher  hastened  with 
George  toward  the  hotel;  for  both  instinctively  felt 
that  the  Oracle  had  been  exposed  to  a  dangerous 
complication. 

The  young  woman  explained  to  Mr.  Cosgrove 
how  George  had  been  lost  many  years  before  and 
had  floated  out  to  sea  in  a  boat  after  he  had  been 
struck  by  lightning,  and  that  she  had  read  of  his 
being  picked  up  and  adopted  by  a  Mr.  Cosgrove, 
and  that  she  had  been  searching  for  him;  had  been 
to  Sweden,  England  and  New  York,  and  followed 
across  the  United  States,  and  had  just  come  from 
San  Francisco. 

As  she  was  proceeding  with  her  conversation  she 
was  also  hastening  forward  following  after  George 
and  Mr.  Fisher,  who  were  now  entering  the  hotel. 
She  saw  that  George  was  about  to  go  out  of  her 


154  THE    KINGDOM     OF    GOLD 

sight  and  wanted  to  know  what  they  were  going  to 
do  with  him. 

Mr.  Cosgrove  accompanied  the  young  woman  to 
the  parlor,  and  carefully  guarding  his  replies  to  her 
numerous  questions,  assured  her  he  would  endeavor 
to  aid  her,  in  finding  the  boy  she  was  looking  for, 
but  intimated  she  might  be  mistaken  as  to  this  young 
man  being  the  right  person. 

She  would  not  admit  that  she  could  possibly 
be  mistaken  and  begged  to  be  allowed  to  see  him 
again,  when  she  was  positive  she  would  be  able  to 
satisfy  them  that  he  was  this  lost  child. 

Mr.  Cosgrove  was  fearful  that  their  plans  might 
be  destroyed  if  he  allowed  George  to  come  in  con- 
tact with  this  young  woman  again;  and  also  feared 
that  her  relatives  or  friends  who  probably  accom- 
panied her  might  try  to  obtain  George  by  force. 
He  found  by  further  cautious  conversation  that  she 
was  alone  and  unacquainted  in  Honolulu,  but  that 
she  expected  the  foster-father  of  George  would  con- 
sent to  his  return  to  his  mother,  when  he  learned  the 
facts  concerning  him. 

After  becoming  satisfied  there  would  be  no  inter- 
ference by  others  Mr.  Cosgrove  assured  Nina  she 
should  have  an  opportunity  of  seeing  George,  and 
also  that  he  would  have  him  asked  if  he  knew  her, 
and  if  she  had  related  about  him  what  was  true. 
He  asked  her  to  remain  in  the  parlor  until  his  return. 

As  soon  as  Mr.  Cosgrove  entered  the  room  where 
George  was  Mr.  Fisher  exclaimed,  "Was  not  that 


THE    KINGDOM     OF     GOLD  155 


a  very  remarkable  occurrence?  Why,  George  en- 
tered into  it  as  if  he  were  a  boy  of  six  years!  And 
how  he  seemed  to  remember  everything!  That 
inust  be  a  sister  of  his.  I  recall  all  you  told  me 
about  finding  him  down  in  the  islands,  but  how 
strange  she  should  be  up  here  and  meet  him.  It 
looks  as  if  some  unseen  power  had  brought  him  to 
her." 

"On  the  contrary,"  replied  Mr.  Cosgrove,  "she 
has  been  around  the  world  following  after  him!" 
And  then  he  related  what  she  had  told  him  of  being 
in  Sweden,  London,  New  York  and  San  Francisco, 
and  of  leaving  the  latter  place  on  the  steamer  which 
sailed  after  their  departure. 

"Well,"  replied  Mr.  Fisher,  "she  is  certainly  a 
brave,  plucky  young  woman;  a  mere  girl  yet.  But 
is  this  affair  not  likely  to  break  up  all  our  plans?" 

"I  hardly  know  what  answer  to  make,"  replied 
Mr.  Cosgrove.     "How  did  it  seem  to  affect  him?" 

"Not  at  all,  so  far  as  I  could  determine.  Of 
course  I  could  not  talk  with  him,  but  he  was  as 
quiet  as  an  ox,  when  I  led  him  away;  and  he  has 
sat  quietly  handling  those  shells  I  placed  in  his  lap; 
occasionally  smiling  and  pointing  out  some  of  the 
queer  forms  to  me." 

"Well,  that  is  strange,"  said  Mr.  Cosgrove,  "I 
will  ask  him  if  he  remembers  her."  And  sitting  be- 
side George  he  conversed  with  him  about  the  young 
woman. 


156  THE    KINGDOM    OF    GOLD 

George  had  no  remembrance  of  any  woman,  ex- 
cept, he  thought  a  person  had  brushed  against  him 
and  it  seemed  to  be  a  woman,  and  then  he  was  led 
away  by  Mr.  Fisher. 

"Well,"  said  Mr.  Cosgrove,  "this  is  no  more 
strange  than  all  the  other  remarkable  manifestations 
he  has  given,  but  what  are  we  to  do?  That  woman 
is  down  in  the  parlor.  I  have  learned  she  is  here 
entirely  alone;  and  I  think  we  ought  to  be  able  to 
manage  one  woman  so  as  not  to  permit  her  inter- 
ference with  the  object  of  this  expedition.  I  have 
promised  to  allow  her  to  see  George  again.  I  felt 
we  could  not  do  otherwise,  as  her  excited  condition 
might  lead  to  violent  outcry  and  public  investigation ; 
and  such  a  course  is  not  to  be  thought  of.  We  must 
manage  to  preserve  quiet,  and  if  possible  avoid  any 
more  exciting  experiences  for  George. 

"I  have  told  her  I  would  report  what  he  says 
about  remembering  her.  "The  trouble  is  to  make 
her  believe  I  questioned  him,  and  received  his  re- 
plies. If  she  could  only  converse  with  him  without 
contact,  I  am  sure  he  would  satisfy  her  he  does  not 
know  her.  But  I  really  believe  she  does  know  him, 
and  that  he  is  the  boy  she  is  looking  for. 

"I  will  go  down  and  tell  her  what  he  has  said, 
and  tell  her  he  is  blind,  deaf  and  dumb,  and  that 
perhaps  we  can  get  some  person  here  who  can 
converse  with  him.  Or  if  that  cannot  be  done,  I 
will  get  the  alphabet  of  raised  letters  and  let  him 
spell  out  his  answers  to  her.     That  will  do  it!" 


THE    KINGDOM    OF    GOLD  157 

And  with  that  happy  thought  Mr.  Cosgrove 
started  for  the  trunk  room  and,  securing  his  trunk, 
took  from  it  the  alphabet  and  proceeded  to  the 
parlor,  where  he  found  the  girl  in  tears.  He  told 
her  that  George  was  both  blind  and  dumb,  and  that 
he  had  asked  him  in  the  dumb  language  if  he  re- 
membered her,  and  that  he  had  said  he  did  not. 
"But,"  interrupted  the  girl,  "did  he  not  call  me 
Nina,  and  speak  of  his  mama  and  papa?  You  say 
he  is  dumb  and  don't  remember  me?  Oh!  you 
dreadful  man!  Do  you  want  to  take  him  from  me, 
now  when  I  have  come  all  around  the  world  for 
him?  And  tell  me  such  a  terrible  story  about  his 
being  dumb,  when  you  know  he  talked.    Oh!  Oh!" 

Mr.  Cosgrove  realized  he  was  in  a  predicament 
that  could  not  readily  be  explained  away.  That 
if  he  tried  to  do  anything  to  demonstrate  she  would 
think  it  was  a  contrived  plan.  Finally  he  said  to 
her,  "If  I  will  take  you  to  him,  or  have  him  come 
here,  with  some  letters  in  the  blind  language,  so 
he  can  spell  the  words  will  you  promise  not  to  take 
hold  of  his  hand?" 

"Oh,  yes,  yes,"  she  replied.  "If  you  will  only  let 
him  come  again  to  me,  and  bring  his  words  or  letters, 
I  will  spend  any  length  of  time  in  trying  to  talk  with 
him.  I  will  learn  that  language  myself  if  it  is  neces- 
sary.    But  you  know  he  can  talk,  Mr. Oh! 

excuse  me,  you  have  not  told  me  your  name.  My 
name  is  Nina  Hassen,  and  his  name  is  Jesse  Flem- 
ing.    Won't  you  allow  me  to  see  Mr.  Cosgrove, 


158  THE     KINGDOM     OF     GOLD 

his  foster-father?  I  know  he  will  tell  me  the  truth, 
for  I  have  heard  that  he  is  so  good  to  Jesse,  and 
treats  him  as  if  he  really  was  his  own  son.  Per- 
haps you  fear  Mr.  Cosgrove  will  be  sorry  to  part 
with  him,  and  that  is  the  reason  you  have  tried  to 
make  me  believe  he  is  not  Jesse.  But  I  know  he 
is,  and  I  am  sure  Mr.  Cosgrove  will  be  pleased  to 
see  me,  and  have  me  tell  him  all  about  Jesse." 

Mr.  Cosgrove  asked  to  be  excused  for  a  few 
moments;  and  returned  to  George  and  Mr.  Fisher, 
and  related  what  had  transpired.  They  concluded 
to  take  George  down  in  the  parlor,  and  keep  him 
separated  from  the  girl,  and  allow  her  to  question 
him  by  use  of  the  alphabet. 

Mr.  Fisher  held  George's  hand,  and  Mr.  Cos- 
grove handed  the  letter  sheet,  and  illustrated  to  her 
how  to  converse  with  it.  He  cautioned  her  not  to 
touch  George,  saying  he  was  an  extremely  sensitive 
person  and  very  nervous. 

Mr.  Fisher  handed  her  a  pencil,  with  which  to 
indicate  the  letters,  and  George  felt  the  letter  indi- 
cated. She  pointed  to  "  D-O-N-T  Y-O-U 
K-N-O-W   M-E    J-E-S-S-E-V' 

And  Jessie  spelled  out  "  N-O  "  and  shook  his 
head  at  the  same  time. 

"D-O-N-T  Y-O-U  K-N-O-W  N-I-N-A 
H-A-S-S-E-N-?  " 

"  N-O,"  was  again  spelled. 

"Oh!  I  am  sure  you  gentlemen  have  told  him  to 
disown  me,  to  say  no.     Oh!  Oh!     What  shall  I 


THE    KINGDOM    OF     GOLD  159 

do?  You  knorv  he  called  me  Nina.  Oh!  What 
shall  I  do?" 

"You  see  my  good  lady,'*  said  Mr.  Fisher,  "you 
are  deceived.  He  is  a  very  nervous  person  and,  for 
the  moment,  was  carried  away  with  your  thoughts." 

"But  he  talked  with  me,  and  said  'Nina,  Nina,' 
and  you  say  he  is  dumb!" 

"Well,"  replied  Mr.  Fisher,  "that  is  one  of  those 
things  he  will  do  with  any  person.  That  is  what 
is  called  Hypnotic  or  Mesmeric  Action. 

"We  will  prove  to  you  that  such  words  have  no 
meaning;  but  are  mere  repetition,  like  a  child's 
prattle." 

"Yes,"  said  Mr.  Cosgrove.  "Let  me  call  a  ser- 
vant." And  he  stepped  to  the  door  and  called  one 
of  the  clerks  from  the  office,  and  said  to  him :  "We 
have  a  very  sensitive  blind  boy  here.  He  is  also 
dumb.  But  when  one  takes  him  by  the  hand,  and 
repeats  words,  he  will  also  repeat  them.  This  lady 
thinks  he  is  a  friend  of  hers,  and  she  took  his  hand 
and  said  he  was  'Jesse.'  Now  I  want  to  prove  to 
her,  he  will  do  the  same  with  you. 

"You  have  a  brother,  have  you  not,  or  a  sister? 
Well ;  you  need  not  tell  us  her  name,  but  you  take 
his  hand  and  say,  'I  am  Mary  so-and-so' — what- 
ever her  name  may  be,  and  see  what  he  will  say. 

The  young  man  took  George's  hand  and  said  "I 
am  Susie  Jaselman." 

"I  am  Susie  Jaselman,"  repeated  George. 

"Now,"  said  Mr.  Cosgrove,  "Miss  Hassen  you 


160  THE     KINGDOM     OF     GOLD 

tell  this  young  man  to  ask  him,  or  rather  tell  him 
anything  you  choose,  and  see  what  he  will  say." 

Nina  said,  "Ask  him  if  he  is  Jesse  Fleming." 

"Are  you  Jesse  Fleming?" 

"Are  you  Jesse  Fleming?"  repeated  George. 

"Don't  you  know  Nina  Hassen?"  she  indicated. 

"Don't  you  know  Nina  Hassen?"  said  the  young 
man. 

"Don't  you  know  Nina  Hassen?"  repeated 
George. 

"Oh!  it  is  dreadful;  he  has  lost  his  mind!"  said 
Nina. 

"No,"  said  Mr.  Fisher,  "that  is  exactly  what  he 
did  when  you  took  his  hand  and  told  him  you  were 
Nina." 

"Oh,  no  I  did  not!"  interrupted  Nina.  "He 
said  *Nina,  Nina'  and  spoke  of  his  father  and 
mother  and  Elnathan  Yardley.  No,  I  fear  he  is 
insane  from  the  excitement  of  seeing  me.  Oh!  It 
is  dreadful.  Oh!  Please  do  let  me  take  his  hand, 
and  ask  him  a  question!" 

From  what  had  been  observed  of  George's  habit, 
Mr.  Cosgrove  and  Mr.  Fisher  both  concluded  it 
would  be  possible  to  confine  her  to  questions  only; 
and  that  they  might  convince  her  that  his  words 
when  they  first  met  were  taken  from  her  mind. 

Mr.  Fisher  suggested  that  he  should  talk  with  her, 
and  determine  what  she  would  be  willing  to  do  in 
the  event  they  concluded  George  was  Jesse.  If  she 
v/ould  be  willing  to  have  him  go  on  the  expedition. 


THE     KINGDOM     OF     GOLD  161 

and  then  return  to  Honolulu,  where  she  might  bring 
the  mother  to  meet  him. 

In  answer  to  all  these  suggestions,  Nina  begged 
to  be  allowed  to  take  George's  hand,  and  ask  ques- 
tions, and  promised  to  confine  all  her  words  to  ques- 
tions only. 

Seated  by  George's  side  with  his  hand  in  hers, 
her  eyes  suffused  with  tears,  she  asked,  and  had  re- 
peated to  her  the  same  questions  which  she  had  be- 
fore propounded  through  the  clerk.  Looking  ear- 
nestly into  the  faces  of  Mr.  Fisher  and  Mr.  Cos- 
grove  she  said:  "He  has  surely  lost  his  mind!" 

"No,"  replied  Mr.  Cosgrove,  "that  is  the  way 
he  does.  If  you  will  use  the  letters  again  you  will 
see  he  is  of  sound  mind.  I  will  talk  with  him  and 
let  you  see.  I  will  ask  questions  he  can  answer  by 
yes  or  no." 

Hien  proceeding,  Mr.  Cosgrove  asked  the  fol- 
lowing questions  and  received  the  answers. 

"George,  do  you  know  this  lady?" 

"No." 

"Have  you  ever  known  Nina  Hassen?" 

;;no." 

"Do  you  wish  to  say  anything  to  her?" 

"No." 

"Will  you  spell  out  just  what  you  have  done  since 
you  came  from  the  boat?" 

"Yes."  Then  George  spelled  out  the  incidents, 
omitting  only  the  episode  with  Nina,  until  Mr.  Cos- 
grove said  to  him,  "That  will  do." 


162  THE     KINGDOM     OF    GOLD 

"Now,  Miss  Hassen,"  continued  Mr.  Cosgrove, 
"What  do  you  think?  He  is  not  insane,  but  you 
see  he  has  no  remembrance  of  meeting  or  talking 
with  you;  or  of  saying  he  was  Jesse." 

Nina  sat  looking  intently  into  Jesse's  face.  She 
knew  it  was  he,  if  she  knew  her  own  face  when  she 
saw  it  in  a  mirror.  This  spelling  convinced  her  that 
his  mind  was  right  at  times;  and  oh!  how  her  heart 
beat  at  the  thought  of  losing  him  again,  now  that 
she  had  found  him.  Moved  by  a  sudden  impulse, 
and  forgetting  her  promise,  she  grasped  his  arm  and 
said  "Oh  Jesse!  You  must  tell  them  you  know 
Nina,"  and  immedialtey  before  he  could  be  pre- 
vented, he  said: 

"I  do  know  Nina!  Nina  plays  with  me  every 
day!  Don't  you  Nina?"  And  he  would  not  be 
restrained  by  Mr.  Fisher's  hand,  but  pulled  away 
and  continued:  "I  want  to  go  home  and  see  my 
mama  and  papa,  and  Nat'en  Yardley,  don't  you 
Nina?" 

To  which  Nina,  jumping  to  her  feet  kept  saying, 
"Yes!  Yes,  Jesse!  Yes!"  And  she  held  firmly  to 
his  hand  overjoyed. 

Mr.  Cosgrove  warned  Mr.  Fisher  to  be  careful 
and  remember  the  instructions  they  had  received,  not 
to  oppose  him  under  any  circumstances. 

And  so  Nina  was  allowed  to  hold  his  hand  and 
talk  about  Mystic  Island,  and  their  playground,  and 
finally  about  the  sail  in  the  boat.  Jesse  could  only 
remember   the   terrible   thunder,    and   acted   like   a 


THE     KINGDOM     OF     GOLD  163 

child  eight  or  ten  years  of  age.  He  could  not  be 
persuaded  to  let  go  the  friendly  hand. 

Mr.  Cosgrove  finally  suggested  they  have  Nina 
ask  what  should  be  done,  and  will  a  reply. 

To  the  questions  "What  shall  we  do?"  George 
replied  speaking  in  the  voice  and  with  the  manner 
of  a  man, 

"This  as  you  now  realize  was  foreknown  and 
provided  for.  You  did  well  to  heed  the  warning 
and  save  the  sensitive  instrument  from  destruction; 
else,  like  a  mariner  who  in  a  terrible  storm  should 
dash  his  compass  to  pieces  and  trust  to  winds  and 
tides,  you  might  now  be  drifting  in  an  unknown  sea, 
without  a  guide ! 

"When  you  go  hence,  take  the  companion  with 
him,  and  go  to  Mystic  Island,  for  there  shall  the 
Kingdom  be  proclaimed." 

Nina  was  so  astonished  at  these  words  that  she 
unconsciously  let  go  George's  hand,  and  he  was  si- 
lent. She  could  not  fully  understand  what  had  been 
said,  but  realized  that  a  wonderful  Wisdom  had 
spoken  to  them;  and  she  stood  in  awe  of  him  who, 
but  a  few  moments  before  appeared  as  a  child! 

She  asked  if  he  had  finished.  No  reply  came, 
and  she  started  as  she  gasped  "Why!  has  he  gone 
dumb  again?" 

They  assured  her  he  had  and  proceeded  to  tell 
her  that  he  had  spoken  in  a  similar  manner  many 
many  times,  and  that  it  was  following  his  directions 
that  they  had  left  New  York  and  were  going  to 


164  THE     KINGDOM     OF     GOLD 

some  place  in  the  South  Seas  which  had  now  been 
named  for  the  first  time  as  Mystic  Island. 

"You  remember  what  the  words  were,  that  you 
should  accompany  him  to  Mystic  Island  do  you 
not?"  asked  Mr.  Cosgrove. 

To  which  Nina  replied,  "That  is  the  only  place 
I  desire  to  go  to;  and  I  want  to  take  Jesse  with  me." 

Mr.  Cosgrove  then  explained  that  they  were  on 
very  important  business,  which  he  could  not  des- 
cribe to  her,  and  that  George  was  directing  the  way, 
and  told  her  they  had  been  warned  to  be  exceed- 
ingly careful,  lest  they  destroy  his  wonderful  powers 
which  she  had  just  witnessed  an  exhibition  of. 

He  expressed  the  hope  that  she  would  say  or  do 
nothing  to  endanger  his  welfare;  and  offered  to  al- 
low her  to  accompany  them  to  Mystic  Island  if 
they  could  find  it.  He  told  her  the  steamer  was 
ready  to  sail  as  soon  as  George  gave  the  command 
to  proceed,  and  now  that  she  had  satisfied  herself 
that  he  was  the  person  she  was  looking  for,  and 
that  he  was  directing  the  way  to  his  own  home,  she 
should  be  very  happy,  and  lend  her  aid  to  make  it 
a  successful  voyage. 

To  all  these  requests  and  suggestions,  Nina  as- 
sented and,  after  asking  Mr.  Cosgrove,  who  had 
now  divulged  his  name,  to  say  "good  by"  to  Jesse 
for  her,  she  took  leave  of  George  then  and  went  to 
her  room. 


THE     KINGDOM     OF     GOLD  165 


CHAPTER   XIV. 

POWERS  OF  THE  "KINGDOM  OF  GOLD." 

As  soon  as  Nina  had  withdrawn  from  the  parlor 
Mr.  Cosgrove  asked  Mr.  Fisher  what  course  to 
pursue.  Whether  they  should  inform  the  others  of 
this  strange  episode  or  if  they  should  try  to  manage 
it  without  consulting  them. 

Mr.  Fisher  thought  the  proper  course  was  by 
united  action  and  that  as  George  was  the  sole  de- 
pendence they  should  all  meet  and  see  what  further 
directions  could  be  obtained. 

A  messenger  was  sent  to  the  steamer,  with  a  re- 
quest for  all  the  members  to  come  to  the  hotel.  Im- 
mediately after  their  arrival  they  were  informed  of 
all  that  had  transpired  with  George  and  Miss  Has- 
sen;  and  a  general  talk  followed,  regarding  the 
mysterious  actions  of  George,  while  in  the  presence 
of  Nina. 

As  there  could  be  no  other  satisfactory  explana- 
tion of  the  childish  manifestations,  that  given  by 
Nina  was  accepted  as  true.     But  they  were  inclined 


166  THE     KINGDOM     OF     GOLD 

to  think  there  might  be  some  misleading  in  connec- 
tion with  the  directions  given  to  go  to  Mystic  Island. 

Mr.  Fisher  admitted  that  without  Nina's  appear- 
ance the  voyage  to  Mystic  Island  might  have  been 
avoided;  but  that  now,  it  apparently  became  a  ne- 
cessity. 

Mr.  Cosgrove  said  he  had  studied  the  phe- 
nominal  manifestations  exhibited  by  George,  from 
the  beginning  and  had  found  that  he  was  subject  to 
many  influences,  as  he  was  brought  in  contact  with 
various  persons,  yet  in  it  there  seemed  to  be  one 
steady  advance  toward  some  fixed  purpose.  And 
that,  instead  of  being  led  aside,  he  invariably  inter- 
wove the  circumstance,  so  as  to  make  it  appear  as 
part  of  a  definite  plan,  which  was  constantly  being 
brought  to  light. 

He  had  learned  to  submit  to  whatever  happened 
and  make  the  best  of  it,  feehng  assured  that  how- 
ever unsuited  it  might  appear,  by  the  wonderful 
powers  exhibited  by  George,  all  the  objections 
would  soon  disappear,  and  out  of  it  all,  would  ad- 
vance, steadily  but  surely  the  same  unchangeable 
purpose. 

And  now  that  Miss  Hassen  had  so  mysteriously 
appeared  as  an  important  person,  with  such  a  won- 
derful story  of  George's  past  history,  and  her  suc- 
cessful efforts  culminating  in  his  discovery  just  at 
this  critical  moment;  he  could  but  believe  she  was 
a  necessary  factor  connected  with  the  work  to  be 
accomplished.     Continuing,  he  reminded  them  that 


THE     KINGDOM     OF     GOLD  167 

all  present  could  recall,  how  each  had  been  the 
means  by  which  important  information  had  come  to 
them;  and  as  an  illustration,  spoke  of  Mr.  Armstrong 
being  the  source  through  which  they  had  obtained 
the  description  of  the  manner  of  controlling  the 
temperature ;  and  he  then  referred  to  the  great  mind, 
which  had  anticipated  the  grand  idea  of  the  power 
of  gold! 

Following  Mr.  Cosgrove,  Mr.  Hale  expressed 
his  opinions.  He  had  reflected  much  on  the  phe- 
nomena which  had  transpired  in  his  presence,  and 
had  observed  that  George  seemed  to  be  confined  to 
the  idea,  which  had  its  origin  in  the  mind  of  the 
individual,  who,  at  the  time,  was  in  physical  con- 
tact with  him.  He  would  like  to  try  some  experi- 
ments to  prove  or  disprove  this;  but  had  delayed 
asking  the  privilege  while  such  important  work  re- 
mained to  be  considered.  But  now  he  was  con- 
vinced that  whatever  transpired,  the  controlling 
force  was  like  a  powerful  center  attracting  and  con- 
gregating elements  for  a  final  consummation,  posses- 
sing the  power  to  mould  everything  into  harmonious 
union  with  itself.  That  therefore  he  was  not  afraid 
to  see  any  experiment  tried  with  George,  and  be- 
lieved he  would  grow  stronger  rather  than  weaker 
by  such  experiences. 

Mr.  Fisher  thought  it  was  unnecessary  to  with- 
hold George  from  any  sensible  course  of  experiment, 
but  certain  bounds  should  not  be  passed, — that 
they  were  now  on  an  expensive  expedition  for  a 


168  THE     KINGDOM     OF     GOLD 

definite  purpose,  and  that  whatever  related  to  that 
purpose  was  allowable  and  desirable.  But  there 
were  fields  of  speculation  as  vast  as  the  universe, 
into  which  they  might  enter,  if  care  was  not  taken 
to  consider  some  limitations. 

Mr.  Hammond  agreed  with  Mr.  Fisher,  and 
would  simply  add,  that  he  considered  one  great 
problem  sufficient,  and  that  he  should  endeavor  to 
keep  the  Oracle's  powers  directed  tov/ard  its 
solution. 

Mr.  Cosgrove  suggested  that  George  be  asked  a 
question  which  would  bear  on  the  subject  they  had 
been  discussing.  He  formulated  the  following 
query  and  it  was  acceded  to  by  the  others. 

George  was  seated  by  Mr.  Hammond  who  took 
his  hand  and  read  the  question  and  willed  a  reply. 

"Does  the  Oracle  desire  to  discourse  on  other 
subjects  relating  to  the  Kingdom?  And  should 
physical  contact  with  several  individuals  be  allowed, 
or  should  he  be  confined  to  the  one  who  generally 
takes  his  hand?" 

George  replied :  "You  will  observe  that  responses 
are  always  made  subject  to  some  will;  therefore,  you 
are  to  consider  if  the  possessor  of  that  will  be  a  suit- 
able person.  If  he  desires  that  which  is  the  object 
sought,  well  and  good.  If  he  has  no  desire  contrary 
to  the  object,  well  and  good.  But  if  he  entertains 
ideas  opposed  to  that  which  is  the  object  of  exami- 
nation, then  his  influence  will  be  detrimental;  pro- 


THE     KINGDOM     OF     GOLD  169 

vided  the  thing  sought  is  good;  but  if  the  thing 
sought  be  evil,  then  such  opposing  force  is  desirable. 

"As  the  Kingdom  sought  is  as  broad  as  the  world 
in  its  influence,  and  relates  to  all  the  nations,  it  must 
necessarily  involve  considerations  of  a  vast  number 
of  subjects,  and  it  is  desirable  that  these  should  be 
presented  for  consideration,  as  the  proper  time  ar- 
rives for  their  revealment. 

"As  no  person  among  you  is  the  repository  of 
all  that  will  be  found  desirable,  each  should  en- 
deavor to  aid  by  his  own  suggestions,  though  it  will 
be  found  that  the  influence  so  exerted  will  not 
wholly  restrict  the  Oracle  to  the  person  in  contact. 

"For  individuals  differ  in  organization,  and  es- 
pecially in  effective  force,  as  related  to  a  subject. 

"Whatever  is  required  is  ordinarily  suppHed 
through  those  channels  which  are  already  estab- 
lished. 

"Those  who  are  negative,  or  rather  those  in  whom 
negative  action  predominates,  receive  their  control- 
ling ideas  from  others,  who,  by  association,  have 
established  a  positive  relationship  with  them.  Such 
a  person  if  asked  to  express  an  opinion,  will  imme- 
diately revert  to  the  source  of  such  knowledge,  in 
his  past  experience,  and  a  subject,  who  for  the  time 
is  under  his  control,  will  be  led  to  the  same  fountain, 
or  to  the  several  sources  from  which  he  has  derived 
help. 

"Once  brought  to  the  fountain,  the  subject  may 
be  able  to  extract  from  it  what  is  far  beyond  the 


170  THE     KINGDOM     OF     GOLD 

powers  of  the  leader,  who  determines  the  direction 
of  the  instrument,  but  does  not  Hmit  his  powers  of 
penetration  or  discernment. 

"Nor  is  the  subject  necessarily  restricted  when  he 
reaches  this  fountain;  for  he  will  undoubtedly  find 
negative  conditions  there,  which  will  lead  him  on 
and  on,  into  the  unfathomable." 

All  seemed  well  pleased  with  the  answer  re- 
ceived, and  there  were  extended  talks  on  the  sub- 
ject outlined,  and  much  speculation  as  to  the  sources 
from  which  George  might  have  collected  the  various 
ideas  pertaining  to  the  Kingdom. 

Mr.  Hale  suggested  that  he  be  allowed  to  take 
George's  hand,  and  he  proposed  the  following 
question.  "You  have  spoken  of  a  condition  wherein 
the  Kingdom  would  dictate  to  the  rulers,  who 
would  control  the  masses,  thus  making  the  Kingdom 
master  of  the  world.  Is  that  the  ultimate  or  only  a 
progressive  state?" 

As  there  was  no  objection,  Mr.  Hammond  asked 
Mr.  Hale  to  exchange  seats,  and  Mr.  Hale  taking 
George  by  the  hand  propounded  the  question  and 
willed  a  reply,  which  was  as  follows : 

"The  foundations  of  the  Kingdom  will  forever 
rest  firm  and  unchangeable,  like  the  pure  materials 
of  which  they  are  constructed.  Absolute  perfection 
of  government  can  never  be  reached;  such  a  condi- 
tion is  not  inherent  in  human  nature.  But  when  a 
power  exercises  authority  sufficient,  it  can  subdue 
and  control  warring  elements,  and  establish  appar- 


THE     KINGDOM     OF     GOLD  171 

ent  peace.  But  it  will  be  that  peace  which  is  the 
price  of  liberty — liberty  to  do  what  the  power  pro- 
hibits. 

"Such  a  power  centralized  and  exercised  be- 
comes to  the  people  as  a  king. 

"Some  must  submit  while  others  rule,  under  any 
form  of  government.  The  mere  form  is  unimpor- 
tant, if  it  be  properly  administered. 

"The  Kingdom  will  first  establish  its  right,  by 
virtue  of  its  power  to  dictate  to  and  direct  the  vari- 
ous existing  forms  of  governments.  It  will  not  de- 
stroy the  machinery  already  in  motion,  but  will  use 
it  to  bring  gradually  all  in  proper  subjection. 

"When  the  proper  stage  is  reached,  the  several 
smaller  powers  will  be  united  into  larger  and  more 
arbitrary  ones.  Then  these  will  be  united  by  a 
compact  which  will  establish  security  beyond  over- 
throw by  any  movement  of  the  masses." 

After  Mr.  Hale  had  expressed  his  satisfaction 
with  the  answer,  it  was  decided  to  ask  for  further 
directions  about  sailing  for  Mystic  Island,  which, 
on  investigation,  could  not  be  found  on  any  of  the 
charts  of  the  navigator.  Mr.  Hale  was  requested 
to  put  the  question,  and  in  reply  George  said: 

"You  have  been  brought  thither  that  you  might 
meet  with  the  guide,  who  is  take  you  to  Mystic 
Island.  Information  can  be  obtained  through  the 
will  of  Nina  Hassen." 

Mr.  Fisher  was  selected  to  go  for  Nina,  while  the 
others  discussed  this  peculiar  manifestation.     What 


172  THE     KINGDOM     OF     GOLD 

could  this  simple  child  of  the  islands  of  the  South 
Seas,  without  education  or  experience,  know  of 
navigation;  or  how  could  she  furnish  the  required 
information? 

Mr.  Fisher  soon  returned  with  word  that  Nina 
was  quite  indisposed  and  that  she  would  not  be  able 
to  meet  with  them  for  several  hours. 

When  Nina  appeared  at  the  postponed  meeting, 
much  surprise  was  manifested  at  her  striking  appear- 
ance and  peculiar  dress.  Her  face  was  flushed  with 
feverish  excitement,  but  she  v/as  remarkably  calm 
and  dehberate  in  all  her  utterances,  and  made  a 
very  favorable  impression  on  the  gentlemen  assem- 
bled. 

Mr.  Fisher  conducted  the  meeting,  and  requested 
Nina  to  be  seated  by  the  side  of  George  and  to 
take  his  hand.  No  sooner  had  their  hands  touched, 
than  George  said: 

"Nina,  I  am  so  glad  to  have  you.  Where  did 
you  go,  Nina?  I  want  you  to  take  me  to  see  mama 
and  papa,  and  Nat'en  Yardley,  and  pussy  and  the 
chickens.  I  want  to  go  and  play  on  the  beach; 
don't  you  Nina?" 

"Yes,  Jesse,  yes!  We  will  go  and  see  your 
mama,  and  all  our  friends  and  Kitty,  and  the  chick- 
ens, and  to  the  seashore  where  we  used  to  play,  as 
soon  as  the  vessel  goes  and  takes  us  to  Mystic 
Island." 

"Oh,  do    come    now,  Nina,  Come!"     And    he 


THE     KINGDOM     OF     GOLD  173 

Started  pulling  her  hand,  and  said,  "You  go  ahead, 
Nina,  I  can't  see." 

"You  sit  down,  Jesse,"  said  Nina;  "and  I  will 
ask  this  good  man  when  we  will  go." 

George  immediately  sat  down  and  remained  quiet. 

Mr.  Fisher  would  have  interrupted  this  exhibi- 
tion, but  he  wanted  the  gentlemen  to  see  something 
similar  to  what  transpired  on  the  former  occasions. 

Nina  addressing  Mr,  Fisher,  asked  what  she 
should  say  to  George. 

Mr.  Fisher  replied  by  explaining  to  her  that  they 
wanted  George  to  give  directions  about  going  to 
Mystic  Island,  and  he  told  her  to  ask  such  a  ques- 
tion and  tell  him  to  answer. 

Nina  did  as  requested  and  George  replied: 

"We  are  now  fully  prepared  to  proceed  to  Mys- 
tic Island,  and  will  start  tomorrow  or  as  soon  as  the 
vessel  is  all  ready. 

"Instruct  the  Captain  to  go  to  Latitude  Six:  6 
South,  and  Longitude  one  hundred  and  forty-six, 
twenty  minutes  west;  that  is  the  location  of  Mystic 
Island." 

Much  surprise  was  expressed  by  all  that  such 
definite  directions  should  be  given,  and  Nina  was 
asked  if  she  knew  where  the  island  was  located. 
She  replied  by  saying  she  believed  that  accorded 
with  the  published  account  she  had  in  her  pocket, 
and  she  took  the  mutilated  paper  and  handed  it  to 
Mr.  Fisher,  who,  noticing  it  was  in  Swedish  asked 
Nina  to  interpret  and  read  it  aloud. 


174  THE     KINGDOM     OF     GOLD 

It  was  noticed  that  the  two  statements  agreed 
excepting  the  twenty  minutes,  but  the  sentence 
had  been  transposed.  In  the  pubHshed  article,  the 
Longitude  was  given  first;  in  George's  directions 
the  Latitude  was  first  stated. 

The  conclusion  reached  was  that  the  article  had 
not  been  read  by  George;  otherwise  it  would  have 
been  in  the  original  form. 

"Now,"  said  Mr.  Hammond,  "here  is  a  key  to 
the  knowledge  which  comes  from  George.  He  is 
able  to  tell  all  we  know,  or  have  read,  or  heard. 
He  is  able  to  read  all  that  has  been  in  our  minds. 
It  is  at  his  command  to  read  all  we  remember. 
It  is  at  his  command  on  the  instant.  He  selects  such 
as  is  wanted  to  answer  any  question,  or  as  our  friend 
Fisher  would  denominate  it,  he  possesses  the  power 
of  'Poly-theory'!" 

"According  to  that  hypothesis  he  has  given  us 
nothing  new,"  said  Mr.  Armstrong.  "I  cannot 
agree  with  that ;  as  for  instance,  when  I  asked  about 
heat,  he  certainly  gave  something  that  had  never  oc- 
curred to  me;  and  I  doubt  if  any  present,  had  at 
any  time  entertained  such  ideas." 

"Well,"  replied  Mr.  Hammond,  "we  have 
learned  something,  and  we  may  learn  more,  regard- 
ing the  source  of  the  wonderful  things  made  known 
by  George." 


THE    KINGDOM    OF     GOLD  175 


CHAPTER  XV 

MRS.  FLEMING  AND  HOWARD  RETURN 
TO  MYSTIC  ISLAND. 

The  voyage  from  New  York  to  Mystic  Island, 
via  Panama  and  San  Francisco,  formed  a  striking 
contrast  with  that  experienced  between  Liverpool 
and  New  York.  The  weather  was  propitious  and 
the  sky  so  filled  with  bright  sunshine,  and  the  nights 
so  refreshing  because  of  restful  slumbers  and  pleas- 
ant dreams. 

Mrs.  Fleming  felt  as  if  she  had  escaped  from 
the  shades  of  death,  into  a  veritable  paradise!  The 
social  entertainment,  and  especially  the  instructive 
lessons  from  fellow  passengers,  added  much  to  the 
limited  knowledge  she  possessed  relating  to  the  vari- 
ous nations.  States  and  tribes,  located  on  and  in- 
habiting the  American  continent. 

She  was  deeply  impressed  as  they  narrated  how 
a  mere  handful,  as  it  were,  of  persecuted  Christians 
became  the  chief  corner-stone  of  one  of  the  fore- 
most nations  on  the  earth!  Planted  on  sterile  soil, 
in  a  rigorous  clime,  surrounded  by  savage  beasts. 


176  THE     KINGDOM     OF    GOLD 

and  still  more  savage  men,  with  death  stalking  in 
their  midst,  decimating  their  numbers,  they  laid  the 
foundation  stones  and  builded  the  first  story  of  a 
national  structure,  which  will  probably  stand  until 
the  transforming  changes  of  the  ages  submerge  or 
destroy  the  Continent! 

Her  attention  was  called  to  the  apparent  analogy, 
between  the  historical  accounts  of  the  rise  and  fall 
of  Nations,  and  that  of  the  geological  changes 
which  are  recorded  in  the  structure  of  the  earth. 
How  there  had  been  periods  of  tranquility,  during 
which  nature  laid  the  foundations,  and  prepared  the 
materials,  out  of  which  the  superstructures  of  the 
coming  centuries  were  to  be  builded.  And  then  by 
disturbances  of  equilibrium  brought  portions  of  all 
these  valuable  and  indispensable  treasures  near 
enough  to  the  surface  to  be  discernible  and  available. 

Terrible  indeed  had  been  the  cataclysms  which 
destroyed  continents,  smothered  and  submerged  the 
grand  forests  and  beautiful  verdure  of  the  plains. 
Again  and  again  out  of  the  past  arose  a  more  beauti- 
ful future ;  until  man  appeared  to  subdue  and  appro- 
priate the  munificence  of  the  earth.  And  probably 
after  another  destructive  disturbance  a  superior  or- 
der of  men  will  appear,  possessed  of  marvelous 
powers,  by  which  they  will  convert  the  unseen  forces 
of  nature  into  practical  verities;  encircle  the  whole 
globe  with  enduring  evidences  of  their  skill  and  wis- 
dom, by  which  they  will  inhabit  the  land,  the  sea, 
and  the  sky! 


THE     KINGDOM     OF     GOLD  177 

At  San  Francisco  a  vessel  was  found  bound  for 
the  South  Seas,  and  an  arrangement  made  with  the 
Captain  to  take  the  Flemings  to  their  destination. 

Health  and  strength  were  enjoyed  by  all,  until 
the  landing  was  successfully  accomplished  at  Mystic 
Island,  where  Mrs.  Fleming,  clothed  in  an  elaborate 
dress  of  deep  mourning  such  as  is  worn  in  London, 
became  an  object  of  wonder.  Instead  of  unre- 
strained expressions  of  joy,  her  reception  was  ac- 
companied by  such  a  degree  of  deference  that  it 
appeared  like  coldness,  and  as  soon  as  it  was  known 
that  she  had  lost  her  husband  by  death,  the  sorrow 
and  surprise  so  disturbed  them  all,  that  the  voyagers 
were  taken  to  the  Hassen  cottage  almost  in  silence. 

Few  entered  the  house,  but  so  eager  were  all  to 
know  more  of  the  particulars  of  Mrs.  Fleming's  ex- 
periences, that  none  were  inclined  to  return  to  their 
homes  until  at  least  the  more  important  facts  had 
been  related. 

Had  not  the  sombre  robes  stood  as  a  barrier  be- 
tween loving  hearts,  Mrs.  Fleming  would  have  ex- 
perienced a  natural  cordial  reception  at  the  landing, 
and  there  would  have  followed  a  free  interchange  of 
feelings  and  information  which  would  have  dis- 
closed the  knowledge  regarding  Jesse,  and  the  de- 
parture of  Nina.  But  so  awed  were  they  all  that 
they  feared  to  relate  this  important  information. 

At  last  when  the  terrible  ordeal  came,  it  seemed 
as  if  Mrs.  Fleming  could  not  endure  the  suspense 
and  agony  which  its  first  comprehension  brought. 


178  THE     KINGDOM     OF     GOLD 

No  sooner  were  the  words  "dumb  and  blind"  ut- 
tered, than  she  reaHzed  that  George  Cosgrove  was 
her  own  Jesse.  Her  outcry  was  heartrending,  as 
she  told  them  she  had  seen  him;  and  as  she  alter- 
nately chided  and  pleaded,  because  they  had  not 
informed  her  in  time,  and  could  not  now  recall  the 
ship. 

Alas !  it  was  too  late ;  as  the  vessel  had  proceeded 
immediately  after  transferring  the  passengers;  and 
was  now  far  away  beyond  the  reach  of  all  signals. 

Sympathy  and  every  consideration  possible  were 
offered  the  sorrow  stricken  mother.  Nothing 
brought  relief.  She  was  allowed  to  enter  a  room 
where  alone,  in  prayers  and  tears,  she  secured  com- 
posure, and  after  a  few  hours  was  able  to  talk  about 
her  now  doubly-dear  boy!  For  there  was  far  more 
of  joy  than  sorrow  in  the  knowledge  she  now  pos- 
sessed. How  she  recalled  that  sweet  face;  which 
day  and  night  stood  before  her;  and  Oh!  how  the 
mother-love  reached  out!  Her  desires  were  want- 
ing only  wings  to  fly  across  the  seas ! 

"Oh,  how  happy  I  am,"  she  would  say,  "for  now 
I  know  that  my  dear  boy  was  not  destroyed  by  foul 
birds !  Now  I  know  he  was  alive  and  in  the  charge 
of  a  noble  gentleman  who  was  as  a  devoted  father. 
Oh,  I  am  so  rejoiced,  that  it  is  so!" 

And  Howard,  like  his  mother,  first  in  tears,  and 
then  in  rejoicing,  so  thankful  that  his  own  dear 
brother,  had  stood  by  his  side,  and  been  led  by  his 
hand! 


THE     KINGDOM     OF     GOLD  179 

Before  any  eyes  could  be  closed  in  sleep  on  Mys- 
tic Island  all  the  particulars  had  been  related  by 
Mrs.  Fleming,  about  her  strange  and  wonderful  ex- 
periences with  Jesse.  How  well  she  could  now 
understand  the  meaning  of  those  words,  "Howard, 
father,  mother!"  How  strange  that  he  could  men- 
tion their  names  but  knew  them  not !  And  then,  the 
repetition  of  words,  on  the  steamship.  It  seemed 
now  as  if  he  were  an  imprisoned  child,  calling  out 
of  a  dark  cell  for  mother!  Blind  and  dumb!  Yes, 
the  mind  like  the  eyes  was  dwelling  in  darkness! 

"Dear  child,  if  only  I  could  have  you  with  me, 
for  I  realize  who  and  what  you  are.  I  could  make 
your  Hfe  gladsome!" 

Many  were  the  perplexities  of  Mrs.  Fleming's 
mind,  as  she  endeavored  to  solve  the  mystery  of 
Jesse's  Hfe. 

"How  nicely  he  had  grown  into  manhood.  He 
surely  must  have  experienced  kindly  care  to  be  so 
well  developed.  He  appeared  pale,  but  that  was  on 
shipboard;  perhaps  he  looked  healthier  when  on 
land. 

"He  had  been  quite  prostrated  with  seasickness, 
but  at  the  very  last  was  enjoying  refreshing  sleep. 

"Might  not  the  meeting  with  mother,  have  been 
the  cause  of  his  nervousness?" 

There  remained  time  for  reflection  over  all  the 
past.  What  troubled  her  now  was  the  delay  of 
going  back  to  New  York.     Since  the  departure  of 


180  THE     KINGDOM     OF     GOLD 

Nina  but  one  vessel  had  called,  and  that  was  the 
Coral,  and  it  would  not  call  again  for  many  months. 

The  Coral  brought  the  news  of  the  safe  arrival 
of  Nina  in  Australia,  and  her  subsequent  embarking 
for  London,  which  must  have  brought  her  there  very 
near  to  the  time  oT  Mrs.  Fleming's  departure.  Un- 
doubtedly she  had  learned  of  her  return  to  Mystic 
Island,  and  was  probably  now  in  Sweden  or  Eng- 
land hunting  for  Jesse. 

But  by  what  means  would  she  seek  him?  How 
could  she  learn  it  was  George  Cosgrove?  Day  by 
day  the  probabiHties  and  possibilities  of  Jesse's  dis- 
covery were  discussed  by  the  Hassen  family  where 
Mrs.  Fleming  now  resided. 

The  long  journeys  she  had  made  without  mishap, 
and  the  relation  of  all  those  little  particulars,  about 
which  the  inhabitants  knew  so  little,  inspired  the 
whole  community  with  hopeful  assurance  regarding 
Nina's  voyages. 

After  weary  months  of  anxious  waiting,  hoping 
that  some  vessel  might  by  chance  pay  the  island  a 
visit,  Mrs.  Fleming  decided  she  would  go  by  the 
Coral  upon  its  arrival;  and  from  Australia  com- 
municate by  cable  with  New  York  and  London, 
have  a  search  made  for  Mr.  Cosgrove,  and  also  for 
Nina,  and  so  obtain  information  which  would  de- 
termine what  further  to  do,  or  where  to  proceed. 
Howard  and  Mrs.  Elsie  were  to  accompany  her. 

The  long  continued  suspense  made  the  months 
seem  like  years,  and  the  sympathizing  inhabitants 


THE     KINGDOM     OF     GOLD  181 

all  shared  the  anxiety  which  rested  as  a  cloud  over 
Mrs.  Fleming. 

There  was  no  religious  organization  on  the 
island,  but  the  inhabitants  instinctively  gathered, 
about  Alonzo  Parsons,  and  listened  to  his  words 
whenever  a  trial  like  death  came,  or  other  dispensa- 
tion which  called  for  spiritual  consolation. 

When  Jesse  was  lost,  and  Elnathan  Yardley 
perished,  he  pressed  forward  with  the  duties  attend- 
ing the  burial,  and  after  reading  a  selection  from  his 
Bible,  offered  some  words  of  consolation  to  the  few 
collected  about  that  lonely  grave!  That  was  the 
beginning  of  his  ministry.  He  felt  that  he  had  a 
call  to  labor  with  his  fellows,  to  awaken  in  them  a 
realization  of  the  "dominion  of  God"  and  to  culti- 
vate confidence  in  Him,  as  an  All-Powerful  Being, 
whose  love  was  over  all  His  creatures.  That  He 
had  revealed  through  His  Son,  the  life  of  immor- 
tality, and  the  assurance  of  future  rewards  for  all 
who  believed  and  practised  the  precepts  he  taught. 
That  those  precepts  were  the  cultivation  of  holy  as- 
pirations, pure  thoughts,  loving  desires,  benevolent 
intentions  and  kindly  actions.  To  be  self-sacrificing 
and  earnest  in  endeavors  to  comfort  the  afflicted 
and  relieve  those  in  want;  and  to  seek  through 
prayer  for  guidance  and  help. 

He  was  led  to  the  practice  of  these  teachings  in 
his  daily  relations  to  those  about  him,  and  during  the 
severe  trials  which  came  to  Mr.  and  Mrs.  Fleming, 
after  the  loss  of  Jesse,  his  comforting  words  had  fre- 


182  THE     KINGDOM     OF     GOLD 

quently  brought  much  consolation.  And  especially 
after  Mrs.  Fleming's  return  to  the  island,  had  he 
felt  to  encourage  hope  in  the  early  return  of  Jesse, 
and  inspire  confidence  in  the  over-ruling  hand  of 
Providence. 

There  were  seasons  of  doubt  accompanied  by 
those  gloomy  and  despairing  thoughts  which  are  so 
destructive  of  health  and  happiness;  and  even 
Alonzo  found  it  necessary  to  struggle  to  maintain 
patience  and  hope.  Others  were  far  more  depressed 
than  he,  and  at  times  Mrs.  Fleming  was  almost  pros- 
trated with  grief. 

It  was  on  such  an  occasion  when  Alonzo  was 
asking  for  words  of  consolation  for  her  that  he  re- 
ceived an  impression  so  powerful  in  its  manifestation 
that  he  could  not  withhold  its  revealment  to  others. 
It  was  not  in  the  form  of  words  but  the  ideas  and 
feelings  were  so  distinct  and  pronounced,  that  he 
declared  that  Jesse  would  soon  be  restored  to  his 
mother,  and  that  there  would  he  great  rejoicing  be- 
cause of  his  return. 

Weeks  and  months  followed  this  prophecy, 
without  any  indications  of  its  fulfillment,  and  many 
were  inclined  to  question  if  Alonzo  had  really  ex- 
perienced any  revelation;  whether  he  had  not  been 
deceived  by  some  hallucination  of  his  own  mind, 
under  the  strain  of  urgent  prayer. 

They  had  been  lifted  out  of  despondency  and 
doubt  for  a  season,  but  were  gradually  losing  sight 
of  the  visions  of  hope.     Darker  and  darker  grew 


THE     KINGDOM     OF     GOLD  183 

the  clouds,  until  despair  was  displacing  all  anticipa- 
tions of  joy.  Such  were  the  conditions  which  en- 
veloped the  island  when  the  arrival  of  the  Coral  was 
announced. 

Wild  with  excitement  the  inhabitants  rushed  from 
cottage  to  cottage,  bearing  the  tidings,  and  all  hastily 
congregated  at  the  landing.  Because  of  Alonzo's 
assurances  of  the  early  arrival  of  Jesse,  many  were 
hopeful  that  he  might  have  been  discovered  by  Nina, 
and  was  on  the  Coral.  Others  thought  there  would 
be  letters  from  her,  announcing  his  discovery,  and 
informing  them  when  he  would  return.  There  were 
many  who  put  no  confidence  in  what  had  been  fore- 
told concerning  his  coming.  Alonzo  stood  in  their 
midst,  while  one  and  another  questioned  and  urged 
him  now  to  declare  if  Jesse  were  on  the  vessel,  or 
if  there  would  be  good  news  concerning  him.  In 
reply  to  all  questions  he  could  only  say  that  he 
thought  he  must  be  on  the  vessel,  as  he  felt  assured 
that  what  he  had  told  them  would  be  fulfilled;  that 
if  Jesse  was  not  on  the  vessel  there  certainly  ought 
to  be  some  good  news  concerning  him;  as  the  joy 
which  he  had  foreseen  would  certainly  come. 

His  countenance  beamed  with  the  radiance  of  ex- 
pectation as  he  passed  to  and  fro,  assuring  them  that 
their  time  for  rejoicing  was  at  hand. 

As  soon  as  the  small  boat  which  had  been  sent 
out,  came  near  enough  to  discover  the  faces  of  the 
occupants,  it  was  evident  the  message  they  brought 
was  unfavorable.     Words  were  not  required  to  tell 


184  THE     KINGDOM    OF    GOLD 

that  either  no  news,  or  bad  news,  was  what  they 
had  to  offer,  and  none  had  courage  to  shout,  but 
all  stepped  aside  to  allow  Alonzo  to  go  forward 
and  receive  the  tidings  which  were  given  in  low 
tones:  "No  news  from  either  Nina  or  Jesse." 

This  was  the  time  of  "trial  of  faith"  for  Alonzo. 
He  received  the  words  as  if  uttered  from  the  clouds, 
so  hopeful  had  he  been  that  the  fulfillment  of  his 
prophecy  was  at  hand. 

"Oh!  Oh!"  were  the  utterances  from  one  and 
another,  as  the  sad  news  was  quietly  passed.  Rash 
and  foolish  were  many  of  the  words,  which  reached 
the  ears  of  Alonzo,  as  he  stood  in  meek  silence, 
overcome  with  the  sad  words  he  had  received  from 
the  boat. 

He  was  astonished  at  the  actions  of  his  friends 
and  companions,  who  gave  such  free  vent  to  their 
feelings,  accusing  him  of  being  the  cause  of  their 
false  hopes.  There  were  words  of  censure  and  ex- 
pressions of  doubt  as  to  his  sanity;  words  which 
made  deep  impressions  on  his  heart.  Sentiments 
such  as  he  had  never  surmised  existed  in  the  minds 
of  any,  now  came  in  a  burst  of  passion  exceeding 
anything  he  had  ever  witnessed.  Naturally  might 
he  have  given  way  under  such  terrible  pressure, 
and  there  arose  an  impulse  to  speak  in  self-defence 
but  he  overcame  the  temptation  and  stood  as  one 
dumb  in  the  midst  of  the  tumult. 

While  some  upbraided,  others  defended  him. 
Realizing  he  could  be  of  no  service  while  such  a 


THE     KINGDOM     OF     GOLD  185 

conflict  of  opinions  raged,  he  quietly  withdrew, 
simply  asking  a  friend  to  say  to  Mrs.  Fleming  that 
he  would  soon  be  at  her  dwelling  to  assist  in  pre- 
paring for  her  departure. 

As  soon  as  he  was  alone  in  his  own  house  he 
prayed  earnestly  for  help  to  aid  him  in  doing  his 
duty  in  this  trying  hour;  opening  up  freely  to  God 
all  his  hopes  and  fears,  pleading  for  forgiveness  if 
he  had  passed  the  bounds  of  propriety  in  expressing 
to  the  people  the  assurances  he  had  received  regard- 
ing the  return  of  Jesse.  Having  finished  his  suppli- 
cations he  stepped  forth  hastily  toward  the  Hassen 
cottage,  and  as  he  proceeded  he  heard  a  still,  small 
voice,  which  said  "All  shall  be  fulfilled!  All  will 
be  well"! 

When  he  entered  the  house  there  was  a  smile  on 
his  face  and  a  halo,  or  expression,  which  caused  in- 
quiry as  to  what  had  happened  since  he  left  the 
landing.  "I  have  this  to  say,"  he  repHed:  "All  shall 
be  fulfilled!  All  will  be  well!  These  are  the 
words  which  have  comforted  me,  and  that  I  hope 
may  comfort  you  all. 

And  they  did  bring  comfort  to  some.  Mrs. 
Fleming  looked  up  in  amazement;  and  as  she  be- 
held Alonzo's  face,  she  felt  that  there  was  some- 
thing more  in  those  words  than  the  mere  promise. 
Depressed  as  she  had  been  because  there  were  no 
tidings  from  either  Nina  or  Jesse,  she  now  recovered 
sufficient  composure  to  begin  the  necessary  prepara- 
tions for  embarking. 


186  THE     KINGDOM     OF     GOLD 

It  had  been  decided  that  one  day  would  suffice 
to  transfer  all  that  was  to  come  from,  or  go  to  the 
vessel,  and  if  the  sea  was  favorable  the  ship  would 
depart  on  the  morrow. 

The  excitement  having  subsided,  many  who  were 
outspoken  in  derision  of  Alonzo's  utterances  were 
now  disposed  to  apologize,  and  to  ask  pardon  for 
their  offences,  and  a  restoration  of  fellowship.  But 
there  were  those  who  could  not  overcome  their  feel- 
ings and  continued  to  denounce  him. 

When  the  hour  of  departure  arrived,  as  on  for- 
mer occasions,  all  who  were  able  to  leave  their 
dwellings  were  congregated  at  the  landing.  Sad, 
yet  not  without  some  degree  of  hope,  were  the  ex- 
pressions which  greeted  Mrs.  Fleming,  as  she  took 
her  leave,  accompanied  by  Howard,  and  her  faith- 
ful nurse,  Mrs.  Elsie,  who  had  cared  for  her  pa- 
tiently during  those  nights  of  trouble  and  anxiety, 
when  slumber  was  far  away,  and  she  sat  in  sadness 
and  despair. 

The  last  to  shake  her  hand  were  Alonzo  Parsons 
and  his  wife  Mary.  These  two,  more  than  all 
others,  were  resigned  to  her  going,  as  they  looked 
beyond  the  present  to  the  time  when  they  felt  as- 
sured they  should  all  rejoice  at  the  restoration  of 
Jesse. 

Very  similar  was  this  to  the  occasion  when  Nina, 
in  the  same  little  boat,  had  floated  out  and  away 
from  Mystic  Island.  Their  eyes  were  dimmed  with 
tears  as  they  lingered,  watching  the  receding  Coral. 


THE     KINGDOM     OF     GOLD  187 

The  ship  became  smaller  and  smaller,  until  to  the 
vision  of  some  there  was  nothing  left  in  view. 
Alonzo  Parsons  rose  from  his  seat,  and  with  a  voice 
that  could  be  heard  above  the  roar  of  the  waves,  he 
said: 

"As  no  man  possesses  power  to  save  from  de- 
struction, let  us  call  upon  God,  in  prayer,  that  all 
may  be  well  with  them,  and  that  with  Nina  and 
Jesse  they  may  all  return  in  safety  to  their  homes." 
And  then  pitching  his  voice  still  higher  he  prayed 
with  great  fervor. 

At  the  close  of  the  prayer  there  were  many  audi- 
ble amens,  and  Alonzo  took  his  seat  feeUng  gready 
relieved  by  the  expressions  which  assured  him  that 
some  hearts  had  been  touched  by  his  words. 


188  THE     KINGDOM     OF     GOLD 


CHAPTER   XVI. 

MEMBERS  OF  "THE  KINGDOM  OF  GOLD," 

NINA  AND  JESSE,  SAIL  FOR 

MYSTIC  ISLAND. 

The  position  of  Mystic  Island  having  been  deter- 
mined, the  expedition  proceeded  to  sea  on  the  fol- 
lowing day,  and  started  from  Honolulu  for  those 
sunny  isles,  where  springtime,  summer  and  autumn 
are  perpetually  blended  into  a  paradisiacal  clime, 
— where  pleasing  prospects  continually  delight  the 
eyes  and  balmy  breezes  soothe  the  feelings. 

However  blessed  mortals  may  be  with  outward 
surroundings,  there  ever  remains  an  inward  unrest. 
There  are  possibilities  of  happiness  so  far  transcend- 
ing anything  the  earth  can  afford,  that  unsatisfied 
desires  destroy  the  beauty  of  every  blessing,  and  dull 
the  sense  of  every  joy. 

As  the  graduate  in  possession  of  his  diploma 
launches  out  into  the  practical  realities  of  life,  and 
encounters  the  obstacles  to  be  overcome,  the  difficul- 
ties attending  each  step,  and  apprehends  the  Hercu- 
lean task  attendant  upon  success,  so  Nina  realized 


THE     KINGDOM     OF     GOLD  189 

that  though  she  had  encompassed  the  world  to  secure 
the  object  of  pursuit,  yet  she  had  but  reached  the 
day  of  commencement ! 

The  real,  and  not  the  theoretical,  now  confronted 
her,  and  the  complications  of  the  case  were  over- 
whelming. They  were  now  rapidly  approaching 
the  home  of  their  childhood,  and  soon  she  would  be 
able  to  present  the  long  lost  Jesse! 

How  overjoyed  the  mother  would  be  to  see  her 
son,  grown  to  manhood,  tall  and  intellectual  in  ap- 
pearance! How  dismayed  to  take  his  hand  and 
discover  but  a  child,  or,  chiding  and  commanding, 
find  standing  by  her  side  a  man  of  dignity,  won- 
drously  wise! 

Now  of  pygmean! 

Now  of  lordly  mien! 

And  now  a  mute! 

Deaf  to  wailing  moan ! 

Blind  to  tearful  eye! 

Unconscious  of  sorrow  or  joy! 

In  the  midst  of  the  loved — Alone! 
Not  alone!  for  kindly  hearts  and  willing  hands 
v/ould  continually  wait  upon  every  manifestation  of 
want.  But  how  to  answer,  how  to  minister,  how  to 
entertain,  maintain  and  advance  such  an  enigma  of 
sensibilities  and  possibilities,  these  were  the  problems 
which  racked  the  mind  of  Nina  Hassen. 

Anticipations  and  pleasures  such  as  would 
naturally  accompany  a  return  to  home  and  all  its 
joys,  after  such  an  extended  and  successful  voyage 


190  THE     KINGDOM     OF     GOLD 

around  the  world,  were  now  enveloped  in  a  cloud  of 
intense  anxiety;  and  Nina's  face  wore  an  expression 
which  plainly  mirrored  the  inward  perplexities  with 
which  she  struggled.  Joy  and  sorrow,  hope  and 
despair,  alternated,  as  she  endeavored  to  solve  the 
mysterious  manifestations  of  Jesse's  powers. 

Being  the  only  female  on  the  vessel,  she  was  in- 
clined  to  remain  in  her  room,  excepting  at  meal  time. 
But  Mr.  Fisher  had  noticed  her  extremely  dejected 
appearance  and  surmising  the  cause  of  her  troubles, 
had  planned  for  reUef  by  engaging  her  thoughts  with 
subjects,  and  had  asked  the  gentlemen  to  assist  in 
divertive  entertainments. 

Nina  soon  found  her  time  fully  occupied  with  the 
attentions  of  first  one  and  then  another,  as  they  dis- 
coursed on  numerous  topics  of  interest,  some  of 
which  related  to  the  vessel,  its  machinery  and  the 
instruments  used  in  navigation.  Geography,  geol- 
ogy, finance,  and  engineering,  theology,  meteorology 
and  many  other  subjects,  were  included  in  the  famil- 
iar conversations.  Great  care  was  exercised  to  avoid 
everything  relating  to  hypnotism  and  kindred  themes. 
She  found  the  voyage  a  school  of  instruction  in 
which  more  general  knowledge  was  acquired  than 
all  her  former  education  had  afforded. 

Jesse  occasionally  passed  through  the  cabin  ac- 
companied by  Mr.  Cosgrove,  who  seemed  to  be 
constantly  with  him,  and  he  also  appeared  at  meals, 
though  so  seated  as  to  be  somewhat  isolated  on  ac- 


THE     KINGDOM     OF     GOLD  191 

count  of  his  inability  to  eat  without  using  his  fingers 
for  many  things  unpleasant  to  notice. 

No  mention  was  made  in  Nina's  hearing  of  the 
purposes  of  the  expedition,  and  she  naturally  pro- 
ceeded with  many  misgivings  as  to  the  outcome  of 
their  arrival.  She  could  formulate  no  plans  for  the 
meeting,  which  she  looked  forward  to  with  increas- 
ing solicitude,  and  the  announcement  that  they  were 
approaching  Mystic  Island  was  received  with  a  mix- 
ture of  pleasure  and  pain,  though  the  former  greatly 
predominated.  It  appeared  as  if  the  only  relief  she 
could  anticipate  from  the  burden  of  anxiety  which 
constantly  oppressed,  would  be  through  the  comfort- 
ing words  of  father,  mother  and  friends,  who  could, 
by  their  sympathy  and  concern,  divide  the  responsi- 
bilities that  now  seemed  to  devolve  on  herself  alone. 

Had  Nina  possessed  the  power  of  disengaging  her 
mind  from  the  visions  of  hope,  which  awakened  love 
inspired,  she  might  have  viewed  the  manifestations 
of  Jesse's  powers  with  a  greater  degree  of  com- 
posure, and  from  a  standpoint  which  would  have 
presented  a  somewhat  modified  aspect.  But  now 
everything  was  made  to  revolve  around,  and  be 
measured  by  this  standard  of  affection,  which  had 
become  a  predominating  force,  diverting  all  mental 
operations  pertaining  to  him.  She  saw  nothing  in 
anticipation,  but  Jesse  was  in  some  way  interwoven 
with  it.  The  object  which  continually  flitted  back 
and  forth,  was  so  indistinct,  that  there  remained  no 
well-defined  image,  such  as  love  requires  when  it 


192  THE     KINGDOM     OF     GOLD 

builds  an  imaginery  cottage  or  castle,  peopled  with 
angelic  forms,  in  harmonious  associations  of  contin- 
uous pleasureable  experiences. 

The  night  preceding  the  day  when  it  was  ex- 
pected the  island  would  be  reached,  Nina  sat  alone, 
for  hours,  on  the  steamer's  deck.  It  was  one  of  those 
gorgeous  moonlight  evenings  when  the  whole  ocean 
was  enveloped  in  such  a  halo  of  magnificence  that  it 
seemed  as  if  the  face  of  the  Omnicient,  might  at  any 
moment  burst  forth  to  declare  His  glory,  love  and 
power!  For  if  anywhere  in  the  realm  of  nature, 
conditions  are  ever  auspicious  for  a  manifestation  of 
Deity,  this  tender  luminosity  seemed  an  unbounded 
sanctuary  for  His  gracious  appearing!  Bathed  in 
this  halo  of  subdued  light  and  glory,  Nina  mused 
and  communed  with  the  queenly  orb  of  the  heavens. 

"Thou  beautiful  Moon!  Thou  art  Hke  Jesse! 
Mild  and  serene  thy  countenance,  pure  and  lumin- 
ous thy  emanations;  grand,  distant,  mysterious,  re- 
flecting the  light  of  another! 

"Thy  risings  and  settings  continually  show  forth 
changes  of  thy  mysterious  power!  Now  a  mere 
tiny  omen  of  promise,  tarrying  but  for  an  hour  to 
declare  thy  presence!  And  again  majestically 
sweeping  through  the  heavens,  manifesting  thy  in- 
comparable glory! 

"Even  so  does  my  Jesse  appear  to  me! 

"Mine,  did  I  say? 

"Perhaps  as  thou  art  mine,  mine  to  behold! 

"Thou  dost  remind  me  so  much  of  Jesse,  as  the 


THE     KINGDOM     OF     GOLD  193 

fleecy  clouds  float  by,  first  partially  obscuring  thy 
glory,  and  then,  because  of  the  brief  absence  and 
contrast,  enhancing  thy  beauty. 

"Oh,  gorgeous  orb!  I'll  wait  upon  thy  setting, 
even  as  I'd  watch  dear  Jesse  through  life's  long  day, 
and  see  his  loved  form  laid  beneath  the  blossoms  of 
the  valley!  Then,  but  not  till  then,  can  my  uneasy 
soul  go  forth  to  peace  and  rest. 

"Yes,  I  delight  to  watch  your  course.  And  now 
behind  a  denser  cloud  your  form  is  lost.  All  about, 
on  every  outline,  is  reflected  a  halo  of  glory,  dazzling 
with  silvery  light. 

"Even  so  is  Jesse  when  he  prattles  innocent  ac- 
cents of  the  early  springtime  of  life,  or  reflects  forth 
those  brilliant  utterances  of  Autumnal  wisdom! 
Yet  all  the  while  the  glorious  reality  is  hidden  be- 
hind an  impenetrable  cloud  of  mystery. 

"Why  do  you  not  come  out  again,  and  show  your 
benignant  face? 

"Yes,  thou  art  a  constant  reminder  of  Jesse. 
Thou  hast  gone  down  behind  the  waves.  I  must 
wait  if  I  see  thy  face  again.  Another  day  must 
pass. 

"I'll  wait;  thou  wilt  surely  come.  I  wish  I  knew 
as  certainly  that  my  dear  Jesse  would  show  his 
face  without  a  cloud  between. 

"I'll  wait  and  see.  For  did  not  dear  old  Elnathan 
Yardley  say  we  must  learn  to  wait  and  be  patient? 
'For  there  is  a  right  time  when  all  that  is  good  and 


194  THE     KINGDOM     OF     GOLD 

pleasant  for  us  will  come;  not  when  we  would  like 
to  have  it,  but  when  it  is  best  for  us  to  have  it.' 

"Yes,  I'll  wait;  for  now  I  know  by  the  atmos- 
phere, the  clouds,  and  appearance  of  the  sky,  that 
we  are  near  to  the  little  isle  which  is  my  home — 
and  Jesse's  home!  Soon  we  will  again  see  its  lovely 
hills  and  dales!  But  Oh!  he  cannot  see.  May  God 
restore  his  sight ! 

"Poor  boy,  he  cannot  hear,  may  God  restore  his 
hearing! 

"Dear  Jesse!    May  God  have  mercy  on  him! 

"I  will  go  to  my  couch  even  as  went  the  moon, 
beneath  a  dark  cloud,  and  my  tears  flow  freely  for 
thee,  my  dear,  dear  Jesse!  But  I  shall  rise  with 
the  first  dawn  of  light,  and  strain  my  eyes  to  catch 
the  first  glimpse  of  that  dear  isle,  our  home." 

True  to  her  promise  Nina  was  out  on  the  deck 
at  the  first  break  of  day.  She  saw  the  glorious  sun 
rise  out  of  the  waves,  as  she  had  watched  his  coming 
forth  many  times  before,  but  never  with  such  a  de- 
gree of  expectation.  Of  all  the  days  which  encom- 
passed the  earth  none  seemed  so  pregnant  with 
promise  of  certainty,  as  did  this,  when  as  she  was 
assured,  the  vessel  would  be  in  the  immediate  vicin- 
ity of  Mystic  Island. 

She  had  not  long  to  wait,  for  before  the  midday 
hour  was  reached,  the  island  had  been  sighted  near 
at  hand;  and  another  object  was  also  discovered 
about  the  same  time.  It  was  a  saiHng  vessel  and 
seemed  to  be  sailing  away  from  the  island.     As  it 


THE     KINGDOM     OF     GOLD  195 

was  approaching  them  they  continued  on  their  course 
and  the  two  were  soon  within  hailing  distance. 

As  the  sea  was  calm  a  boat  was  lowered  from 
the  steamer  and  the  captain,  Mr.  Fisher,  and  five 
seamen  entered  it.  Mr.  Fisher  was  anxious  to  learn 
all  the  particulars  about  Mystic  Island,  its  size,  and 
surroundings. 

As  soon  as  they  reached  the  sailing  vessel  they 
were  helped  on  board,  and  learned  that  Mystic  Isl- 
and was  the  name  by  which  it  was  known.  They 
were  greatly  surprised  at  the  questions  asked  by  the 
Captain  of  the  vessel,  which  bore  the  name  of  Coral. 
He  wanted  to  know  if  they  had  on  board  the 
steamer  a  young  woman  named  "Nina  Hassen", 
or  a  boy  named  Jesse  Fleming;  or  George  Cos- 
grove". 

It  seemed  that  knowledge  of  the  discovery  of 
Jesse  had  traveled  faster  than  the  expedition,  but 
Mr.  Fisher  did  not  like  to  divulge  anything,  which 
would  reveal  the  purpose  of  their  presence  in  this 
out  of  the  way  part  of  the  ocean,  and  so  his  answers 
were  evasive,  and  in  the  form  of  questions,  asking 
about  the  persons  named. 

Captain  Adams  then  proceeded  to  relate  the  loss 
of  Jesse,  and  the  departure  of  Nina  on  his  vessel  in 
search  of  him.  He  had  not  proceeded  far  before 
Mrs.  Fleming,  who  stood  anxiously  listening  to 
every  word,  and  who  noticed  some  reserve  in  Mr. 
Fisher's  manner  of  address,   stepped  forward  and 


196  THE     KINGDOM     OF     GOLD 

with  uncontrollable  feelings  begged  him  to  tell  her 
if  he  had  heard  or  knew  anything  about  her  boy. 

Mr.  Fisher  immediately  realized  that  unless  the 
mother  remained  Jesse  might  desire  to  follow,  and 
that  present  difficulties  would  be  likely  to  become 
more  complicated.  So  he  finally  replied  to  her 
questions  by  telling  her  of  Jesse's  presence ;  also  that 
of  Nina,  on  the  steamer. 

Mrs.  Fleming's  feelings  at  the  announcement  of 
this  good  news  can  be  better  imagined  than  de- 
scribed. She  was  extremely  anxious  to  go  immedi- 
ately to  him.  Mr.  Fisher  concluded  that  it  would 
be  the  proper  thing  to  do,  and  accompanied  by 
Howard  she  was  soon  in  the  small  boat,  proceeding 
toward  the  object  of  intense  affectionate  desire. 

Mrs.  Elsie  remained  on  the  Coral  to  see  that  all 
Mrs.  Fleming's  effects  were  returned  to  the  island, 
and  Captain  Adams,  anxious  to  see  Nina  and  Jesse, 
decided  to  turn  back  and  witness  the  landing. 

To  prepare  Mrs.  Fleming  for  the  meeting,  Mr, 
Fisher  explained  that  Jesse  retained  no  remembrance 
of  his  childhood,  and  could  recall  nothing  prior  to 
his  first  lessons  in  the  language  for  the  dumb.  He 
also  told  her  he  was  extremely  sensitive,  and  had 
the  power  while  holding  Nina's  hand  to  go  back  to 
his  childhood,  and  then  could  recall  his  mother, 
father,  and  early  associations,  but  could  not  retain 
this  knowledge  after  letting  go  her  hand.  He  also 
promised  to  explain  more  particularly  at  another 
time,  but  for  the  present  he  wanted  to  impress  upon 


THE     KINGDOM     OF     GOLD  197 

i 

her  the  necessity  of  very  carefully  proceeding  with 
their  meeting. 

Nina  had  soon  discovered  that  the  vessel  they 
were  approaching  was  very  like  the  Coral  in  ap- 
pearance, and  by  the  time  the  small  boat  had 
reached  it,  she  could  see  distinctly  enough  to  de- 
cipher the  name,  without  a  doubt,  and  was  inform- 
ing the  members  of  the  Kingdom  that  it  was  the 
very  same  vessel  on  which  she  had  started  out  from 
Mystic  Island. 

As  soon  as  the  boat  returned  and  the  occupants 
had  been  lifted  to  the  deck  of  the  steamer,  Nina 
flew  into  the  embrace  of  Mrs.  Fleming  with  that 
eagerness  which  the  long  pursuit  had  engendered — 
a  climax  of  impetuosity  and  satisfaction.  But  once 
the  embrace  was  relaxed  and  the  effort  of  announc- 
ing her  success  was  attempted,  Nina  was  again 
overwhelmed  with  the  perplexities  of  Jesse's  condi- 
tion. "I  have  found  Jesse,  but  he  is  blind,  deaf 
and  dumb!  No,  not  dumb.  Oh!  he  is  50  TPonder- 
ful!  So  wonderful!  I  cannot  tell  you.  You  must 
see  him,"  and  turning  to  Howard:  "Here  is  my 
"dear  baby  boy,"  so  big.  Oh  Howard,  you  have 
not  forgotten  Nina?  Very  little  could  Howard  re- 
call of  his  infantile  life  with  Nina;  just  enough  to 
hold  together  the  chain  of  memories. 

As  they  entered  the  cabin  Mr.  Cosgrove  imme- 
diately recognized  Howard  as  the  boy  who  had 
accompanied  them  on  their  voyage  from  Liverpool 
to  New  York.     He  spoke  kindly  to  him  as  he  ad- 


198  THE     KINGDOM     OF     GOLD 

vanced  to  greet  Mrs.  Fleming,  whom  Nina  intro- 
duced as  the  mother  of  Jesse,  and  said  to  her, 
"You  have  before  seen  your  son  on  the  Etruria, 
and  I  will  now  formally  introduce  you  to  him,"  and 
he  gently  pressed  Jesse's  hand  forward  as  he  com- 
municated to  him  the  presence  of  his  mother.  Jesse 
bowed  as  he  informed  Mr.  Cosgrove  that  he  did 
not  know  of  any  mother,  as  he  was  taught  that  no 
one  knew  who  his  mother  was;  that  he  was  glad  to 
meet  her,  and  he  then  extended  his  hand,  which  was 
eagerly  grasped  by  Mrs.  Fleming. 

No  sooner  did  their  hands  meet  than  he  flew  into 
his  mother's  arms,  and  embraced  her  with  expres- 
sions of  childish  delight,  and  soon  expressed  a  desire 
to  go  and  see  his  father,  Elnathan  Yardley,  Nina, 
and  the  domestic  animals.  So  childish  were  his 
words,  and  so  strange  coming  from  a  full  grown 
man,  that  Mrs.  Fleming  was  greatly  embarrassed, 
and  requested  Mr.  Cosgrove  to  ask  him  to  be  seated 
by  her  side  on  the  sofa. 

Although  Mr.  Cosgrove  attempted  to  release 
Jesse,  he  was  unable  to  do  so,  or  to  communicate  in 
any  way  with  him;  but  Nina  advancing,  took  his 
hand,  when  he  consented  to  sit  by  her  side,  and  so 
between  mother  and  Nina,  he  sat  and  talked  im- 
petuously urging  his  mother  and  Nina  to  go  home. 

As  he  dropped  the  hand  of  his  mother  he  became 
unconscious  of  her  presence,  and  the  same  would 
occur  as  Nina  withheld  her  hand. 

Several  attempts  were  made  to  hold  his  attention 


THE     KINGDOM     OF     GOLD  199 

to  a  consideration  of  his  present  condition,  and  to 
awaken  consciousness  of  his  normal  state,  but  each 
proved  unsuccessful. 

As  soon  as  the  mother  was  satisfied  to  discontinue 
these  childish  exhibitions,  Mr.  Cosgrove  requested 
her  to  ask  him  a  question  and  will  a  reply.  That 
question  was  to  ascertain  if  he  had  any  directions 
to  give  as  to  future  proceedings.  To  this  Jesse  re- 
plied in  the  voice  of  a  man — "Let  us  go  immedi- 
ately to  the  home  of  the  mother" ! 

Mrs.  Fleming  let  go  his  hand,  startled  by  the 
sudden  change  of  voice,  and  by  her  side  sat  her 
beautiful  son,  as  calm  as  if  nothing  had  occurred. 
He  only  realized  that  he  had  been  introduced  to  his 
mother,  had  bowed,  and  extended  his  hand. 

Mr.  Cosgrove  explained  to  Jesse  that  they  were 
going  to  land  on  an  island,  and  go  to  the  home  of 
his  mother,  and  that  it  was  also  the  home  of  the  lady 
whom  he  had  met  at  Honolulu,  named  Nina 
Hassen. 


200  THE     KINGDOM     OF     GOLD 


CHAPTER   XVII. 

MEETING  OF  MRS.  FLEMING  AND  HOWAFU^ 

WITH  JESSE  AND  NINA:  THE  LANDING 

ON  MYSTIC  ISLAND. 

No  sooner  had  Alonzo  Parsons  taken  his  seat 
after  praying  for  the  safety  of  the  voyagers,  than 
a  sudden  outcry  rang  along  the  shore.  An  unbroken 
watch  had  been  kept  until  the  Coral  had  disap- 
peared from  view,  but  as  eyes  were  straining  for  a 
last  glimpse,  a  sight  suddenly  arose  which  startled 
the  beholders.  A  cloud  of  smoke  was  seen  ascend- 
ing on  the  horizon  where  the  Coral  had  disappeared. 

As  the  word  "Fire!  Fire!"  was  repeated,  intense 
excitement  and  alarm  was  everywhere  evident. 
The  women  threw  up  their  arms  in  imploring  atti- 
tudes and  the  men  rushed  toward  the  small  boat  in 
confusion.  The  little  children,  screaming  hid  their 
faces  in  the  folds  of  their  mothers'  garments,  and 
all  were  trembling  with  fear  and  intense  anxiety. 

Seven  of  the  strongest  men,  those  who  had  expe- 
rience on  the  water,  entered  the  boat,  and  pulled 
with  might  and  main  from  the  shore!     They  felt 


THE     KINGDOM     OF     GOLD  201 

they  were  in  a  race  with  Death,  that  a  minute  might 
prove  too  late,  or  just  in  time  to  save!  So  distinct 
was  the  smoke,  and  so  positive  were  they  that  noth- 
ing but  the  vessel  itself  could  create  such  a  cloud 
that  no  other  thought  but  the  salvation  of  its  occu- 
pants entered  their  minds. 

As  the  boat  sped  away  over  the  waves  the  wom- 
en and  children  clustered  around  Alonzo  Parsons, 
and  implored  him  to  pray  again  for  the  rescue  of  all 
on  the  Coral. 

As  he  stood  with  uplifted  hands  facing  the  vast 
waters,  loud  and  clear  rose  the  voice  of  hope  and 
trust,  calling  upon  Him  who  had  protected  those 
who  were  cast  into  the  fiery  furnace,  and  on  Him 
who  rebuked  the  wind  and  calmed  the  seal  Ex- 
pressing faith  in  his  power  to  save  to  the  uttermost, 
and  imploring  that  all  might  receive  help  to  repose 
in  the  confidence  He  might  bestow  upon  them. 

As  the  assemblage  arose  from  this  prayer,  the 
bright  little  eyes  so  quick  to  notice  changes,  saw 
something  they  had  never  seen  before,  but  it  did  not 
take  some  of  the  older  ones  long  to  determine  what 
it  was. 

"A  steamship!  A  steamship"  shouted  one  after 
another. 

"A  steamship!  A  steamship!"  repeated  some  of 
the  older  boys,  while  the  little  ones  again  sought 
shelter  in  their  mothers'  arms. 

"Oh,  what  rejoicing  there  was  as  this  sudden 
change  brought  relief  to  throbbing  hearts.     Various 


202  THE     KINGDOM     OF     GOLD 

opinions  were  expressed ;  some  thought  it  was  a  war 
vessel  and  feared  it  might  do  harm.  Others  thought 
that  Nina  and  Jesse  were  returning,  and  others  that 
it  might  be  a  vessel  in  distress.  But  all  were  happy 
to  know  the  Coral  was  safe,  and  had  not  been  on 
fire,  and  thanks  arose  from  every  lip. 

The  excitement  created  was  so  intense  that  they 
forgot  to  look  after  the  small  boat  which  had  gone 
to  the  rescue,  but  now  they  saw  it  resting  far  out  on 
the  waves,  and  the  steamer  approaching  it.  Tliey 
also  saw  the  Coral  returning.  And  now  the  little 
boat  and  the  great  steamship  were  together,  and 
presently  the  ship  came  nearer  the  landing  and  threw 
out  an  anchor.  The  Coral  also  came  still  nearer 
the  shore,  and  boats  from  both  vessels  were  soon 
approaching. 

As  the  boat  from  the  steamship  came  within  hear- 
ing distance,  there  arose  a  form  in  its  bow,  it  was 
Mr.  Hassen,  and  he  shouted  "Jesse  and  Nina  are 
both  on  the  steamship!" 

Such  a  response  as  went  out  from  that  excited 
throng  and  echoed  from  the  surrounding  hills  was 
never  before  heard  on  Mystic  Island,  nor  were  such 
animated  manifestations  of  joy  ever  before  wit- 
nessed. As  the  boat  drew  nearer  it  was  noticed  that 
there  were  two  strangers  accompanying  those  who 
had  gone  from  the  island  and  as  soon  as  the  landing 
was  reached,  Mr.  Hassen  informed  them  that  one 
of  them  desired  to  speak  to  the  people. 

All  were  silent  while  the  stranger  explained  that 


THE     KINGDOM     OF     GOLD  203 

he  had  with  him  on  board  the  steamer  a  young  man 
who  was  surely  the  lost  Jesse.  That  he  had  been 
picked  up  by  a  passing  vessel,  and  had  been  adopted 
by  a  gentleman  whom  they  would  all  have  the 
pleasure  of  seeing.  That  Jesse  had  been  well  cared 
for  and  educated  in  the  deaf  and  dumb  language, 
and  had  recently  exhibited  some  remarkable  pow- 
ers under  the  instruction  of  an  eminent  psychologist, 
and  that  in  consequence  he  had  come  to  Mystic 
Island. 

Continuing,  he  said  to  them:  "Jesse  is  a  very  ner- 
vous and  delicate  person,  and  requires  particular 
care  and  attention  to  preserve  his  health.  Any  ex- 
citement may  injure  him.  He  not  only  comes  here 
to  be  restored  to  his  mother  and  friends,  but  to  di- 
rect a  grand  plan,  which  has  been  made  known  by 
him.  As  its  fulfillment  will  greatly  benefit  you  all, 
I  hope  you  will  aid  my  friends  and  myself  in  carry- 
ing it  out. 

"The  important  favor  I  have  to  ask  is,  that  for 
Jesse's  sake  you  will  all  be  careful  when  he  comes 
on  shore  to  do  nothing  which  will  in  the  least  affect 
him.  As  he  is  blind  and  deaf  he  cannot  hear  or 
see  you,  but  he  is  so  sensitive  that  he  can  feel  what 
is  transpiring  near  him,  and  he  might  be  made  sick 
by  handshaking  or  anything  like  it.  I  therefore  want 
you  to  promise  me  that  you  will  allow  him  to  go 
directly  to  the  house  of  his  mother,  and  that  quiet 
will  be  maintained  until  tomorrow,  and  then  what- 
ever his  mother  allows  will  be  all  right." 


204  THE     KINGDOM     OF     GOLD 

All  were  glad  to  conform  to  these  requirements, 
and  the  gentlemen  were  taken  back  to  the  steamer. 
When  the  boat  returned  it  contained  as  passengers 
Nina,  Mrs.  Fleming,  Howard  and  Mrs.  Elsie. 

The  instant  the  boat  reached  the  land  Nina 
dashed  forward  into  the  arms  of  her  parents,  rela- 
tives and  friends.  All  were  received  with  hearty 
greetings  and  congratulations  accompanied  by  uni- 
versal rejoicings,  that  continued  as  they  were  slowly 
conveyed  toward  the  Hassen  cottage,  where  they 
were  anxious  to  quickly  prepare  for  the  distin- 
guished guests,  who  were  to  follow  with  Jesse. 
When  the  boat  containing  these  arrived,  quiet  was 
restored.  Mr.  Fisher,  Mr.  Cosgrove  and  Jesse  en- 
tered the  crude  Island  vehicle  and  proceeded. 

All  the  people  followed  at  a  little  distance,  and 
as  soon  as  the  cottage  was  reached  a  general  disper- 
sion took  place.  Alonzo  Parsons  and  his  wife  set 
the  example  by  hastening  to  their  home.  Their 
faces  bore  a  radiance  such  as  lighted  up  no  others; 
it  came  as  the  reward  of  patience — patience  which 
had  endured  the  trial  of  faith.  But  all  were  happy 
and  Alonzo  and  his  wife  were  soon  aware  that  they 
had  not  returned  to  a  house  of  quietude. 

Following  hastily  after  came  many  who  with  tears 
begged  to  be  forgiven  for  what  had  been  said  in  a 
moment  of  great  trial  and  disappointment.  Others 
came  to  congratulate  both  Alonzo  and  Mary,  and 
to  declare  they  believed  he  was  a  servant  of  the 
Most  High.     And  all  that  had  congratulated  de- 


THE     KINGDOM     OF     GOLD  205 

sired  that  a  meeting  of  praise  and  thanksgiving  be 
immediately  held.  So  urgent  were  they  that  the  ser- 
vice proceeded  v^^ithout  arrangement;  each  follow^- 
ing  the  leading  of  the  spirit,  and  many  who  had 
never  before  uttered  the  name  of  God  in  a  public 
assemblage  declared  their  hope  and  trust  in  His 
eternal  goodness  and  power. 

Alonzo  was  led  to  address  them,  and  to  call  their 
attention  to  the  many  occasions  when  he  had  de- 
clared his  belief  that  the  loss  of  Jesse  was  the  work 
of  Providence,  to  bring  about  something  for  His 
glory  and  their  good.  And  how  he  had  admonished 
them  to  hold  fast  to  faith,  and  wait  in  patience  for 
God's  time.  He  concluded  by  telling  them  that  he 
now  believed  that  time  had  arrived,  and  that  the 
love  and  power  of  God  would  become  evident. 

During  the  few  remaining  hours  of  the  day,  after 
the  arrival  at  the  Hassen  cottage,  scenes  were 
enacted  which  greatly  puzzled  all  observers. 

As  the  company  had  become  considerably  heated 
by  the  journey,  Nina  and  her  mother  brought 
fruit  and  water,  and  after  partaking  of  refreshments, 
Mr.  Fisher  addressed  them.  He  reminded  them 
that  the  remaining  time  was  brief,  as  probably  Jesse, 
Mr.  Cosgrove  and  himself  would  return  to  the  ves- 
sel before  darkness  made  it  impractical  to  go. 
Therefore  they  had  better  proceed  to  determine 
what  Jesse  would  say  to  them.  He  described  the 
manner  in  which  they  had  been  accustomed  to  seek 
directions  from  him,  and  proposed  that  Mrs.  Flem- 


206  THE     KINGDOM     OF     GOLD 

ing  should  hold  his  hand  and  ask  the  question. 
Mrs.  Fleming  in  reply  to  this  request  said  she  had 
been  so  disappointed  with  what  had  transpired  on 
the  vessel  that  some  other,  and  preferably  Nina, 
should  take  his  hand. 

Mr.  Fisher  wrote  a  question  for  Nina  to  ask,  and, 
seated  by  Jesse's  side  in  the  home  she  had  so  longed 
to  reach  with  him,  with  an  assurance  such  as  success 
brings  with  the  accomplishment  of  any  great  or  ard- 
uous work,  she  asked:  "As  you  have  led  us  to  this 
island,  and  to  this  mother,  what  would  you  have  us 
do  nextV 

As  this  question  was  asked  in  a  negative  manner 
there  was  no  reply,  but  Jesse  immediately  gave  a 
dem.onstration  of  his  childlike  nature,  and  requested 
the  playthings  which  had  furnished  entertainment 
when  he  was  a  child. 

Mr.  Fisher  instructed  Nina  to  command  him  to 
answer  the  question,  which  she  again  repeated  and 
the  following  was  the  reply : 

"The  first  part  of  your  question  makes  a  state- 
ment which  involves  a  very  long  explanation,  such 
as  could  hardly  be  given  in  the  limited  time  remain- 
ing for  us  to-day;  but  it  is  necessary  to  open  that 
subject  as  it  leads  to  all  that  is  to  follow. 

"That  you  have  been  led  to  this  island  and  to 
this  mother  is  true,  but  the  causes  which  have  ef- 
fected that  leading,  and  the  purposes  which  made 
those  causes  necessary,  involve  a  long  chain  of  cir- 


THE     KINGDOM     OF     GOLD  207 

cumstances  reaching  far  back  into  the  past  and  in- 
clude many  minds. 

"You  have  discovered  that  the  will  of  the  opera- 
tor, determines  in  a  great  measure,  the  limitations 
and  directions  the  mind  of  the  subject  shall  be  gov- 
erned by.  You  have  also  learned  that  not  only  the 
mind  of  one,  but  the  thought  of  many  find  expression 
here.  If  you  continue  the  inquiry  your  reason  will 
agree,  that  what  is  manifest  is  but  that  which  has 
existed  somewhere,  in  some  mind,  or  minds,  and 
that  this  is  not  the  source  of  ideas,  but  rather  the 
means  of  expression. 

"You  have  observed  that  a  child  or  philosopher 
may,  with  equal  exactness,  express  their  sentiments; 
and  that  the  changes  from  one  to  the  other  are  as 
if  performed  on  an  inanimate  mechanism. 

"It  is  difficult  for  the  mind  to  entertain  the  idea, 
that  such  power  of  expression  as  you  have  often 
witnessed,  could  be  the  result  of  chance,  or  by  a  law 
of  affinity;  or  a  method  of  natural  selection,  by 
which,  when  set  in  position  by  an  act  of  willing,  a 
mind  could  select  from  the  vast  ocean  of  thoughts, 
ideas  which  are  so  related  to  each  other  as  to  form 
a  composition  or  discourse;  unless  you  admit  that 
the  mind  so  acting  possesses  a  faculty  superior  to 
any  or  all  the  minds  which  are  supposed  to  act  upon 
it. 

"It  is  evident  that  a  child  born  and  tutored  on 
this  island,  or  one  dwelling  in  darkness  and  without 
power  to  distinguish  sounds,  could  in    no    manner 


208  THE     KINGDOM     OF     GOLD 

acquire  such  power  of  discernment,  or  method  of 
arrangement,  relating  to  things  entirely  beyond  his 
knowledge. 

"That  he  has  been  the  means  of  bringing  you 
and  himself  here  is  true,  and  hereafter  you  may 
learn  more  particularly  how  it  has  been  accom- 
plished. 

"The  thing  to  do  now  is,  to  give  this  mother,  and 
the  many  dear  friends,  an  assurance  that  Jesse  shall 
not  be  rudely  taken  from  them.  That  if  he  does 
not  remain  with  them  it  will  be  because  they  also 
prefer  that  he  should  go  elsewhere,  for  his  good  and 
for  their  benefit  also.  And  to  assure  them  further 
that  a  way  will  be  opened  up  by  which  he  will  be 
more  fully  restored  to  them  than  has  yet  appeared. 

"That  abundant  time  will  be  devoted  to  the  work, 
and  that  there  will  be  no  hasty  action. 

"It  will  be  necessary  for  the  conifort  of  all  that 
you  return  to  the  boat  with  Jesse  for  the  night,  and 
immediately  on  the  morrow  prepare  a  cottage  where 
he  and  his  companions  may  remain.  In  the  after- 
noon come  to  this  home  again,  and  once  more  seek 
for  the  guidance  you  desire." 

These  words  brought  comfort  to  Mrs.  Fleming 
and  Nina,  such  as  they  had  not  experienced  before, 
and  they  cheerfully  parted  with  Jesse,  asking  Mr. 
Cosgrove  to  say  good  night  for  them. 

Mr.  Fisher  and  Mr.  Cosgrove  were  not  so  well 
satisfied  with  the  outlook  as  it  forebode  something 
new  to  them,  and  did  not  seem  to  point  in  the  direc- 


THE    KINGDOM     OF     GOLD  209 

tion  of  carrying  out  without  delay  the  purposes  of 
the  expedition.  As  soon  as  they  reached  the 
steamer,  the  events  of  the  afternoon  were  related  to 
the  others,  and  the  prospects  before  them  were  dis- 
cussed with  considerable  warmth,  until  after  the 
evening  meal,  when  Mr.  Hammond  suggested  the 
Oracle  be  consulted,  in  the  absence  of  Nina  and 
Mrs.  Fleming,  to  see  if  the  purposes  of  the  expedi- 
tion were  to  be  pushed  forward  to  consummation. 
He  prepared  the  following  question. 

"We  have  now  arrived  at  the  island  indicated  as 
the  place  where  the  "Kingdom"  should  be  pro- 
claimed. 

"Are  we  to  consider  this  as  the  place  selected  for 
the  location  of  the  Temple  and  treasury  house? 
And  if  so  will  you  give  directions  for  the  discovery 
of  the  Atoll,  into  which  all  our  Great  Ships  are  to 
anchor?    I  will  a  reply." 

Mr.  Cosgrove  held  Jesse's  hand  and  this  was  the 
answer : 

"You  do  well  to  ask  frequently  for  aid,  for  it  is 
in  this  way  you  have  received  all  you  now  possess 
regarding  the  Kingdom.  Step  by  step  we  proceed 
on  a  journey,  stone  by  stone  we  lay  a  foundation, 
brick  by  brick  we  build  a  temple,  and  it  should  ever 
be  borne  in  mind  that  the  order  and  arrangement  of 
the  plan  must  be  followed  if  we  are  to  erect  an  en- 
during structure. 

"While  you  do  well  to  seek  guidance,  you  will 
also  do  well  to  bear  in  mind  that  there  is  a  time  for 


210  THE     KINGDOM     OF     GOLD 

each  thing,  as  well  as  a  place,  and  that  there  is  a 
proper  time  for  information  relating  to  a  known 
work.  On  a  former  occasion  it  was  made  known 
to  you  that  when  the  right  time  came,  the  required 
words  would  be  given,  but  that  the  time  had  not 
yet  arrived.  And  so  on  this  occasion  you  are  again 
assured  that  the  Kingdom  will  be  announced  on 
this  island.  The  time  has  not  yet  arrived  when  the 
information  regarding  it  can  be  given,  but  it  will 
not  be  long. 

"As  often  as  you  have  doubts  concerning  your 
duty,  ask  for  guidance,  and  then  endeavor  to  re- 
ceive with  faith,  and  to  act  on  what  you  receive. 
The  announcements  of  the  days  near  at  hand  shall 
be  full  of  glory,  such  as  you  have  not  yet  experi- 
enced. 

"Hie  wonders  and  beauties  of  the  Kingdom  will 
be  made  manifest  by  exam.ples  which  will  forever 
answer  as  guides  in  the  construction  of  the  Temple." 

At  the  conclusion  Mr.  Hammond  said  the  ad- 
dress sounded  more  like  a  sermon  than  like  practical 
directions  for  the  establishment  of  the  greatest  un- 
dertaking the  world  had  ever  seen.  He  feared  other 
minds  than  those  interested  in  the  enterprise  had 
become  for  the  time  dominant,  and  that  the  only 
thing  to  do  was  to  submit  to  what  was  transpiring, 
and  endeavor  to  get  it  completed;  and  then  he  be- 
lieved there  would  come  a  time  when  Jesse  would 
again  be  at  their  service. 

All  agreed  that  a  serious  crisis  was  at  hand,  and 


THE     KINGDOM     OF     GOLD  211 

the  question  was  in  what  way  could  it  best  be  over- 
come, or  passed.  They  concluded  to  ask  Jesse  no 
more  until  the  following  day,  and  gave  orders  to 
have  a  cottage  prepared  for  his  temporary  dwelling 
as  directed. 

On  the  following  afternoon,  the  members  of  the 
Kingdom  were  seated  in  the  largest  room  of  the 
little  house  with  Jesse,  his  mother  and  brother,  Nina 
and  the  other  members  of  the  Hassen  family,  and 
Alonzo  Parsons,  who  had  been  invited  by  Mrs. 
Fleming. 

There  remained  little  unoccupied  space.  Mrs. 
Fleming  requested  that  Nina  take  Jesse's  hand  and 
ask  some  questions  they  had  prepared. 

Mr.  Fisher  remarked  that  it  would  be  proper  first 
to  read  the  questions,  to  see  if  there  were  any  ob- 
jections to  them.     They  were  read. 

'Jesse,  can't  you  try  and  remember    when    you 

wake  up  what  you  are  now  saying  to  us?"     And, 

Can't  you  tell  us  why  you  have  lost  your  memory, 

so  that  when  awake  you  do  not  know  your  mama?" 

All  assented  and  Nina  took  Jesse's  hand.  As  on 
former  occasions  he  instantly  became  as  a  little  child, 
and  Nina  asked  him  the  questions.  He  simply  an- 
swered in  a  childish  way  promising  to  remember  all 
they  wanted  him  to,  but  could  tell  nothing  about 
why  he  lost  his  memory.  He  insisted  on  seeing 
Kitty,  and  a  cat  was  brought  and  placed  in  his  lap. 
He  said  that  was  not  his  Kitty,  and  wanted  his. 


212  THE    KINGDOM     OF    GOLD 

Nina  told  him  his  Kitty  had  died,  and  this  was  an- 
other for  him — he  might  call  it  his. 

At  first  he  was  dissatisfied,  but  soon  exhibited 
pleasure  with  holding  it.  He  also  wanted  Fido, 
but  was  told  the  dog  was  dead.  Then  he  wanted 
to  go  out  and  see  the  chickens,  and  Nina  led  him 
out,  when  he  complained  that  he  could  see  nothing. 
He  pleaded  to  have  his  eyes  "fixed"  so  he  could  see. 

After  a  little  while  he  was  induced  to  return  to 
the  room,  but  would  not  remain  because  it  was  hot. 
He  wanted  to  go  out  under  the  trees  where  it  was 
cool. 

All  followed  them  under  the  trees,  where  various 
questions  were  asked,  but  no  satisfactory  answers 
were  received,  Mrs.  Fleming  suggested  he  be  asked 
if  he  could  tell  them  about  the  little  boat  in  which 
he  received  the  stroke  of  lightning,  and  if  he  could 
remember  being  taken  on  the  large  vessel.  To  these 
he  could  give  no  sensible  replies. 

At  last  Nina  said,  "Why  Jesse,  you  went  all 
around  that  big  world  Elnathan  Yardley  told  us 
about.  Don't  you  remember  what  he  used  to  say 
to  us  about  God,  and  the  worlds  He  had  made? 
And  about  how  big  this  one  is?  And  how  there  are 
very  big  islands  with  so  many  people  on  them?" 

To  which  Jesse  replied,  "Oh,  yes,"  and  raising 
his  head  as  if  looking  for  some  one  he  cried  out 
"Nat'an  Yardley,  why  don't  you  tell  them  about 
the  big  world?"  And  then  immediately  resuming 
the  attitude  of  a  man  he  spoke  to  the  assembly. 


THE     KINGDOM     OF     GOLD  213 

"The  worlds  which  the  Almighty  has  made,  are 
indeed  wonderful,  and  even  this  comparatively  small 
and  insignificant  one  is  also  great  and  beautiful. 

"Who  can  study  its  form  and  geographical  out- 
lines, its  mountains  and  oceans;  its  forests  and  des- 
erts, without  becoming  amazed  at  its  beauty  and 
grandeur!  Each  object  comprises  a  study,  too  ex- 
tensive for  the  grandest  intellect. 

"Marvelous  indeed  are  the  manifestations  of 
forces,  which  project  the  mountain  peaks  above  the 
clouds;  and  hold  each  object  as  if  in  a  vice  of  iron; 
that  distribute  and  control  the  mighty  oceans,  which 
if  loose  might  overwhelm  the  nations  of  the  earth  in 
a  day!  Not  an  object  too  great  or  one  too  small 
to  escape  the  notice,  and  be  subject  to  the  power 
which  rules  the  universe! 

"The  nations  and  Kings  of  the  earth  are  also 
subject  and  no  power  exists  which  can  contend  with 
this  All-pervading  force. 

"You  are  here  congregated  for  purposes  that  are 
both  worthy  and  unworthy;  and  you  seek  for  guid- 
ance by  words  from  the  mouth  of  the  dumb!  Well 
knowing  that  which  you  hear  is  from  a  source  greater 
than  the  instrument  of  utterance. 

"You  seek  to  establish  a  kingdom  that  will  be- 
come the  grandest  the  world  ever  witnessed,  re- 
nowned for  its  matchless  magnificence  and  power, 
while  there  are  those  who  are  bowed  down  in  great 
sorrow  and  heaviness  of  heart,  seeking  for    a    re- 


214  THE     KINGDOM     OF     GOLD 

storer  who  can  re-establish  him  who  was  lost;  who 
is  now  found,  but  is  dumb !  blind !  and  dethroned ! 

"Both  dwell  in  fear  lest  the  object  desired  be  not 
obtained.  Fear  not!  All  that  is  best  will  be  ful- 
filled in  due  time. 

"You  need  to  make  some  changes  in  the  proposed 
management  of  your  Kingdom  before  it  will  be 
proper  to  allow  it  to  become  established.  It  might 
retain  all  the  accumulations  of  wealth,  and  all  the 
wonderful  inventions,  and  exercise  the  powers  be- 
longing to  it.  But  it  should  be  under  the  guidance 
of  intelligence,  rather  than  the  influence  of  gold. 

"No  inanimate  thing  can  confer  upon  its  possessor 
powers  sufficient  to  govern  or  direct  the  affairs  of  a 
kingdom;  much  less  dictate  to  the  nations  of  the 
earth !  Only  the  highest  order  of  intellect  can  guide 
such  powers  safely,  or  direct  the  management  of 
such  a  kingdom  as  you  propose  to  establish. 

"The  possessor  of  intelligence  may  not  be  the 
owner  of  gold,  but  he  may  be  purchased  with  gold; 
and  so  be  brought  to  a  place  of  power. 

"By  the  use  of  your  gold  you  can  discover  the 
proper  person  to  direct  the  affairs  of  your  kingdom, 
and  if  you  neglect  to  do  so,  confusion  and  anarchy 
will  naturally  follow. 

"Only  such  a  mind  as  can  penetrate  far  beyond 
the  present  and  comprehend  the  results  of  active 
forces  can  protect  your  kingdom  from  overthrow. 

"Therefore  you  need  to  substitute  new  rules  for 
the  selection  of  your  president,    treasurer    and    all 


THE     KINGDOM     OF     GOLD  215 

Other  officials,  for  the  same  rule  holds  good  through 
all  ramifications  of  government;  the  mangement  of 
the  great  Ships  and  the  various  agencies  you  propose 
to  establish  around  the  world. 

"To  test  the  ability  of  your  prospective  rulers, 
you  should  employ  at  a  good  salary,  twenty-four  of 
the  most  learned  men  to  be  found,  and  let  them  de- 
vise standards. 

"They  need  not  be  made  acquainted  with  the 
objects  of  your  kingdom,  but  rather  be  led  to  sup- 
pose you  are  seeking  a  candidate  for  your  own  gov- 
ernment of  the  United  States. 

"Having  prepared  the  tests  let  advertisement  be 
made  that  a  contest  will  take  place,  and  that  apph- 
cants  for  examination  are  desired,  and  that  large  re- 
wards will  be  paid  to  the  successful  competitors. 

"V/hen  you  have  in  this  manner  secured  twenty- 
four  of  the  wisest  men  in  the  world,  and  the  time 
has  arrived  for  the  establishment  of  your  Kingdom, 
then  you  can  make  known  the  works  you  desire  them 
to  perform." 

At  the  conclusion  Jesse,  still  holding  Nina's 
hand,  continued  his  childish  talk  as  if  unconscious 
of  what  had  occurred. 

Mr.  Fisher  immediately  proceeded  to  address  the 
assemblage,  and  more  particularly  the  members 
present,  and  was  very  enthusiastic  in  approval  of  the 
proposed  changes  in  the  conduct  of  the  affairs  of 
the  Kingdom.  He  pointed  out  that  it  was  after  all 
but  following  in  the  line  he  had  started  out  on  when 


216  THE     KINGDOM     OF     GOLD 

he  first  secured  the  assistance  of  the  Oracle,  and  he 
explained  that  it  seemed  necessary  to  bring  Jesse  to 
this  place,  to  get  him  into  harmonious  relations  with 
such  a  mind  as  had  just  furnished  this  desirable  in- 
formation. 

As  soon  as  Mr.  Fisher  had  finished,  Mr.  Ham- 
mond was  on  his  feet,  and  under  great  excitement. 
He  denounced  the  whole  proceeding  as  being  ex- 
actly in  keeping  with  the  "Sermon"  of  the  previous 
evening,  delivered  on  the  ship.  "We  are  gone  en- 
tirely astray",  said  he,  "and  until  there  is  harmony 
established  between  this  mother  and  her  son,  we  can 
do  nothing.  All  this  about  great  intellects  without 
money  is  bosh !  Did  he  not  tell  us  that  the  greatest 
intellect  could  be  bought  with  gold?  How  long 
would  such  a  mind  direct  the  affairs  of  this  king- 
dom?" 

The  excited  manner  and  loud  words  caused  great 
uneasiness  in  the  company,  and  Nina  had  released 
the  hand,  and  Jesse  stood  entirely  unconscious  of 
what  was  transpiring.  His  was  the  only  calm  face 
present;  beaming  with  that  sweet  smile,  pale  and 
motionless. 

Mr.  Fisher  commenced  making  a  reply  to  Mr. 
Hammond's  vehement  utterance,  but  Mr.  Hale 
wanted  to  say  something  at  the  same  time.  Hiere 
was  so  much  confusion  that  Mrs.  Fleming  withdrew 
to  the  cottage  accompanied  by  Nina  and  Howard. 
Mr.  Hassen  and  Alonzo  Parsons  also  retired,  and 


THE     KINGDOM     OF     GOLD  217 

the  members  of  the  Kingdom  now  being  by  them- 
selves continued  the  controversy. 

Mr.  Armstrong  thought  it  possible  to  arrange  a 
compromise  by  which  both  possessors  of  money  and 
those  receiving  awards  for  intellectual  ability  se- 
lected as  indicated,  might  co-operate  in  the  affairs 
of  the  Kingdom. 

Mr.  Hale  stood  firm  with  Mr.  Hammond,  and 
Mr.  Cosgrove  simply  expressed  the  opinion  that 
George  would  yet  be  able  to  settle  the  difficulty, 
when  the  proper  time  arrive^. 

As  there  seemed  to  be  no  prospect  of  agreeing, 
Mr.  Cosgrove  suggested  they  seek  some  diversion; 
and  calling  to  Mr.  Parsons  who  was  at  a  little  dis- 
tance, asked  if  he  would  conduct  them  to  the  beach 
where  the  children  had  entered  the  boat,  on  the  day 
which  had  wrought  such  marvelous  effects  on  Jesse; 
when  the  lightning  seemed  to  have  been  as  a  mes- 
senger from  heaven  for  the  accomplishment  of  some 
great  purpose! 

Alonzo  gladly  accompanied  them  to  the  play 
ground,  and  described  the  boat  and  the  events  which 
followed.  All  became  absorbed  in  tracing  the  voy- 
ages of  Jesse,  Mrs.  Fleming  and  Nina,  around  the 
world,  and  recalling  som.e  of  the  remarkable  expe- 
riences of  Mrs.  Fleming;  the  wonderful  meeting  in 
London,  and  the  unaccountable  effects  on  her  health. 
They  reviewed  the  revelations  of  the  past  few 
months,  especially  considering  the  instructions  given 
previous  to  the  trip  to  Honolulu,  the  warnings  about 


218  THE     KINGDOM     OF     GOLD 

not  restraining  any  inclinations  Jesse  might  mani- 
fest, and  the  meeting  with  Nina  in  Honolulu,  which 
seemed  to  be  prearranged,  and  they  all  agreed  that 
in  him  alone  could  they  expect  to  find  that  which 
would  solve  the  great  questions  with  which  they  were 
absorbed. 

But  Mr.  Hammond  insisted  that  he  should  be 
brought  under  the  original  influences — those  whose 
minds  were  centered  on  the  purposes  of  the  expedi- 
tion— before  important  consideration  should  be  given 
to  his  sayings. 

"You  see,"  said  he,  'how  George  can  be  either 
a  child,  without  knowledge,  or  a  sage  and  seer  in 
one!  We  do  not  want  childish  advice.  Wait  till 
these  clouds  roll  by,  and  we  will  get  away  to  the 
work  of  the  Kingdom." 


THE     KINGDOM     OF     GOLD  219 


CHAPTER   XVIII. 
THE  KINGDOM  PROCLAIMED. 

ALONZO   PARSONS   PROCLAIMS   A  DIVINE 

KINGDOM  AND  FURNISHES  MIRACULOUS 

DEMONSTRATIONS! 

Alonzo  Parsons,  as  an  observer  of  what  trans- 
pired on  the  day  following  the  arrival  of  Jesse,  was 
confounded,  when  he  heard  the  dumb  speak,  and 
eminent  minds  discuss  his  utterances,  and  was  quite 
as  much  surprised  later  to  hear  these  same  individ- 
uals unanimously  declare,  after  a  heated  controversy, 
that  Jesse's  declarations  were  their  only  reliance. 

Before  starting  for  his  own  home  he  entered  the 
cottage  and  found  Mrs.  Fleming  in  tears;  greatly 
agitated  over  the  unsatisfactory  occurrences  of  the 
day,  and  especially  because  Jesse  when  in  his  normal 
state  could  remember  nothing  which  transpired  dur- 
ing the  time  he  realized  her  presence.  She  con- 
cluded that  herself  and  all  his  relatives  and  friends 
must  seem  as  strangers  to  him,  in  so  far  as  he  was 
able  to  realize  their  presence.    And  that  if  he  should 


220  THE    KINGDOM     OF     GOLD 

remain  with  her  it  would  be  almost  impossible  to 
entertain  him  on  either  plane  of  his  existence — child 
or  man!  and  that  he  would  remain  seemed  very 
doubtful. 

Alonzo  recalling  the  words  of  Mr.  Hammond 
(when  he  spoke  of  having  Jesse  away  somewhere  to 
the  work  of  the  Kingdom)  was  not  able  to  give 
Mrs,  Fleming  any  assurance  that  Jesse  would  not 
be  taken  from  her,  but  promised  to  do  all  he  could 
to  have  them  consider  how  cruel  it  would  be  to  sep- 
arate mother  and  child,  and  reminded  her  that  the 
Beers  cottage  had  been  prepared  for  his  residence. 

Mrs.  Fleming  could  gather  no  assurance  from 
that  fact  and  frankly  expressed  her  doubts  as  to  the 
propriety  of  retaining  Jesse,  if  he  desired  to  go  with 
hi&  foster-father ;  as  he  would  be  losing  a  substituted 
but  practical  father,  to  obtain  a  real,  but  impractical 
mother.  And  Mr.  Cosgrove  had  proven  himself 
in  every  way  v/orthy  of  the  possession  of  Jesse,  and 
could  make  his  life  of  darkness  at  least  endurable; 
while  it  was  doubtful  if  she  could.  She  considered 
how  all  knowledge  of  her  as  a  mother  would  have 
to  rest  entirely  on  the  flimsy  foundation  of  a  belief 
imparted  by  one  who  himself  did  not  know,  but 
possessed  only  a  reasonable  assurance  of  the  fact; 
and  entertained  great  concern  lest  his  health  might 
be  undermined  by  an  attempt  to  adjust  himself  to 
the  conditions  of  such  a  new  life. 

The  questions  which  arose  in  her  mind  were  over- 
whelming, and  she  pleaded  with  Alonzo  to  have  him 


THE     KINGDOM     OF     GOLD  221 

do  anything  possible  to  delay  decisive  action  regard- 
ing Jesse. 

Alonzo  assured  her  he  was  willing  to  do  every- 
thing he  could,  but  felt  the  chief  reliance  should  be 
on  God.  He  reminded  her  how  the  promise  relat- 
ing to  Jesse  had  been  partly  fulfilled;  when  by  all 
human  judgment  it  seemed  impossible,  and  that  the 
promise  included  his  restoration. 

The  members  of  the  Kingdom  returned  to  the 
Hassen  cottage,  and  informed  Mrs.  Fleming  that 
Jesse  would  remain  on  the  island  and  that  as  soon 
as  they  had  further  directions  they  would  notify  her. 
It  was  decided  that  Mr.  Fisher  and  Mr.  Cosgrove 
should  remain  with  Jesse,  and  the  others  would  re- 
turn to  the  ship;  but  previous  to  going  they  would 
give  him  an  opportunity  to  inform  them  what,  if 
anything,  should  be  done  on  the  following  day. 

Shortly  after  their  arrival  at  the  prepared  cottage, 
which  was  known  as  the  "Beer's  place,"  Mr.  Ham- 
m.ond  took  Jesse's  hand  and  asked  "What,  if  any- 
thing, do  you  desire  done?    I  will  a  reply." 

Without  a  moment's  hesitation  Jesse  said:  "The 
establishment  of  the  Kingdom  is  the  great  work  at 
hand.  Congregate  tomorrow  at  nine  o'clock  in  the 
Hassen  cottage.  Inform  Mrs.  Fleming  that  you 
will  be  there,  and  let  Mr.  Cosgrove  hold  the 
Oracle's  hand,  when  this  question  is  asked:  'How 
shall  we  proceed  to  establish  the  Kingdom?  . 

All  seemed  pleased  with  the  words  received ;  and 
Mr.  Hammond  expressed  himself  as  gratified  with 


222  THE     KINGDOM     OF     GOLD 

the  outlook.  "You  see,"  said  he,  "that  so  much  de- 
pends upon  the  influence  of  the  person  who  holds 
George's  hand.  It  is  almost  impossible  to  get  busi- 
ness from  a  simple  child  of  nature  Uke  Nina." 

Word  was  immediately  sent  to  Mrs.  Fleming 
that  Jesse  had  fixed  the  time  for  meeting  again,  at 
her  home,  at  nine  o'clock  on  the  morrow. 

Mrs.  Fleming  sent  Howard  to  Alonzo  Parsons  to 
ask  him  to  be  present,  and  preparations  were  begun 
to  try  and  make  the  room  more  comfortable  than  it 
had  been,  by  removing  some  of  the  furniture,  and 
securing  seats  from  the  ship. 

Mrs.  Fleming  and  the  Hassen  family  talked  that 
evening  about  the  events  of  the  previous  days,  and 
Mrs.  Fleming  told  them  she  had  been  thinking  of 
how  Alonzo  had  heard  that  voice  which  told  them 
Jesse  would  come,  and  that  now  he  still  assured  her 
that  all  of  the  promise  would  be  fulfilled.  She 
thought  the  words  which  Jesse  had  uttered  must  be 
by  the  help  of  God,  for  how  else  could  the  dumb 
speak? 

"What  can  we  do  but  pray  for  Jesse?  poor  child! 
I  believe  if  Alonzo  would  take  his  hand,  he  would 
be  helped  in  some  way,  for  certainly  Alonzo  is  a 
servant  of  God!" 

Little  was  understood  by  the  inhabitants  of  the 
island  of  what  had  transpired  in  and  about  the  Has- 
sen cottage.  What  they  heard  sounded  strange  and 
incredible  and  absorbed  interest  was  everywhere 
evident.     The  inmates  of  the  Hassen    house    had 


THE     KINGDOM     OF     GOLD  223 

found  sleep  almost  impossible,  and  all  were  wear- 
ing out  with  the  excitement  and  uncertainty  which 
continued  to  increase  rather  than  diminish. 

When  the  members  of  the  Kingdom  came  to  at- 
tend the  appointed  meeting,  they  found  the  room  in 
order,  but  the  inmates  wore  haggard  expressions, 
some  faces  were  pale,  others  flushed,  and  everybody 
seemed  to  feel  as  if  a  crisis  was  at  hand.  Silence 
reigned,  excepting  such  words  as  were  necessary  to 
arrange  the  guests. 

Last  of  all  came  Alonzo  Parsons  and  his  was 
the  only  face  which  bore  a  smile.  He  was  particu- 
larly observed  by  all,  and  Mrs.  Fleming's  heart  took 
new  courage  as  he  entered.  Well  might  his  coun- 
tenance express  joy,  for  his  heart  beat  with  expec- 
tation. 

After  leaving  Mrs.  Fleming  on  the  previous  day, 
he  went  to  his  dwelling  to  pray,  and  commune  with 
God.  It  was  while  pleading  for  help  that  he  heard 
a  voice  saying  "Have  faith".  He  went  forth  and 
attended  to  the  work  of  the  evening,  and  retired  with 
feelings  of  assurance  that  Jesse  would  be  restored 
to  his  mother. 

In  the  morning  after  he  had  finished  the  prepara- 
tions for  the  day,  and  arranged  everything  for 
Mary's  comfort,  he  bid  her  good-bye  and  told  her 
to  be  of  good  cheer  and  "have  faith,"  for  the  words 
were  for  her  as  well  as  for  himself,  and  he  hastily 
departed. 

Just  as  he  came  to  the  brow  of  the  hill  overlooking 


224  THE     KINGDOM     OF     GOLD 

the  valley,  where  the  Hassen  cottage  rested  under 
the  shelter  of  the  higher  ground  to  the  north  and 
east,  a  voice  spoke  to  him,  and  his  inner  senses 
heard:  ''This  da]^  shall  //ip  mouth  he  filled  with 
wisdom!  Open  the  epes  of  the  hlind!  Command 
the  deaf  to  hear!    Declare  MY  Kingdom!'* 

Realizing  that  he  was  late,  Alonzo  hurried  on 
and  entered  the  room.  All  were  seated  and  he  was 
quietly  motioned  to  a  place  near  Mrs.  Fleming. 

Jesse  sat  with  Mr.  Cosgrove.  As  soon  as  Alonzo 
was  seated  Mr.  Hammond  arose  and  informed  the 
meeting  that  Jesse  had  given  directions  the  evening 
before,  that  Mr.  Cosgrove  should  hold  his  hand, 
and  the  question  should  be  asked — "How  shall  we 
proceed  to  establish  the  Kingdom." 

Mr.  Cosgrove  immediately  repeated  the  question, 
holding  Jesse's  hand  and  willing  a  reply,  which  was 
made  as  follows: 

"The  word  Kingdom,  necessarily  implies  that 
there  is  a  King,  who  directs  the  manner  in  which  it 
shall  be  established. 

"The  term  "Kingdom  of  Gold"  implies  that  Gold 
is  King;  a  substance  imbued  with  neither  sense  nor 
power  to  direct  any  kingdom ;  .but  which  must  nec- 
essarily be  represented  by  the  intelligence  that  owns 
or  controls  it. 

"It  is  evident  that  only  ignorance  would  insist  that 
the  thing  possessed  is  superior  to  the  possessor! 

"To  establish  that  which  does  not  possess  intelli- 


THE     KINGDOM     OF     GOLD  225 

gence  would  be  to  set  up  an  idol,  that  it  may  tumble 
down,  as  contending  forces  undermine  it. 

"That  which  does  not  possess  power  to  overcome, 
cannot  endure,  however  favorably  located  it  may  be. 

"We  have  come  from  a  distant  land  to  establish  a 
Kingdom  which  shall  rule  the  world.  We  have  had 
the  promise  that  it  shall  be  proclaimed  on  this  isl- 
and, and  that  the  time  is  near  at  hand.  So  far  we 
have  proceeded  according  to  the  highest  obtainable 
information,  and  have  witnessed  many  mysterious 
manifestations.  Now  the  time  is  drawing  nigh  when 
we  shall  experience  a  fulfillment  of  a  promise.  As 
you  have  received  with  confidence  many  things  of 
the  past,  so  may  you  now  hold  fast  to  that  made 
manifest  to  you. 

"Do  not  be  over  anxious,  for  that  will  not  hasten 
the  fulfillment. 

"It  is  better  that  one  should  hold  his  tongue,  than 
attempt  to  utter  that  which  he  does  not  know." 

At  the  conclusion  of  these  words  Mr.  Hammond 
immediately  arose  and  said.  "I  can  understand 
what  this  all  means  as  I  have  before  explained  to 
you.  I  for  one  propose  to  withdraw,  and  allow 
George  to  proceed  with  these  foolish  influences,  un- 
til you  shall  all  be  satisfied.  Then  we  can  take  up 
the  work  of  the  Kingdom.  I  think  until  his  mother 
is  willing  to  allow  him  to  follow  his  own  inclinations, 
he  will  not  be  able  to  do  anything  either  for  her  or 
for  us.  She  does  not  seem  to  realize  that  he  is  deaf, 
dumb  and  blind!  beyond  all  human  help!  and  that 


226  THE     KINGDOM     OF     GOLD 

he  does  not  even  remember  her,  and  therefore  can- 
not be  as  a  son  to  her,  nor  she  as  a  mother  to  him. 
It  may  be  hard  for  her  to  feel  to  give  him  up;  but 
I  beheve  she  will  after  a  while.  That  is,  give  up 
having  such  a  strong  desire  for  him  to  remain  with 
her. 

"He  may  remain  after  she  reaches  that  state  of 
feeling,  and  be  a  great  comfort  to  her  by  the  wisdom 
he  may  manifest. 

"He  is  likely  to  become  one  of  the  most  impor- 
tant men  in  the  whole  world!  in  connection  with 
the  work  we  propose  to  carry  out.  But  so  long  as 
he  is  held  by  her  mind,  I  do  not  believe  he  will 
amount  to  anything. 

"Mrs.  Fleming,  I  wish  you  would  try  and  think 
as  I  do  about  your  son,  he  is  a  wonderful  being!" 

Mrs.  Fleming  had  been  anxious  to  be  allowed  to 
make  a  suggestion,  and  when  this  opportunity  came, 
she  asked  if  she  might  request  Alonzo  Parsons  to 
take  Jesse's  hand.  She  thought  it  might  do  him 
good  to  have  Alonzo  ask  some  questions. 

Mr.  Hammond  replied  that  he  had  no  objections 
to  Mr.  Parsons,  more  than  to  any  other  person,  ex- 
cept that  to  his  mind,  it  was  simply  delaying  the 
work  before  them. 

As  there  was  no  other  opposition  offered,  Alonzo 
without  other  invitation  stepped  forward  and  took 
Jesse's  hand. 

Jesse  arose,  and  the  two  stood  side  by  side,  and 
immediately  sang  in  concord: 


THE     KINGDOM     OF     GOLD  227 

"Praise  God  from  whom  all  blessing  flow, 
Praise  Him,  all  Creatures  here  below; 
Praise  Him  above,  ye  heavenly  host ; 
Praise  Father,  Son  and  Holy  Ghost!" 

At  its  conclusion  Mr.  Hammond  immediately 
rose  and  said:  "You  see  now  what  I  have  repeat- 
edly told  you;  that  George  is  simply  subject  to  dif- 
ferent minds.  Here  we  have  the  very  best  kind  of 
illustration  of  it;  for  without  a  question  or  word  of 
command,  he  immediately  sang  in  harmony  with 
Mr.  Parsons.  I  have  no  doubt  his  sensitive  mind 
became  unisoned  with  Mr.  Parson's;  so  that  if  Mr. 
Parsons  had  made  any  change  in  the  usual  form  of 
the  words  George  would  also  have  immediately 
made  the  same  change. 

"Now  we  might  go  on  with  this  kind  of  foolish- 
ness, and  never  get  George  to  do  any  sensible  work 
again. 

"Mrs.  Fleming,  you  have  asked  that  Mr.  Parsons 
might  take  George's  hand;  will  you  please  indicate 
what  you  wish  him  to  ask?" 

Mrs.  Fleming  replied,  "I  thought  he  might  do 
Jesse  some  good.  I  do  not  know  what  to  have  him 
ask  unless  it  be,  why  his  mind  does  not  allow  him 
to  remember  me." 

"Well,  Mr.  Parsons,"  said  Mr.  Hammond,  sup- 
pose you  ask  him  that  question?" 

Alonzo  repeated  the  question  and  willed  Jesse  to 
reply. 


228  THE     KINGDOM     OF     GOLD 

"Because  by  the  effects  of  the  lightning  I  lost  the 
power  of  Tvill."    That  was  all  he  uttered. 

TTiere  was  silence  for  a  moment  and  then,  still 
standing  and  holding  Jesse's  hand,  Alonzo  spoke 
with  a  loud  clear  voice. 

"This  day  is  fulfilled  in  me  a  promise  that  my 
mouth  should  be  filled  with  wisdom,  and  that  I 
should  declare  the  Kingdom,  which  has  been  prom- 
ised should  be  established  in  these  latter  Japs. 

"The  Kingdom  which  I  proclaim  is  to  be  dis- 
covered in  the  heart;  yet  its  manifestation  shall  as- 
tonish the  whole  world ! 

"It  shall  not  appear  by  man's  wisdom,  nor  be 
governed  by  man's  power.  It  shall  not  depend  on 
force,  nor  be  in  the  least  overcome  by  any  power  of 
man. 

"It  will  not  be  a  Kingdom  of  oppression,  but  of 
peace  and  good  will. 

"It  will  not  be  a  Kingdom  of  self-aggrandize- 
ment, but  of  striving  to  be  benevolent. 

"It  will  not  be  a  Kingdom  of  restraint;  but  of 
liberty. 

"It  will  not  monopolize  privileges,  but  dispense 
blessings. 

"It  will  not  hoard  treasures,  but  give  with  a  gen- 
erous hand. 

"Whatsoever  is  good  will  not  be  for  a  few,  but 
for  all  to  enjoy. 

"The  King  thereof  will  be  an  invisible  King,  ex- 
cept to  the  eye  of  faith,  on  occasion. 


THE     KINGDOM     OF     GOLD  229 

"His  subjects  'will  undertake  to  be  universally 
benevolent,  forgiving  injuries,  being  willing  to  do 
good  without  return;  being  willing  to  render  good 
for  evil,  desiring  all  men  to  be  happy,  and  providing 
means  for  their  happiness  as  far  as  in  their  power.' 

"The  King  will  be  All-pervading,  and  every- 
where present  with  His  subjects;  and  His  love  and 
kindly  care  will  be  continually  over  them,  and  lead 
them  in  peaceful  paths  and  protect  them. 

"Spiritual  gifts  will  be  bestowed  upon  His  sub- 
jects, so  that  they  shall  be  enabled  to  do  good,  and 
by  His  aid  to  heal  the  sick,  and  restore  those  who 
are  weak  in  mind. 

"  'He  is  the  Light  which  enlighteneth  every  man 
that  cometh  into  the  world'. 

"This  day  shall  you  see  the  manifestation  of  His 
love,  wisdom  and  power! 

"For  he  that  stands  blind  before  you,  even  Jesse, 
him,  do  I,  in  the  name  of  my  King,  command  to 
open  his  eyes!" 

Immediately  Jesse  stood  gazing  at  them! 

"Open  thy  ears  and  hear  the  words  of  good  will 
to  men! 

"And  do  thou  be  made  whole  in  mind,  and  will, 
and  henceforth  ONE — even  Jesse  Fleming! 

"After  a  little  you  may  greet  your  mother, 
brother,  and  friends;  but  listen  first,  oh  ears!  which 
have  been  dormant  so  many  years,  to  the  words  of 
truth. 

"Even  as  you  see  these  things  done  in  your  pres- 


230  THE     KINGDOM     OF     GOLD 

ence;  even  so  should  you  realize  that  this  same 
power  is  ever  present  vs^ith  all  men,  if  they  will  but 
receive  it. 

"This  is  that  Kingdom  which  you  should  seek 
first;  and  then,  all  else  that  is  necessary  for  your  or 
others'  good,  shall  be  added. 

"This  is  that  Kingdom  which  shall  endure 
throughout  all  time,  and  subdue  and  overcome  all 
that  is  in  opposition  to  it;  either  here  on  earth, 
or  in  the  heavens  above  the  earth! 

"This  is  that  Kingdom  which  is  made  without 
hands  which  will  fill  the  whole  earth  and  which 
'shall  break  in  pieces  and  consume  all  those  King- 
doms of  iron,  brass  and  clay,  silver  and  gold.' 

"Not  by  force  but  by  love  and  persuasion;  by 
every  means  which  makes  men  better ;  by  destroying 
the  evil  in  them,  which  will  be  consumed;  leaving 
only  that  which  is  good. 

"Mankind  must  be  made  to  comprehend  that 
there  is  something  attainable  beyond  human  knowl- 
edge: 

This  is  that  Kingdom  which  cometh  down  from 
Heaven. 

"All  those  powers  which  you  see  established,  or 
being  established,  are  known  unto  the  King  and 
Lord  of  all.  And  all  these  shall  be  made  to  glorify 
Him. 

"If  you  seek  by  "Poly^-theory",  or  the  combined 
wisdom  of  all  men  in  bodily  form;  you    shall    but 


THE     KINGDOM     OF     GOLD  231 

discover  fragments  of  truth,  without  the  necessary 
wisdom  to  arrange  or  unite  them, 

"And  if  you  seek  by  mediumship,  to  consult  in- 
visible minds,  such  as  Elnathan  Yardley,  and  those 
dwelling  on  the  same  plane,  who  have  joined  with 
him  in  controlling  a  passive  instrument  like  Jesse, 
you  will  but  secure  similar  truths,  to  those  possessed 
by  men  in  the  body. 

"And  if  you  start  out  to  found  a  Kingdom,  led 
by  any,  or  all  these,  you  shall  be  led  by  devious 
ways,  but  the  end  of  all  will  be  the  presence  of  Him 
who  'holdeth  the  reins  of  government  in  His  own 
hands'. 

"And  if  you  seek  to  establish  yourselves  in  the 
most  distant  isle  of  the  sea,  behold  He  is  there  be- 
fore you!  And  has  prepared  the  way  that  you 
might  see  His  glory  manifested! 

"And  if  you  seek  Him  near  by  even  in  your  in- 
fvard  parts,  there  will  He  be  found,  the  Wonderful ! 
the  Counsellor!  the  Prince  of  Peace!  ready  to  es- 
tablish His  Kingdom  in  you. 

"For  all  things  in  heaven  and  on  earth !  wise  men, 
familiar  spirits,  angels  and  arch  angels;  are  given 
into  His  hands!  and  no  other  Kingdom  shall  prevail! 

''It  is  the  'New  Jerusalem  which  cometh  down 
from  heaven  ,  that  Eternal  Ci7\j  not  made  with 
hands." 

'Her  gates  shall  he  praise. 
Her  streets  good  works. 


232  THE     KINGDOM     OF     GOLD 

Her  temples,  the  heart  tvithin  ijou. 

Her  light  the  light  of  God's  presence. 

And  Her  glor^  from  everlasting  to  everlasting T 

"  'May  God  so  shine  into  your  hearts,  as  to  expel 
therefrom  all  darkness,  contention  or  strife.  May 
He  deliver  you  from  your  own  wills,  into  the  free- 
dom of  His  glorious  Kingdom  of  peace,  righteous- 
ness and  heavenly  or  Divine  Love.     Amen.'  " 

As  the  echo  of  Alonzo's  voice  died  away,  Jesse 
rushed  into  his  mother's  arms,  and  closely  about 
them  clustered  Howard  and  the  members  of  the 
Hassen  family,  all  eager  to  welcome  him  back  home 
with  all  its  endearing  attachments  and  blessings. 

The  members  of  the  Kingdom  were  divided  in 
their  demonstrations.  Mr.  Cosgrove  and  Mr.  Fisher 
appeared  as  rejoiced  as  those  of  the  family  circle, 
while  Mr.  Hammond  stood  aside  with  Mr.  Hale 
discussing  the  possibility  of  Jesse's  loss  to  the  King- 
dom. 

Mr.  Armstrong  stood  midway  between  the  crowd 
and  Mr.  Hammond,  absorbed  in  thoughts  which 
made  him  oblivious  to  all  that  was  transpiring. 

Alonzo  also  stood  alone,  but  his  gaze  was  in- 
tently fixed  on  Jesse,  who  greeted  and  embraced 
first  one  and  then  another  of  those  about  him;  his 
foster-father  as  warmly  as  he  had  his  mother,  and 
with  as  much  apparent  affection  and  regard. 

Mr.  Fisher  also  embraced  Jesse,  as  he  congratu- 
lated him  on  the  miraculous  recovery  of  his  sight  and 


THE     KINGDOM     OF     GOLD  233 

hearing,  and  Mr.  Armstrong  followed  by  Mr.  Hale 
and  Mr.  Hammond  in  turn  greeted  him  with  con- 
siderable show  of  interest. 

Alonzo  was  the  last  to  take  Jesse's  hand,  and  as 
he  did  so  Jesse  fell  on  his  knees  before  him!  He 
kissed  Alonzo's  hand  and  bowed  his  head  in  rever- 
ence. 

But  Alonzo  immediately  stooped  and  raised  him 
to  his  feet,  and  as  he  did  so,  imprinted  a  kiss  on 
Jesse's  forehead,  and  in  gentle  but  determined  tones 
commanded  that  Jesse  should  not  bow  before  any 
human  being,  except  as  he  looked  beyond  to  the 
Father  of  all,  to  whom  all  praise,  honor,  and  glory 
should  be  ascribed. 

Both  wept  with  joy  as  they  offered  praise  and 
thanksgiving  to  God. 

In  the  face  of  such  a  miracle,  coupled  with  de- 
nunciations of  the  "Kingdom  of  Gold"  none  could 
be  so  foolhardy  as  to  offer  opposing  words,  even 
though  they  might  entertain  contentious  thoughts. 

The  news  of  Jesse's  restoration  spread  so  rapidly 
that  a  great  crowd  was  congregated  around  the  Has- 
sen  cottage,  and  were  being  admitted  to  greet  him. 

He  remembered  all  who  were  acquainted  with 
him  previous  to  his  tragic  departure,  and  retained 
all  the  knowledge  acquired  during  his  partially  ob- 
scured existence. 

The  members  of  the  Kingdom,  now  but  an  in- 
significant few  of  the  large  gathering  congregated 
about  the  Hassen  home,  realized  that  they  could 


234  THE     KINGDOM     OF     GOLD 

neither  be  of  service,  nor  secure  any  benefits  by  re- 
maining, so  they  retired  to  the  Beers  cottage,  where 
they  discussed  the  marvelous  events  of  this  impor- 
tant day! 

Jesse  continued  to  receive  the  congratulations  of 
the  inhabitants  until  all  had  shaken  his  hand  and 
expressed  kind  wishes,  while  he  returned  their  salu- 
tations and  continually  offered  praise  to  God. 

After  all  had  been  received  Jesse  sent  Howard 
to  say  to  Mr.  Cosgrove,  and  the  others  that,  with 
their  consent,  he  would  remain  at  his  mother's  for 
the  night,  and  would  meet  them  at  the  Beers'  cot- 
tage on  the  morrow. 

Howard  returned  with  word  that  the  arrangement 
suggested  was  satisfactory  to  all,  and  that  the  mem- 
bers of  the  Kingdom  joined  in  sending  additional 
congratulations. 

Mrs.  Fleming's  joy  was  proportioned  to  her  love; 
greater  satisfaction  could  not  be  experienced !  And 
Howard,  too,  rejoiced  with  a  brother's  feelings. 

But  there  was  one  who  was  elated  with  unspeak- 
able gladness  and  gratification!  Nina,  for  the  first 
time  was  permitted  to  exchange  salutations  with  an 
individualized  Jesse,  with  all  his  senses  restored  and 
memory  intact.  His  words  were  very  tender  and 
assuring,  for  in  them  he  had  expressed  both  love  and 
gratitude.  The  power  which  restored  and  read- 
justed his  outward  or  earthy  memory,  also  enlivened 
his  inward  or  'memory-of -memories'  by  which  he  re- 


THE     KINGDOM     OF     GOLD  235 

tained  all  the  impressions  received  from  others  dur- 
ing his  negative  experiences. 

These  impressions  were  as  photo-memories  and 
enabled  Jesse  to  review  the  lives  of  all  those  who 
had  by  an  act  of  will  superseded  his  power  of  will, 
in  the  same  manner  that  he  remembered  his  own  ex- 
periences. In  appropriating  the  prerogatives  of  an- 
other, they  had  forfeited  exclusive  jurisdiction  over 
their  own  possessions.  All  their  past  became  as  evi- 
dent as  his  own,  and  a  glance  sufficed  to  reveal 
Nina's  love,  and  the  sacrifices  she  had  endured  that 
he  might  be  rescued. 

His  gratitude  went  out  as  he  embraced  her,  and 
thanked  her  for  her  noble  efforts. 

"Dear  Nina,  I  know  now  all  you  have  suffered 
for  my  sake.  May  heaven's  blessings,  and  my  en- 
during love  be  your  reward!" 


236  THE     KINGDOM     OF     GOLD 


CHAPTER   XIX. 

LIGHT  AND  LIFE. 

Formerly  the  servant  and  humble  instrument, 
Jesse,  by  the  miraculous  manifestation  through 
Alonzo,  had  become  an  independent  Hving  Oracle, 
retaining  all  his  powers  and  possessing  consciousness 
and  the  ability  to  explain  what  he  experienced. 

What  a  marvelous  transition  was  witnessed  when 
he  met  with  the  members  of  "The  Kingdom  of 
Gold" — that  Kingdom  which  he  had  unconsciously 
been  led  to  establish! 

He  sat  as  a  limited  monarch,  crowned  with  super- 
regal  glory,  confronting  them.  He  first  explained 
his  Associated  position,  that  they  might  realize  the 
importance  of  his  opinions,  and  understand  their  true 
relationship  to  him. 

"Let  us  sit  closely  together,  and  endeavor  to  har- 
monize our  desires,  that  I  may  select  from  your 
memories,  the  words  and  phrases  with  which  to  ex- 
plain my  position,  and  describe  my  experiences. 

"For  my  personal  vocabulary  is  very  limited,  but 
by  the  heavenly  light  which  came  through  Alonzo, 


THE     KINGDOM     OF     GOLD  237 

my  spiritual  mind,  acting  as  a  negative,  transferred 
all  the  memories  of  those  who  had  controlled  my 
will,  to  the  tablets  of  my  own  memory,  and  what 
^ou  all  knoTv  I  J^noTv! 

"But  I  have  not  established  a  habit  of  mind  by 
which  I  can  readily  assemble  and  present  this  vast 
accumulation  of  ideas  without  the  harmonious  help 
of  your  thoughts,  which  form  channels  of  research. 

"I  remember  what  you  know,  but  I  cannot  ex- 
press or  readily  realize  all  this  knowledge.  I  also 
remember  what  none  of  you  know,  that  is,  my  indi- 
vidual experiences. 

"In  order  that  I  may  describe  parts  of  it  to  you, 
it  is  necessary  that  I  take  from  the  memories  of  those 
who  have  sustained  associated  action  with  me,  such 
words  as  are  adapted  to  the  subjects. 

"This  might  be  called  "poly-theory"  but  a  better 
understanding  will  be  conveyed  by  the  term  polyi- 
memories. 

"There  are  three  spheres  of  action — the  earthly, 
the  spiritual,  and  the  heavenly.  Or  more  tangibly, 
the  magnetic;  the  odic;  and  the  Aural. 

"Previous  to  the  action  of  the  electric  shock,  by 
which  I  lost  the  use  of  part  of  my  senses,  I,  like  all 
unprogressed  children,  was  confined  entirely  to  the 
magnetic  sphere  of  action,  using  only  those  faculties 
which  could  be  exercised  by  magnetic  powers.  The 
lightning  paralyzed  some  of  the  functions,  and  the 
remaining  senses  were  developed,  as  I  dwelt  in  a 
silent  world  of  midnight  darkness. 


238  THE     KINGDOM     OF     GOLD 

"When  Professor  Greatwell  with  his  active  'odic 
force'  overpowered  my  will,  I  became  a  passive  in- 
strument, by  which  those  who  desired  could  use  my 
mind  and  vocal  organs  to  express  their  views. 

"I  did  not  assemble  or  collect  ideas,  but  my  pow- 
ers were  used  by  others,  as  a  pen  is  used  to  write. 
The  words  expressed  were  usually  the  preparations 
of  a  spokesman  who  acted  for  all  those  who  were 
interested.  Many  contributed,  but  one  expressed 
the  ideas. 

"By  appropriating  my  functions,  each  individual 
associated  by  will,  to  accomplish  the  act,  was 
brought  into  conjunction  with  me  in  the  odic  sphere. 

"These  comprised  a  multitude;  some  being  in 
earthly  bodies,  and  others  in  spiritual  bodies;  but 
all  were  united  with  me  as  by  an  insulated  con- 
ductor. 

"The  odic  sphere  is  not  restricted  to  the  spiritual 
world.  Many  minds  on  earth  are  more  progressed 
in  odic  action;  than  many  who  are  dwellers  in  the 
spiritual  world. 

"Minds  in  both  magnetic  and  odic  spheres  used 
my  vocal  organs  and  brain,  as  an  Oracle,  to  direct 
the  enterprise  which  found  its  central  controlling 
force  in  Mr.  Hammond;  around  whom  all  the  other 
visible  and  invisible  beings  revolved,  submitting  in 
greater  or  less  degrees  their  wills  and  judgments  to 
his. 

"All  the  wisdom  and  power  possessed  by  this 
associated  body  of  beings — hundreds  in  number — 


THE     KINGDOM     OF     GOLD  239 

was  concentrated  to  accomplish  the  purposes  of  the 
organized  Kingdom  of  Gold. 

"As  you  observe  associations  of  children,  youth, 
young  men,  and  older  men,  on  earth,  so  in  the  spirit- 
ual world  there  are  associations,  of  those  who  pos- 
sess similar  desires  and  purposes.  While  many  earth 
spirits  were  co-operating  with  Elnathan  Yardley  to 
further  the  plans  of  the  Kingdom,  many  others  were 
united  and  conjoined  to  make  your  efforts  produc- 
tive of  good — as  a  teacher  uses  kindergarten  to 
educate  a  child. 

"And  as  there  are  superintendents,  principals,  and 
teachers  to  direct  the  course  of  the  student,  so  there 
are  associations  and  super-associations,  to  direct  and 
influence  the  actions  of  beings  on  the  various  sub- 
divided spheres  of  Odic  and  Magnetic  life. 

"TTirough  and  by  these  superintending  beings, 
you  were  brought  in  contact  with  Nina  Hassen,  and 
to  this  island,  and  finally  to  Alonzo  Parsons. 

"As  magnetism  pervades  a  fragment  of  iron  with- 
out becoming  permanently  combined  with  or  united 
to  it,  so  od,  or  odic  life,  can  pervade  a  magnetic 
body,  and  in  like  manner  withdraw. 

"As  the  Odic  pervades  the  magnetic,  the  Aural 
or  Divine  can  pervade  both  the  odic  and  magnetic. 

"While  the  magnetic  is  pervaded  by  the  odic  its 
manifestations  are  Odic,  or  spiritual,  according  to 
the  sub-sphere  from  which  the  odic  force  or  being 
proceeds.  TTiis  force  is  always  individualized  power 
— a  being. 


240  THE     KINGDOM     OF     GOLD 

"When  the  magnetic  or  odic  is  pervaded  by  the 
Aural,  the  manifestations  are  Aural  or  by  a  Divine 
Being. 

"Of  such  were  the  miraculous  manifestations 
through  Alonzo! 

"In  the  Aural  or  Divine  sphere  it  is  One  Life. 
It  is  one  light;  but  there  are  myriads  of  myriads  of 
beings  who  are  joint  heirs  and  participators  in  this 
One  Life,  and  who  dwell  in  and  are  continually 
pervaded  by  this  Light. 

"It  is  the  Breath  of  the  Infinite!  It  pervades  the 
'Great  Universal  Whole\  and  those  who  dwell  in 
the  Divine  light,  and  who  are  actively  united  to  this 
Divine  Life  formerly  inhabited  the  innumerable 
worlds  of  the  universe! 

"The  glory  of  this  light  is  such,  that  it  rivets  the 
attention  and  fills  the  whole  being  with  a  joy  in- 
effable! 

"As  Alonzo  took  my  hand  this  Light  entered  my 
soul,  and  I  sang  praises  to  God.  My  inward  mem- 
ory was  illumined  as  I  stood  in  silence  in  the  All- 
pervading  Presence,  and  I  saw  the  light  flashing 
along  every  channel  of  connection,  into  the  cham- 
bers of  every  mind  that  had  controlled  me,  or  that 
had  united  their  wills  in  my  control. 

"I  saw  their  inward  parts,  and  all  their  past  was 
as  a  page,  which  reflected  and  impressed  my  mem- 
ory so  that  it  became  my  own. 

"The  light  dwelt  as  a  halo  about  Alonzo;  each 
word  that  he  uttered  was  a  ray  of  light  and  when 


THE    KINGDOM    OF    GOLD  241 

he  commanded  me  to  open  my  eyes,  it  came  as  a 
lapping  flame  and  removed  every  obstruction !  Like- 
wise w^ere  my  ears  opened,  my  speech  restored,  and 
my  inward  powers  and  perceptions  quickened,  so 
that  I  had  power  to  discern  the  various  sub-spheres 
of  odic  matter,  and  the  beings  who  corresponded  to 
those  spheres. 

"I  observed  that  the  Hght  of  the  spiritual  world 
varied  according  to  its  degree  or  sphere  of  progress, 
but  that  it  was  all  reflected  light;  and  by  comparison 
like  different  degrees  of  moonlight ;  while  the  Aural 
or  Divine  Light  was  as  the  light  of  the  sun,  and  the 
magnetic  or  earth  light,  was  as  that  produced  by 
the  stars.  I  also  noticed  that  those  who  were  asso- 
ciated in  the  Spiritual  world,  were  not  so  closely  or 
unitedly  active  around  one  person,  as  those  who 
were  in  earthly  bodies.  I  found  that  Elnathan 
Yardley,  was  my  "guardian  angel",  the  nominal 
leader  of  those  who  controlled  me,  but  was  very 
often  displaced  by  others  possessing  greater  odic 
force. 

"I  could  see  that  all  in  that  odic  sphere  were  more 
passive  than  positive,  and  that  many  were  inclined 
to  follow  the  lead  of  those  who  were  in  the  mag- 
netic sphere,  unless  they  were  influenced  by  those 
who  were  in  the  Divine  sphere,  when  they  became 
for  the  time  positive  to  those  in  the  earthly  sphere. 
I  passively  rested  in,  and  seemed  to  be  united  to  this 
Light,  which  led  me  as  by  a  ray  of  itself,  and  con- 
ducted me  into  my  ^'memor'^-oi -memories*  where. 


242  THE    KINGDOM    OF    GOLD 

without  effort  of  thought,  I  became  the  recipient  of 
all  I  had  seen  and  experienced.  After  reviewing 
the  past,  my  mind  became  activel]^  desirous,  and  I 
endeavored  to  understand  the  future. 

"The  ray  which  had  continued  to  lead  me  from 
one  inward  chamber  to  another,  now  led  my 
thoughts  out  and  upward.  I  could  not  follow  its 
rapid  course,  but  realized  that  the  information  I  de- 
sired, was  not  in  the  sphere  of  those  minds  I  had 
been  associated  with. 

"Then  came  an  impression  which  seemed  like 
the  return  or  doubling  back  of  the  ray  of  light,  and 
it  said  'this  is  not  best  for  ])ou  to  k^oTv\  Then  I 
realized  that  the  light  in  which  I  had  dwelt  and 
which  had  led  me  was  a  being,  and  that  all  the  light 
I  had  witnessed  was  also  Life! 

"As  long  as  I  submitted  m^  Tvill,  I  was  led  in- 
ward, and  instructed,  but  the  instant  I  formed  a  de- 
sire of  my  own,  I  was  led  outward,  and  the  light 
receded  from  me. 

"I  then  learned  that  the  Divine  light  was  subject 
to  will  power,  and  that  to  dwell  in  the  light,  the  Tvill 
must  be  submitted.     ThE  DESIRES  MUST  EMANATE 

FROM  THE  Divine  Life. 

"As  the  light  left  me  I  realized  that  /,  too,  was 
light.  But  I  had  no  power  of  myself  to  sustain  my 
life,  or  action,  in  this  light.  I  could  not  realize  any 
form  or  boundaries  to  my  light,  but  seemed  to  be 
enveloped  by  a  cloud  as  the  light  disappeared. 

"I  was  soon  aware  that  this  cloud  had  form  and 


THE    KINGDOM    OF    GOLD  243 

that  it  was  my  spiritual  body !  It  was  as  tangible  to 
my  touch  and  senses  as  my  outward  body  is  to  my 
outward  senses. 

"It  was  od;  and  possessed  a  blue  luminosity. 

"Again  I  seemed  enveloped  by  a  cloud,  and  the 
darkness  increased.  I  heard  Alonzo's  voice,  and 
was  cognizant  of  my  earthly  body ! 

"My  joy  was  intense  as  I  embraced  my  mother, 
brother,  foster-father,  and  friends;  and  realized  that 
my  sight,  hearing,  and  speech  had  been  restored! 

"But  when  I  greeted  Alonzo,  the  Light  immedi- 
ately entered  my  soul  again!  And  while  I  kissed 
his  hand  in  gratitude,  I  worshipped  God!  and  was 
led  by  the  Light  to  that  chamber  within,  where  the 
memory  of  Alonzo  was  imaged,  and  I  learned  that 
by  prayer,  by  strenuous  efforts  of  desire,  he  had 
been  assisted  to  submit  his  will  to  God,  and  that, 
because  of  this  effort,  and  submissive  action,  he  had 
been  the  instrument  of  Divine  Miracle;  by  which 
my  restoration  had  been  accomplished.  Wonder 
not  that  I  bowed  before  him! 

"//e  had  been  led  b^  the  Spirit  of  God  and  had 
become  a  Son  of  God!  But  I  worshipped  God,  and 
the  homage  I  paid  to  Alonzo  he  transferred  to  God. 
For  I  could  see  that  he  took  no  honor  or  glory  to 
himself. 

"My  dear  foster-father,  and  my  dear  friends,  I 
can  see  in  your  minds  great  anxiety  lest  the  kingdom 
you  and  others  have  modeled  should  come  to  nought. 

"I  have  surveyed  the  whole  field  of  memories, 


244  THE    KINGDOM    OF    GOLD 

and  find  no  information  which  will  give  you  any  as- 
surance of  success. 

"You  have  formulated  a  possible  kingdom,  but 
the  lesson  which  was  taught  me,  prevents  any  desire 
on  my  part  to  know  your  future. 

"I  am  attracted  continually  to  that  one  chamber 
within  me  where  there  is  a  light  and  a  peace  Jvhich 
are  inefahle. 

*'I  rejoice  because  of  my  restoration,  and  feel 
thankful  to  you  all  because  you  became  helpful  in 
bringing  me  to  this  fountain  of  light  and  truth. 

"If  you  receive  no  other  reward  than  the  gratitude 
of  one  who  was  a  poor,  bUnd  deaf  and  dumb  child 
of  earth  but  who  is  now  made  whole  you  are  not 
without  compensation. 

"I  would  remind  you  of  the  joy  and  thanksgiving 
of  a  loving  mother  and  brother,  and  especially  of 
the  devoted  and  heroic  friend  who  encircled  the 
globe  that  she  might,  if  possible,  restore  me  to  my 
kindred.  All  the  inhabitants  of  this  island  join  with 
me  in  gratitude. 

"But  above  all  I  point  you  to  a  Restorer,  who,  I 
trust,  may  in  like  manner  open  your  inward  vision, 
so  that  you  may  be  enabled  to  submit  }^our  wills  and 
be  guided  from  within;  and  hear  a  still  small  voice 
that  will  bring  such  assurance  of  wise,  merciful 
guidance,  as  shall  satisfy  every  desire  of  your  being, 
by  either  granting  your  wishes,  or  by  substituting 
other  aspirations  to  take  their  places  in  the  ceaseless 
life-stream  of  existence;  now,  and  henceforth,  and 
forever;   Amen. 

The  End. 


The  Doctrines  of  Life  as   Revealed   by   the 

Inner  Voice,  Listened  to  and  heard  by 

Theodocia   Eighmie  Carpenter. 


CONTENTS- VOLUME  I. 

THE    SEED    OF    THE    SPIRIT    TRUE    TO    ITSELF 

OBEDIENCE  TO  THE  VOICE  OF  GOD 

THE  USE  OF  THE  PRESENT  HOUR 

HABITS  AND  HOW  TO  BREAK  THEM 

man's  relation  to  HIS  HABITS 

THE  VOICE  OF  GOD   .... 

SATISFACTION  THROUGH  THE  LAW  OF  COMPEN 
SATION 

MENTALITY  SPIRITUALLY  CONSIDERED    . 

POWER  OF  MIND  TO  CREATE  HAPPINESS 

HOW  TO  SEEK  WORK  IN  TIMES  OF  FINANCIAL 
DISTRESS 

TRUE  CHRISTIAN  GIVING 

LIFE  IN  THE  SPHERES  AND  MAN's  PREPARATORY 
STAGE  AS  IT  SHOULD  BE  ADVANCED  ALONG 
CERTAIN    LINES 

LIFE  IN  THE  SPHERES  AND  MAN's  PREPARATORY 
STAGE  AS  IT  SHOULD  BE  ADVANCED  ALONG 
CERTAIN   LINES,   PART  TWO       .         .         .         . 

LIFE  IN  THE  SPHERES  AND  MAN's  PREPARATORY 
STAGE  AS  IT  SHOULD  BE  ADVANCED  ALONG 
CERTAIN   LINES,    PART  THREE 

HELPFUL  THOUGHTS  ON  HOW  TO  LIVE  NEARER 
GOD 

THE  WILL  OF  MAN  ANALYZED 

THE  PAST  AND  PRESENT  STATE  OF  MAN  COM- 
PARED   

god's  BROADER  DEALINGS  UNREALIZED  BY  THE 
UNDEVELOPED  MIND  OF  MAN    .... 

FREEDOM  OF  SOUL 

THE  COMING  CHRIST  IN  MAN 

LIFE  IN  ITS  THREEFOLD  ELEMENTS 


II  CONTENTS 

THE  ONLY  WAY  TO  SUBMIT  THE  WILL  TO  GOD, 

THE  LIGHT  OF   LOVE 

THE  USE  AND  ABUSE  OF  ALCOHOLIC  DRINKS      . 

THE  BOOK  OF  LIFE 

PRECIOUS  THOUGHTS 

man's   religious   COURSE 

THE  LEADINGS  OF  THE  SPIRIT 

SHALL  MAN  FORSAKE  THE  WAYS  OF  THE  WORLD 

IN  THE  SERVICE  OF  GOD?  .... 

REASONS  FOR  THE  STUDY  OF  DRAWING  . 

HOW  GOD  TEACHES  MAN 

THE  SPIRITUAL  WAY  OF  ACCOMPLISHING  WORK 
AND  THESE  SHALL  GO  AWAY  INTO  EVERLASTING 

PUNISHMENT,   BUT  THE  RIGHTEOUS   INTO 

LIFE  ETERNAL.  MATTHEW  25:46  . 
THE  RELATIONS  BETWEEN  GOD  AND  MAN  . 
man's    power    and    OPPORTUNITY    FOR    DOING 

GOOD 

HOW  MAN  IS  TO  USE  HIS  GIFTS 

FAITH,  LOVE  AND  SALVATION 

god's  message  to  man 

man's  true  measure  of  excellence 

the  road  to  happiness 

knowledge  and  experience  as  related  to 

business 

the  way  out  of  troubles     .  '   . 

systematizing  knowledge 

where  to  look  for  god 

salvation 

THE  UNFOLDING  OF  MAN's  SPIRITUAL  NATURE 

PASSIVITY  AND  ACTIVITY 

THE  WELL-BEING  OF  THE  SPIRIT      .... 
BE     PASSIVELY     RECEPTIVE     WHILE     ACTIVELY 

SEARCHING   FOR   TRUTH 

SERVING  GOD  BLINDLY 

man's  RESPONSIBILITY 


CONTENTS  HI 

FANTASTIC  THOUGHTS,  THEIR  ORIGIN  AND  USE 

FELLOWSHIPS 

WHAT  IS  THE  TRUE  VALUE  OF  MAN's  INDIVID- 
UALITY AS  COMPARED  WITH  THE  GREAT 
SUPREME  I  AM? 

life's   BURDENS 

TIME  AND  ITS  USES 

TWO  VIEWS  OF  CHARACTER  BUILDING    . 

THE  REVEALING  OF  TRUTH 

man's  service  to  GOD  CONSIDERED 

GOD  AS  MADE  MANIFEST  TO  MAN       .... 

god's  service  and  how  IT  SHOULD  BE  TAUGHT 
TO    CHILDREN 

OBEDIENCE  TO  GOD's  CALL 

HUMILITY 

god's  justice 

THE   EDUCATING  OF   BOYS 

LOVE  AND  WISDOM 

DAILY  MEDITATION 

JUDGING    CHARACTER    

INDEPENDENT  THOUGHTS  AND  HOW  TO  TREAT 

THEM 

THE  HIGHEST  PLANE  FOR  AN  EVEN  TEMPER     . 

TRUE  AND   FALSE   REST 

SMOKING  A  SPIRITUAL   HINDRANCE 

man's    MASTERY    OVER    THE     LOWER    ANIMALS 

RIGHTFULLY  GAINED 

SOCIAL  PROBLEMS  AND   HOW  TO  MEET  THEM    . 

SPIRIT  AS  RELATED  TO  SPIRIT 

man's   spiritual    nature    and    ITS    RELATION 

to  his  bodily  life 

man's  present  and  future  state     . 

WILL  and  its  powers 

life's    LIGHTS   AND   SHADOWS 

THE  WILL  AND  JUDGMENT  AS  RELATED  TO  SELF 
AND   OTHERS    


IV  CONTENTS 

WHAT  ARE  THE  EFFECTS  OF  ALCOHOL  AS  A 
BEVERAGE?        

WHAT  SHOULD  BE  THE  CHRISTIAN'S  RULE  FOR 
GIVING? 

man's  SPIRITUAL  STATE  COMPARED  WITH  THAT 
OF  OTHER  ANIMALS 

HOW  TO  ECONOMIZE  TIME,  FIND  ONE's  MISSION 
AND  UNDERSTAND  WHEREIN  LIES  THE 
HIGHEST  ORDER  OF  HAPPINESS       . 

man's  PRESENT  AND  FUTURE  STATE  IN  ITS  RE- 
LATION TO  god's  infinitude 

man's  accountability 

man's  desires  and  their  fulfillment  . 

THE  BASIS  for  GOD's  CLAIM  FOR  GRATITUDE, 
AND  HOW  INFANTS,  WITHOUT  EARTH  EX- 
PERIENCE, REPAY  THEIR  DEBT  OF  GRATI- 
TUDE FOR  THEIR  FREE-GIFT  EXPERIENCE 
OF    HEAVEN       

THE  WISDOM  OF  CO-OPERATION  BETWEEN  MOR- 
TALS AND  DISEMBODIED  SPIRITS       . 

THE  RELATION  OF  MAN's  KNOWLEDGE  TO  ETER- 
NAL TRUTH       

RIGHTEOUS  AND  UNRIGHTEOUS  ACTS  CON- 
TRASTED      

IMMEDIATE  CONDITION  OF  THE  SPIRIT  AFTER 
THE  DEATH  OF  THE  BODY  .... 

THOUGHTS  AND  THEIR  USE  UNDER  THE  LAW 
OF   FREE-WILL 

THE  LAW  FOR  SELF  CONTROL 

man's  PROPER  VIEW  OF  GOD  AND  SPIRITS     . 

PROFIT  AND  LOSS  OF  HAPPINESS       .... 

LAW  OF  OUTWARD  MANIFESTATIONS  AND  OF 
SPIRITUAL  GROWTH 

god's  veiled  MERCY  IN  CALLING  MANY  BY 
DISASTERS  THAT  SUDDENLY  END  THEIR 
EARTHLY  EXISTENCE,  AND  FIRST  STEPS  IN 
RECONCILIATION  AND  PROGRESS    . 


CONTENTS  V 

REASONS  FOR  HOPE,  AND  GOD's  CLOSE  RELA- 
TIONS  TO   MAN         

THE  HIGHEST  PURPOSE  OF  DOUBT  AS  TO  A 
FUTURE  STATE  OF  BLISS 

LOVE,   HATE  AND  INDIFFERENCE  COMPARED       . 

REAL  CRITICISM  A  NATURAL  EFFECT      . 

THE  INJUSTICE  OF  ONE  SIDED  VIEWS  AND  HOW 
TO   CORRECT  THEM 

DISCOURAGEMENT  AND  INDIFFERENCE  COM- 
PARED; FROM  THE  FINITE  TO  THE  INFI- 
NITE: LOVE  AND  AFFINITY;  SELF-LOVE's 
RIGHTFUL  CLAIM 

man's  attitude  towards  his  BLESSINGS    . 

HOW  SHALL  man's  SPIRIT  BE  QUICKENED    . 

HOW  TO  FOLLOW  GOD  AND  SERVE  HIM  ACCEPT- 
ABLY      

WISDOM  DEFINED;  WHY  AND  HOW  TO  PRACTICE 
IT 

A  SPIRITUAL  SIDE  TO  EVERYTHING  MAN  MAY  DO 

THE  world's  growth  IN  KNOWLEDGE  OF  GOD 
UP  TO  THE  PRESENT  TIME  AS  COMPARED 
WITH  THE  BETTER  UNDERSTANDING  BY 
FUTURE   GENERATIONS 

man's  IMPERFECT  ESTIMATE  OF  HIS  OWN  CHAR- 
ACTER AND  FALSE  JUDGMENTS  AS  TO 
THE  CHARACTER  OF  OTHERS    .... 

THE  DEMAND  FOR  MIRACLES 

PROBLEMS  OF  ETERNAL  LIFE;  HEREDITY  FROM 
THE  BEGINNING  AND  HOW  MAN  MAY  RISE 
HIGHER  THAN  ITS  CLAIMS         .... 

THE  STRONGEST  INCENTIVE  FOR  MAN's  AMBI- 
TION TO  CONFORM  HIS  WILL  TO  THE  WILL 

OF    GOD        

BLESSINGS  WHICH  FOLLOW  IN  THE  WAKE  OF 
GREAT  DISAPPOINTING  SHOCKS,  AND  FOR 
SUCH  AS  BUILD  BETTER  THAN  THEY  KNOW 


VI  CONTENTS 

WHY  MAN  SHOULD  STRIVE  WITH  A  PURPOSE  IN 
VIEW 

ETERNAL  PRINCIPLES  BY  WHICH  ALL  THE  CON- 
DITIONS OF  MAN  FIND  ADJUSTMENT     . 

OF  WHAT  USE  IS  MAN  TO  GOD?  OR  GOD's 
FATHERHOOD  COMPARED  WITH  MAN's 
FATHERHOOD?         

HOW  FAR  SHOULD  MAN  SEEK  TO  KNOW  THE 
EVENTS  OF  THE  FUTURE  IN  EARTH  LIFE? 

HOME  INSTINCTS  AND  TO  WHAT  DEGREE  SHOULD 
THEY  BE  CULTIVATED 

VIEW  POINTS  OF  THE  ATHEIST  AND  THE  TRUE 
CHRISTIAN   COMPARED 

man's  free-will,  its  POWERS  AND  RESTRIC- 
TIONS AS  RELATED  TO  GOD  AND  TO  HIS 
FELLOW  MEN 

NERVES,  IMAGINATION  AND  THAT  SPARK  BY 
WHICH  UNDERSTANDING  IS  CONVEYED  TO 
MAN 

SOME  PARALLEL  LAWS  BEARING  ON  MEN's 
THOUGHTS  AND  THE  LEAVES  OF  TREES      . 

IN  WHAT  DOES  RELIGION  CONSIST?  AND  HOW 
CAN  SERVICE  BE  RENDERED  TO  GOD?    . 

THE  LIFE  AND  INDIVIDUALITY  OF  IDEAS 

WHAT  HAS  MAN  TO  DO  WITH  SHAPING  HIS  OWN 
DESTINY? 

god's  school  for  man 

FRIVOLITIES  AND  THEIR  VALUES  AS  A  NEUTRAL- 
IZING ELEMENT       

WHAT  FEARS  GUARANTEE  AND  HOW  TO  EX- 
CHANGE  THEM   FOR  PEACE       .... 

HOW  THE  TRUE  ESTIMATE  OF  MAN'  SUCCESSES 
AND  FAILURES  WILL  BE  MADE 

DEFINITE  RULE  FOR  SERVICE 

HAS  ENVIRONMENT  ANY  PROTECTIVE  IN- 
FLUENCE IN  RAISING  A  TALENT  TO  THE 
STANDARD  OF   GENIUS 


contents  vii 

life's  innate  value  as  life  itself,  and  how 

TO  SHOW  forth  due  APPRECIATION    . 

A  PRACTICAL  SHOWING  OF  THE  FATHERHOOD 
OF  GOD,  AND  OF  HIS  MANAGEMENT  OF  HIS 
CHILDREN 

RESPECTING  DUTIES  AFFECTING  OTHER  PEOPLE 

BOYS  OF  TODAY ;  ADVICE  TO  YOUNG  MEN       . 

WHAT  SPECIAL  ADVANTAGE  IS  TO  BE  DERIVED 
FROM  A  HIGHLY  TRAINED  EYE  AND  EAR     . 

love's  realm 

NOTING  RESULTS  OF  WORK,  RATHER  THAN 
THE  WORK  ITSELF 

THE  SECRET  SPRING  OF  SATISFACTION  IN  EVERY 
HEART  

THE  REALM  OF   CONSCIOUSNESS         .... 

HOW  MAN  MAY  HAVE  THE  GUIDANCE  OF  GOD  IN 
ALL  THINGS  GREAT  OR  SMALL   .... 

THE  VASTNESS  OF  THE  UNEXPLORED  FIELD  OF 
THOUGHT,  AND  THE  NEED  OF  CULTIVAT- 
ING  BROADER  THOUGHT   SYSTEMS 

THE  RESPONSIBILITY  AS  TO  KNOWLEDGE  AND 
THE  SELF-CENTERING  OF  EACH  INDIVID- 
UAL CONSCIENCE 

DUTIES  CONSIDERED  ON  THE  GROUND  OF  THE 
HIGHEST  SERVICE  TO  GOD  AND  MAN     . 

DRESS  AS  A  SPIRITUAL  EXPOSITION  OF  CHARAC- 
TER        

god's  love  FOR  MAN  AND  HOW  MAN  SHALL 
UNDERSTAND  AND  APPRECIATE   IT 

VOLUME  II. 

THE  LAW  RELATING  TO  MARRIAGE  IN  THE 
REALM  OF  SPIRIT 

CONCERNING  TRUTHS  OF  THAT  SPIRITUAL 
QUALITY  THAT  CONSTITUTES  RIGHT  AS 
OPPOSED  TO  WRONG 


VIII  CONTENTS 

THE  RIGHT  APPRECIATION  OF  THOUGHTS  AND 
THEIR   VALUES 

SELF-CONTROL  CONSIDERED  IN  THE  LIGHT  OF 
THE  ANALOGY  BETWEEN  THE  ACTION  OF 
MATTER  UPON  MATTER  AND  SPIRIT  UPON 
SPIRIT 

NO  FORE-ORDINATION  FOR  MAN's  WILL,  WITH 
ADVICE  AS  TO  ITS  USE 

THE  DUTY  OF  BESTOWING  LIGHT  ON  THOSE  IN 
DARKNESS;  ITS  DIFFICULTIES  AND  HOW  TO 
OVERCOME  THEM    

WHAT  SHOULD  A  MAN  DO  WHO  HAS  NOTHING 
BUT  HIS  MONEY  TO  RECOMMEND  HIM  TO 
THE  GOOD  GRACES  OF  HIS  FELLOW  MEN     . 

THE  ADVANTAGE  OF  AN  EARLY  RECONCILIATION 

TO   god's   will   and    how   god's   SENT- 

SPIRITS  MINISTER  TO  MAN  .... 

FUTURE  EVENTS;  A  RIGHTEOUS  SCOPE   FOR  AN 

AIM,    AND    THE    SCIENCE    OF    RIGHT    MIND 

ACTION 

HOW  TO   ENGENDER  SYSTEMATIC   THINKING   BY 

NATURAL   PROCESS 

THE  POWER  OF  ENVIRONMENT,  ITS  ADVANTAGES 

AND      DISADVANTAGES      AND      WHAT      CAN 

HARMONIZE    THEM 

EXAMPLES,  NOT  ENOUGH  TO  INSURE  BUT  MOST 

EFFICIENT  ALONG  SPIRITUAL  LINES     . 

THE  SEARCH  FOR  GOD 

PRESENTATION  OF  TRUTH  FOR  ACCEPTANCE  BY 

OTHERS        

man's  PREPARATION  FOR  THE  WORK  GOD  HAS 

for  him  to  do 

the  time,  place  and  opportunity  for  lov- 
ing and  serving  god 

life's  lessons  and  how  taught  .... 

the  prayer  from  the  heart      .... 


CONTENTS  IX 

THE  NORMAL  LEVEL  OF  THINKING  THE  MOST 
SATISFACTORY 

THE  GOODNESS  OF  GOD  AND  THE  GOODNESS  OF 
MAN  CONSIDERED  AS  TO  QUALITY   . 

WHEN  THE  VEIL  IS  LIFTED         ..... 

man's  selfishness  contrasted  WITH  god's 

GENEROSITY 

WHAT  BENEFITS  ACCRUE  FROM  FALSE  BELIEFS 
AND  FALSE  CONCEPTIONS  OF  GOD  AND 
MAN 

LANGUAGE  IN  EVERYTHING 

HAPPINESS  man's  DAILY  PORTION  IF  RIGHTLY 
SOUGHT       

SPIRIT  IN  ALL  THINGS  SEEN,  HEARD  OR  RECOG- 
NIZED BY  THE  MIND  OF  MAN    .... 

HOW  AND  WHEN  SHALL  JUSTICE  COME  TO 
REIGN  IN  THE  ADJUSTMENTS  OF  CAPITAL 
AND  LABOR?      

SALVATION  BY  GRACE 

SCRIPTURE  WISDOM  AND  THE  CALL  FOR  MORE    . 

CONSIDERATION  OF  THE  QUALITIES  AND  CHAR- 
ACTERISTICS  OF   TRUTH      

PEACE,  HOW  TO  OBTAIN  IT  AND  WHAT  FOLLOWS 
AFTER  

A  BETTER  QUALIFIED  USE  OF  LANGUAGE  DE- 
SIRABLE AND  WHY  

WILL  AND  ITS  POWERS  RIGHTLY  SET  TO  WORK    . 

THE  INNUMERABLE  MULTIPLICITY  OF  THE 
POWERS   OF    MAN 

TO  PLEASE  AND  DO  GOOD,  PRACTICAL  AS  A  COM- 
BINED WORKING  MOTIVE  IN  THE  EVERY 
DAY  LIFE  OF  MAN 

THE  PROPER  CONTROL  OF  THOUGHT  AND  VOLI- 
TION AS  TWO  DISTINCT  ENTITIES    . 

THE  WILL  OF  MAN  OF  PARAMOUNT  IMPORTANCE 
IN  SECURING  HAPPINESS 


X  CONTENTS 

LABOR  AND  THE  DIVINE  LAW  OF  RESPECT  DUE 
TO  ITS  QUALITY 

joy's  rightful  place  RECOGNIZED  UNDER 
ALL  CONDITIONS 

SINCE  REASON  IS  NOT  AN  INFALLIBLE  GUIDE, 
WHY  WAS  MAN  ENDOWED  WITH  IT?       . 

THE  VASTNESS  OF  THE  REALM  OF  KNOWLEDGE, 
AND  WHY  AND  HOW  MAN  SHOULD  SEEK  TO 
INCREASE  THE    LITTLE   HE   HAS       . 

TRUTHS  AND  THEIR  MANY  ASPECTS 

THE  KNOWLEDGE  OF  SPIRITUAL  LIGHT  AN 
ASSET   OF   RESPONSIBILITY  .... 

HOW,  WITH  LIMITED  MEANS,  MAY  QUESTIONS  OF 
DRESS  BE  SATISFACTORILY  MET?  AND  IN 
WHAT  MAY  ONE   INDULGE   A  TRUE  PRIDE? 

HOW  TO  SEEK  RELIEF  IN  TIME  OF  NEED 

THE  RELATIONSHIP  BETWEEN  MIND  INDIVID- 
UALITY AND  SOUL 

CONTRASTED  SPIRITS  AND  THE  JUDGMENT 

WAYS  OF  HAPPINESS  CONSIDERED  AND  A  RIGHT 
WAY  DEFINED 

TOBACCO  AS  A  PROPHYLACTIC 

THE   HARMFULNESS  OF  ALCOHOLIC  DRINKS 

THE  WORK  FOR  GOD  AND  THE  RECOMPENSE       . 

HOW  TO  SEEK  HARMONY 

THE  UNDERLYING  SOURCE  OF  ALL  WRONG- 
DOING    

THE  HIGHER  LAW  APPLIED  TO  BUSINESS       . 

THE  TRUE  PARDONING  POWER  SPIRITUALLY 
CONSIDERED 

man's  need  of  GREATER  KNOWLEDGE  OF  SELF 
AND  FURTHER  REVELATIONS  AS  TO  THE 
SECRETS  OF  ACQUIRING  KNOWLEDGE    . 

THE   RICHES  OF   HEAVEN 

LET  THE  LIGHT  SHINE 


contents  xi 

man's  lack  of  appreciative  care  of  his 
body  and  the  proper  treatment  due 

IT 

WHY  THE  COMING  OF  THE  SECOND  BIRTH  IS  DE- 
LAYED   

THE  GIVING  UP  OF  ONE's  WILL  TO  GOD 

EVERY  man's  PRIVILEGE  TO  JOIN  A  HEAVENLY 
SOCIETY:   RULES  AND  REGULATIONS     . 

A  PLEA  FOR  THE  CULTIVATION  OF  NEGLECTED 
TALENTS     

INDIVIDUALITY  OF  THE  "STILL  SMALL  VOICE" 
AND    LAWS    OF    ITS    DEALINGS    WITH    MAN. 

THE  FULFILLING  OF  A  SPIRITUAL  LAW  AS  TO 
THE  HEALING  OF  THE  SICK  IN  BODY  AND 
MIND 

THE  MOST  PROPITIOUS  TIME  FOR  SOWING  NEW 
THOUGHT-SEEDS  AND  HOW  TO  CULTIVATE 
SO  AS  TO  INSURE  A  RICH  SPIRITUAL  HAR- 
VEST      

the  care  the  physically  weak  should 
exercise  in  regard  to  going  beyond 
their  limitations 

what  man  should  first  do  who  is  asking 
for  greater  revelations  of  truth     . 

the  right  method  for  settling  grievances 

discontent  and  its  cure 

man's   need  and   uses   for   a   cultivated 

SPIRITUAL  perception 

THE  CALL  TO  STRIVE  CONSTANTLY  TO  RECEIVE 
WHAT  GOD  WOULD  MAKE  KNOWN    . 

PRACTICAL  OBEDIENCE   TO  GOD  .... 

THE  QUESTION  OF  HOW  TO  DRESS    .... 

THE  VALUE  OF  SPARE  MOMENTS  NOT  PROPERLY 
APPRECIATED 

MAN  NOT  RESPONSIBLE  FOR  ALL  THE  SO- 
CALLED  SINS  OF  THE  WORLD    .... 


XII  CONTENTS 

HOW  MAY  MAN  LEARN  HERE  WHAT  AWAITS  HIM 
IN  THE  LIFE  BEYOND? 

WHY  CHARACTERS  DIFFER,  AND  SOMETIMES  SO 
SURPRISINGLY,  IN  MEMBERS  OF  THE  SAME 
FAMILY 

THE  DIFFERENCE  IN  HAPPINESS  AND  SORROW 
BEFORE  AND  AFTER  THE  SPIRIT  LEAVES 
THE    BODY  

THE  POWER  OF  SPIRITUAL  LIGHT  TO  REVEAL 
TO  MAN  HIS  OWN  TRUE  CONDITION  AND 
TO  ENABLE  HIM  TO  CLEANSE  HIS  HEART   . 

THE  LIFE  OF  THE  SOUL 

EARTHLY  PRIDE  AND  ITS  SPIRITUAL  EQUIVALENT 

CONDITIONS  WHICH  DRAW  SOME  SPIRITS  BACK 
TO  EARTH,  AND  EXAMPLES  OF  SOME  OF 
THE  PHASES  OF  UNHAPPINESS  EXPERI- 
ENCED   BY   MANY    

man's  HIGHEST  IDEAL-GOD;  MAN  HIGHEST  IN 
THE  SIGHT  OF  THE  LOWER  ANIMALS; 
WHAT  man's  IDEAL  SHOULD  TEACH  HIM 
OF    HIMSELF 

WILLINGNESS  TO  SACRIFICE  SELF  FOR  AN- 
OTHER'S WELFARE,  AND  THE  REWARD- 
BEARING  CHARACTER  OF  SUCH  WILLING- 
NESS       

SELF-INTEREST,  AS  A  CONSERVATIVE  ATTRIBUTE 
OF  MAN,  HAS  ITS  SPIRITUAL  USE  AND 
LIMITATIONS 

AN  EXTENDED  CAREER  FOR  EVERY  ACT  OF  MAN 

MEMORY  IN  ITS  PRESENT  AND  FUTURE  STATE    , 

HOW  THE  CONSCIENCE  SHOULD  BE  STRENGTH- 
ENED, AND  WHEN  MAN  IS  JUSTIFIED  IN 
YIELDING  TO  THE  CONSCIENTIOUS  CONVIC- 
TIONS OF  OTHERS 

A  MOST  PROFITABLE  USE  OF  TIME  WHEN  NOT 
EMPLOYED  IN  ANYTHING  THAT  COMMANDS 
THE  MENTAL  FACULTIES 


CONTENTS  XIII 

HONORS  PROPERLY  BELONGING  TO  ANOTHER 
BRING  FUTURE  HUMILIATION  TO  HIM  WHO 
APPROPRIATES  THEM  HERE       .... 

PROPER  CARE  OF  MIND  AND  BODY  AS  TO  OVER- 
TAXATION   

LEARN  TO  PAY  RESPECT  TO  THE  QUIET,  MAJES- 
TIC CERTAINTY  OF  TRUTH        .... 

HOW  MAN  MAY  SEEK  TO  RECOGNIZE  HIS  SOUL    . 

HOW  TO  RECALL  GOOD  RESOLUTIONS  FOR  THE 
PURPOSE  OF  FULFILLING  THEM:  A  SIMPLE 
RULE 

god's  PLANS  AND  WORK  AS  CREATOR  AND  DE- 
STROYER       

THE  COMING  OF  CHRIST 

IDEALS  BENEFICIAL;  HOW  TO  ENCOURAGE  THEM 
IN    OTHERS 

EVERY  man's  SPECIAL  PLACE  IN  GOD's  GREAT 
PLAN  AND  god's  LAW  FOR  THE  FINDING 
OF   IT 

THE  NEED  OF  A  SEARCHING  FOR  TRUTH  AND 
THE  REWARD  DUE  HIM  WHO  FINDS  IT  . 

THE  PRESENT  LIFE  AND  EXPERIENCES  OF  MAN, 
THEIR  RELATIONS  TO  HIS  IMMEASURABLE 
PAST  AND  FUTURE 

MUSIC,  ITS  NATURE  AND  GENERAL  APPLICATION 

HOW  MEMORY  EVER  CONTINUES  TO  PERPET- 
UATE EXPERIENCE  THROUGH  ITS  LESSONS 

THE  RELATIONS  BETWEEN  THINKING,  TALKING 
AND  ACTING 

HOW  DISAPPOINTMENTS  IN  THE  HEART's  YEARN- 
INGS THROUGHOUT  MORTAL  LIFE  ARE  TO 
BE  SATISFIED  IN  FULL  MEASURE  IN  THE 
REALM  OF  SPIRITUAL  EXISTENCE    . 

THE  MISSION  OF  SYMPATHY  IN  ITS  DOUBLE 
CAPACITY  OF  MINISTERING  TO  THOSE  IN 
OR  OUT  OF  THE  BODY 


XIV  CONTENTS 

THE  MISSION  OF  A  GUARDIAN  ANGEL  AND  MAN's 
DAILY  NEED  FOR  ONE 

TWO  VIEW-POINTS  FOR  THE  STUDY  OF   NATURE 

THE  UNIVERSAL  PATTERN  OF  LIFE  AND  MAN's 
INDIVIDUAL   PART  IN   IT 

THE  STRENGTH  OF  WILL  SPENT  ON  PRIDE  AND 
WHAT  IT  MIGHT  ACCOMPLISH  IF  DIRECTED 
IN  THE  INTEREST  OF  LOVE       .... 

BODILY  CONFORMATION  RESPONSIBLE  FOR 
MUCH  APPARENT  DIFFERENCE  IN  THE 
CHARACTER  OF  MEN  AND  ANIMALS       . 

SYMPATHY  A  DRAWING  INFLUENCE  AFFECTING 
DENIZENS  OF   BOTH   WORLDS    .... 

A  RULE  FOR  BEING  GOOD,  WITH  FURTHER 
RULES  FOR  IMPROVED  QUALITY  OF  GOOD- 
NESS, WHICH  IS  ESSENTIAL  TO  HIM  WHO 
WOULD    BE    REALLY   GOOD  .... 

THE  RIGHT  OF  THE  FOOLISH  TO  DO  FOOLISHLY 

LAUGHING  AND  JOYOUSNESS  A  PHYSICAL  AND 
SPIRITUAL  TONIC  TO  THOSE  ENTERING 
INTO  IT  IN  THE  RIGHT  SPIRIT;  MAY  BE 
HARMFUL  TO  THOSE  AVERSE  TO  IT      . 

NOTHING  IN  REALITY  IS  LITTLE  OR  UNIM- 
PORTANT, AND  THOUGHTS  BEAR  NO  EX- 
CEPTION TO  THIS  RULE 

WHAT  THOUGHT  OF  THE  FUTURE  SHOULD 
MOST  ENGAGE  MAN's  ATTENTION    . 

LIFE  AND  ITS  GRAND  MYSTERY 

THE  VALUE  OF  SMILES 

THE  NEED  OF  SYSTEM   IN  MEMORIZING  FACTS    . 

THE  IMPORTANCE  OF  OBSERVING  RIGHT 
VALUES,  REGARDLESS  OF  THE  HABITUAL 
AND  ORDINARY  ESTIMATES  SET  ON  CHAR- 
ACTER AND  THINGS 

ENEMIES;  WHY  NOT  FRIENDS,  AND  HOW  TO 
MAKE  THEM  SUCH  ;  A  TEST  OF  SALVATION 


CONTENTS  XV 

A  RATIONAL  RELIGION  THAT  BEGETS  PATIENCE 
TO  WAIT  FOR  THAT  FUTURE  WHICH  IS 
INEVITABLE 

GOD  A  PRESENT  HELPER;  WHY  MAN  DOES  NOT 
MORE   READILY   PERCEIVE   THIS       . 

PASSIVITY,  AND  LAWS  FOR  GUIDANCE  CONCERN- 
ING IT 

THE  POWER  OF  MORTALS  OR  SPIRITS  TO  USE 
LAWS  WHICH  THEY  HAVE  COME  TO  FULLY 
UNDERSTAND 

LIFE-MISSION  BY  APPOINTMENT  OF  GOD  AND 
HOW  MAN  IS  TO  SATISFY  HIMSELF  AS  TO 
ITS    FULFILLMENT 

THE  THREE  CHANNELS  OF  PHYSICAL,  MENTAL, 
AND    SPIRITUAL    SUPPLY 

FROM  THE  KNOWN  TO  THE  VASTNESS  OF  THE 
UNKNOWN  

HOW  GOD  COMMONLY  SPEAKS  AND  IS  HEARD       . 

THE  BEAUTIES  OF  HEAVEN  IN  THIS  WORLD 

THE  SPIRIT  OF  COMFORTING  WORDS 

HOW  TO  BREAK  THE  POWER  OF  TEMPTATION 
AND  REAP  SATISFACTION 

MAN  IN  HIS  RELATION  TO  GOD  AS  A  WILLFUL 
AND  DISOBEDIENT  CHILD 

THE  PURPOSE  OF  GOD  IN  REGARD  TO  THE 
SMALL  FORMS  OF  LIFE  WHICH  SEEM  TO  BE 
SUCH  AN  ENEMY  TO  MAN 

HE  WHO  IS  AND  HE  WHO  IS  NOT  AMBITIOUS       . 

TO  CURE  EVIL  AND  DISPEL  ITS  EFFECT  IN  ONE's 
OWN  MIND 

HOW  TO  WISELY  USE  THE  GIFT  OF  REASON   . 

THE  HELP  OF  A  SAVIOR  NEEDED  AND  OBTAIN- 
ABLE      

THE  IMPORTANCE  OF  NOW 

THE  VARYING  PASSIONS;  AND  HOW  TO  JUDGE 
AS  TO  HOW  MUCH  REAL  SPIRIT  THEY 
MANIFEST 


XVI  CONTENTS 

THE  FIRST  TWO  LESSONS  IN  CONSCIOUS  RECOG- 
NITION  OF   GOD       

PLANT  LIFE  AND  ITS  MYSTERIES  AS  RELATED  TO 
MAN 

THE  DIFFERENT  KINDS  OF  REST-PERIODS  MAN 
MUST  HAVE,  AND  HOW  THEY  SHOULD  BE 
REGARDED  .         .         

man's  BELIEF  OR  UNBELIEF  NO  PROOF  IN  IT- 
SELF  OF  SOUNDNESS  OF   DOCTRINE 

SOME  OF  THE  MOST  COMMON  DISTURBANCES  OF 
THE    NERVES  ANALYSED 

HOW  ONE  MAY  ASK  CHRIST  FOR  NEEDED  HELP: 
AND  HOW  TO  EXPECT  HIM  TO  GIVE  IT 

THE  LIFE  OF  THOUGHTS  AS  RELATED  TO  MAN    . 

THE  TEMPORARY  RESTS  THAT  OFTEN  INTER- 
VENE BETWEEN  THOUGHTS  AND  HOW  AP- 
POINTED GUARDIANS  SEEK  TO  UTILIZE 
THEM 

THE  MAJESTY  OF  SILENCE  AND  WHAT  IT 
SHOULD  MEAN  TO  MAN 

THE  LAW  OF  COMPREHENSION 

SUPERLATIVE  REST  FOR  MAN 

ASSERTING,  JUDGING,  USING  ONE's  FACULTIES 
TO  THE  BEST  PURPOSE  AND  FINDING  THE 
HIGHEST  RESULTS  IN  THE  SILENCE       . 

A  CRITICAL  ANALYSIS  OF  THE  LAW  OF  DUTY      . 

THE  QUESTION  CONSIDERED  AS  TO  THE  NEED 
OF  man's  KNOWING  THE  INFINITE  PLANS 
OF  GOD  WHILE  NEGLECTING  TO  FIND  OUT 
WHAT    HIS    OWN    THOUGHTS    REALLY   ARE. 

THE  LAWS  OF  INTERCHANGE  BETWEEN  MEN- 
TALITY AND  MATTER  IN  THE  SYSTEM  BY 
WHICH   EACH   IS  INDIVIDUALIZED    . 

THE  SCOPE  OF  TRUTH,  AND  GROWTH  OF  CAPAC- 
ITY TO  RECEIVE  NECESSARY  FOR  ITS  RE- 
CEPTION      


CONTENTS  XVII 

REAL  DESIRES  AND  MENTAL  DEMANDS,  HOW  TO 
HARMONIZE  AND  OBTAIN  THEM       . 

SEEKING  ETERNAL  TRUTHS  THROUGH  THE 
OPEN  DOOR  OF  LOVE  TO  GOD    .... 

MAN  IN  RELATION  TO  HIS  SOUL  .... 

THE  SEEMINGLY  TWO  NATURES  OF  MAN  EX- 
PLAINED       

A  MESSAGE,  THROUGH  THE  SAME  SOURCE,  TO 
THE  WRITER,  WHICH  MAY  BE  USEFUL  TO 
OTHER  SEEKERS  AFTER  TRUTH       . 

THE  LAW  AS  TO  PRAYER  AND  ANSWER  TO  PRAY- 
ER, THE  LAW  OF  SPIRIT  AS  TO  FREEDOM    . 

MUSIC 

ARTS  AND  THEIR  PROPER  RELATIONSHIP  TO  IN- 
DIVIDUALITY      

THE  RELATION  OF  GOD  AND  MAN  TO  PRAYER 
AND  ORDAINED  LAW 

A  PROPHETIC  DESCRIPTION  OF  THE  CHANGES 
AT  HAND  LEADING  TO  A  UNIVERSAL 
BROTHERHOOD 

WISDOM  AND  TRUTH  SECURED  TO  MAN 
THROUGH   HIS  SOUL 

A  PLEA  FOR  THE  SINNER 

MISSIONARY,  WHAT  CONSTITUTES  A  FULL  CALL- 
ING          

SEEKING  GOD  BY  CLOSE  OBSERVATION  OF  ANY 
PHENOMENON,  AND  THE  REWARD  THAT 
OBTAINS  WITH  THE  SEARCH     .... 

WHAT  CONSTITUTES  THE  TRUE  PRINCIPLE  OF 
ENCOURAGEMENT  FOR  AN  IMMORTAL 
BEING 

THE  GOOD,  A  WORSHIPFUL  IDEAL,  CAPABLE  OF 
BEING  LIVED  BOTH  PASSIVELY  AND 
ACTIVELY 

THE  PROPER  WAY  TO  PRESENT  TRUTH   . 


XVIII  CONTENTS 

LESSONS  OF  LIFE  AND  THEIR  CHANGING   BASES 

THE  SEASONS  OF  THE  SOUL 

A  GUIDE  TO  PEACE 

A  LAW  OF  CHEERFULNESS 

THE  CREATION  OF  MATTER  AND  THE  RELATION 

OF  MAN  TO  THE  INFINITE  .... 
HOPE     AND     ITS     EVERLASTING     RELATIONS     TO 

HAPPINESS 

GUIDES  TO  HAPPINESS 

WHAT    CLAIM     HAS    ONE    ABOVE    ANOTHER    IN 

FUTURE  REWARDS 

THE   MIND  HAS  ITS  REGULATING  LAWS,  AS  HAS 

MATTER       


CHRISTOPHER  PRESS,  BOSTON. 
Price  $2.00 


